AU680 Manual

AU680
USER GUIDE
© 2007 OLYMPUS CORPORATION. All Rights Reserved.
Olympus AU680 User Guide.
This User Guide as well as the system described in it may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of copyright. The content of this User
Guide is intended for instructional use only and is subject to change without notice.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical or
otherwise, without the prior written permission of OLYMPUS CORPORATION.
Please remember that existing artwork or images from this guide that you may want to include in your project may be protected under copyright law.
The unauthorized incorporation of such material into your new work could be a violation of the rights of the copyright owner. Please be sure to obtain
any permission required from the copyright owner.
Any references to any company names or peoples names in sample templates and screens are for demonstration purposes only and are not intended
to refer to any actual organization or names of persons.
Olympus Life Science Research Europa GmbH

Sauerbruchstrasse 50,
81377 Munich, EC REP
Germany.
E-mail: info@olympus-diagnostica.com
Homepage: www.olympus-diagnostica.com
Olympus Life Science Research Europa GmbH is the EC authorized representative of:
OLYMPUS CORPORATION
Shinjyuku Monolith, 3-1.
Nishi-Shinjyuku 2-chome,
Shinjyuku-ku, Tokyo, 163-0914
Japan
Mishima Olympus Co. Ltd.

454-1 Higashino,
Nagaizumi-cho,
Sunto-gun, Shizuoka 411-0931
Japan
Lumi-Phos ® 530 is a registered trademark of Lumigen, Inc., Southfield, Michigan, USA.

Windows ® is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Adobe Acrobat® Reader ® is either a registered trademark or trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Manufacturer EC REP Authorized Representative in the European Community

Contents
1 Introduction ........................................................1-1
1.1 Olympus Guarantee.......................................................................1-2
1.2 Using this Guide ............................................................................1-2
1.2.1 Assumptions.............................................................................................1-2
1.2.2 Where to Start ..........................................................................................1-3
1.2.3 System Installation ...................................................................................1-3
1.2.4 Users New to Automated Analyzers.........................................................1-3
1.2.5 System Administrators .............................................................................1-3
1.3 Using the Online Help....................................................................1-4

1.4 Printing this User Guide.................................................................1-6
1.5 Typographical Conventions Used in this Guide .............................1-7
1.5.1 Tips, Cautions and Warnings ...................................................................1-7
1.5.2 Software Paths .........................................................................................1-8
1.5.3 Software Buttons ...................................................................................... 1-8
1.5.4 Screen Illustrations...................................................................................1-9
1.5.5 Notation of Units.......................................................................................1-9
2 Precautions, Installation and Specifications ......2-1

2.1 Safe Use of the System .................................................................2-2
2.1.1 Observing Warning Labels .......................................................................2-3
2.1.2 Preventing Fire and Damage ...................................................................2-4
2.1.3 Preventing Electric Shocks.......................................................................2-4
2.1.4 Preventing Damage to Other Equipment and Facilities ...........................2-4
2.1.5 Preventing Personal and Serious Injury ...................................................2-5
2.1.6 Preventing Infection .................................................................................2-5
2.1.7 Handling the Keyboard, Monitor and Mouse ............................................2-6
2.1.8 Precautions for Operating the System ..................................................... 2-6
2.1.9 Ensuring Optimal Analytical Performance................................................2-6
2.1.10 Performing Important Checks at Analysis ................................................2-6
2.1.11 Handling Reagents, Detergents, Calibrators and QC Samples ............... 2-7
2.1.12 Handling Samples ....................................................................................2-8
2.1.13 Managing Liquid Waste............................................................................2-9
2.1.14 Managing Solid Waste .............................................................................2-9
2.1.15 Preventing Water Leaks ...........................................................................2-9
2.1.16 Electromagnetic Wave and Noise Precautions ...................................... 2-10
AU680 User Guide Version4.0 Contents i

2.1.17 Replacing Parts and Routine Maintenance ............................................ 2-10
2.1.18 Setting Analysis Parameters .................................................................. 2-10
2.1.19 Precautions for using the analyzer independently.................................. 2-11
2.1.20 Cleaning contaminants from the covers ................................................. 2-11
2.1.21 Other Precautions .................................................................................. 2-11
2.1.22 System Waste ........................................................................................ 2-11
2.2 Installation Environment Precautions ..........................................2-12

2.2.1 Installation Environment ......................................................................... 2-12
2.2.2 System Specifications ............................................................................ 2-17
2.2.3 Installation Space Requirements............................................................ 2-25
2.2.4 System Connections .............................................................................. 2-27
2.3 System Labels and Displays........................................................2-29

2.4 Trade Marks.................................................................................2-33
3 System Outline ..................................................3-1

3.1 How the AU680 Analyze Samples .................................................3-2
3.1.1 Reagent Blank..........................................................................................3-2
3.1.2 End Point Assay .......................................................................................3-3
3.1.3 Rate Assay ...............................................................................................3-5
3.1.4 Fixed Point Assay ....................................................................................3-6
3.1.5 Quality Control .........................................................................................3-6
3.1.6 Principle of the ISE Measuring Method .................................................. 3-10
3.2 Key Sub-Processes .....................................................................3-11

3.2.1 Computer Automation ............................................................................ 3-11
3.2.2 Sample Identification .............................................................................. 3-12
3.2.3 Sample Transfer..................................................................................... 3-13
3.2.4 Reagent Transfer ................................................................................... 3-13
3.2.5 Reaction Fluid Mixing ............................................................................. 3-13
3.2.6 Reaction fluid incubation and washing ................................................... 3-13
3.2.7 Measurement by Photometry ................................................................. 3-13
3.3 Understanding and Handling Reagents,

Calibrators and Controls...........................................................3-14
3.3.1 Reagents ................................................................................................ 3-14
3.3.2 Sample diluent ....................................................................................... 3-14
3.3.3 Calibration sample.................................................................................. 3-14
3.3.4 QC control sample.................................................................................. 3-15
3.4 Understanding the System Hardware ..........................................3-16

3.4.1 System Switches and Buttons................................................................ 3-18
3.4.2 Rack Feeder Unit ................................................................................... 3-19
3.4.3 Hand Scanner (Option) .......................................................................... 3-20
ii Contents AU680 User Guide Version4.0

3.4.4 Sample Cups and Tubes........................................................................ 3-21
3.4.5 Racks ..................................................................................................... 3-22
3.4.6 Sample Transfer Unit ............................................................................. 3-23
3.4.7 Reagent Transfer Unit ............................................................................ 3-24
3.4.8 Mixing Unit ............................................................................................. 3-24
3.4.9 Incubation bath part ............................................................................... 3-25
3.4.10 Photometry Unit ..................................................................................... 3-25
3.4.11 Wash Nozzle Unit................................................................................... 3-26
3.4.12 Reagent Refrigeration Unit..................................................................... 3-27
3.4.13 STAT Table Unit..................................................................................... 3-28
3.4.14 Syringe Unit............................................................................................ 3-30
3.4.15 Detergent rolling pump unit .................................................................... 3-31
3.4.16 Tank Storage.......................................................................................... 3-31
3.4.17 Breakers and Fuses ............................................................................... 3-32
3.4.18 ISE Unit (option) ..................................................................................... 3-32
3.5 Understanding the Computer Software .......................................3-33

3.5.1 Graphical User Interface (GUI)............................................................... 3-33
3.5.2 Main button bar ...................................................................................... 3-34
3.5.3 Processing time...................................................................................... 3-34
3.5.4 Measure Modes ..................................................................................... 3-35
3.5.5 Touch Screen and Keyboard ................................................................. 3-36
4 Configuring Tests .............................................4-1

4.1 Setting Analysis Mode ...................................................................4-2
4.1.1 Set the common conditions for rack analysis and STAT analysis............4-2
4.1.2 Set the Rack Number Limit ......................................................................4-5
4.1.3 Parameter Setting for STAT Table Analysis.............................................4-6
4.2 Setting the System Time................................................................4-9

4.3 Entering Online Settings ..............................................................4-10
4.3.1 Editing online conditions ........................................................................ 4-10
4.3.2 Setting the Online Protocol .................................................................... 4-12
4.3.3 Editing an online item No. ...................................................................... 4-14
4.4 Entry of Test Items.......................................................................4-15

4.4.1 Test Name Setting ................................................................................. 4-15
4.4.2 Creating a New Profile ........................................................................... 4-21
4.4.3 Adding the New Test to a Group ............................................................ 4-25
4.5 Setting Specific Test Parameters ................................................4-28

4.5.1 Set General Tests .................................................................................. 4-29
4.5.2 LIH Test Setting ..................................................................................... 4-33
4.5.3 ISE (option) Test Setting ........................................................................ 4-35
AU680 User Guide Version4.0 Contents iii

4.5.4 Set the HbA1c Analysis Parameters ...................................................... 4-36
4.5.5 Set Calculated Test Items ...................................................................... 4-38
4.5.6 Set the range.......................................................................................... 4-40
4.6 Programming Repeat Tests .........................................................4-42

4.6.1 Repeat run Parameter Setting................................................................ 4-43
4.6.2 Setting Specific Test Repeat run Parameters ........................................ 4-45
4.7 Set Calibration Analysis...............................................................4-47

4.7.1 Calibrator Registration............................................................................ 4-48
4.7.2 Set the Specific Calibration Parameters................................................. 4-51
4.7.3 Set Calibration using the STAT Table .................................................... 4-55
4.8 Configuring QC Analysis..............................................................4-59

4.8.1 Requesting QC Analysis ........................................................................ 4-60
4.8.2 Set the Specific Quality Control Parameters .......................................... 4-61
4.8.3 Set Quality Control Using the STAT Table............................................. 4-65
4.9 Setting the Tests to be Checked..................................................4-69

4.10 Preventing Contamination ...........................................................4-71
4.10.1 Preventing Contamination between Items.............................................. 4-72
4.10.2 Preventing Contamination between Sample Types ............................... 4-74
4.10.3 Setting the Contamination Prevention Conditions by Analysis Items..... 4-75
4.11 Setting up Data Lists....................................................................4-76

4.11.1 Set the Basic Condition for Print ............................................................ 4-76
4.12 Setting the test requisition format ................................................4-81

4.12.1 Setting the test requisition format........................................................... 4-81
5 Preparing for Analysis .......................................5-1

5.1 Preparing Samples for Analysis.....................................................5-2
5.1.1 Attaching barcode labels to Sample Racks..............................................5-3
5.1.2 Sample Barcode Specifications................................................................5-4
5.1.3 Sample cup preparation ...........................................................................5-7
5.1.4 Applying Barcode Labels to Sample Cups ............................................... 5-9
5.1.5 Sample Preparation ............................................................................... 5-10
5.1.6 Placing the Sample Cups/Tubes in the Rack ......................................... 5-11
5.1.7 Placing Racks on the Feeder ................................................................. 5-16
5.2 Starting the System .....................................................................5-18

5.2.1 Switching on the System. ....................................................................... 5-18
5.2.2 Logging into the System......................................................................... 5-19
5.2.3 Setting the Start Condition ..................................................................... 5-20
5.2.4 Creating New Index................................................................................ 5-21
5.2.5 Preparing for ISE (Option)...................................................................... 5-22
iv Contents AU680 User Guide Version4.0

5.3 Performing System Preparation...................................................5-27
5.3.1 Confirm the analyzer status and the reagent ......................................... 5-27
5.3.2 Checking the Printer (Option) and Paper ............................................... 5-31
5.4 Performing Daily Maintenance.....................................................5-32

5.5 Calibrating Tests..........................................................................5-33
5.6 Performing Quality Control (QC)..................................................5-36
5.7 Sample Requisitions: Entering Data and Choosing Tests ...........5-40
5.7.1 Group Setting ......................................................................................... 5-41
5.7.2 Entering Manual Requisitions................................................................. 5-43
5.7.3 Entering Batch Requisitions ................................................................... 5-45
5.7.4 Downloading Requisitions from a Host Computer.................................. 5-46
5.7.5 Entering Requisitions for Emergency Samples ...................................... 5-47
6 Performing Analysis...........................................6-1
6.1 Starting Analysis ............................................................................6-2
6.2 Monitoring Analysis........................................................................6-3
6.3 Disable a Tests ............................................................................6-10
6.4 Checking Results.........................................................................6-12
6.4.1 Checking the Test Results ..................................................................... 6-12
6.4.2 Displaying Reaction Monitor................................................................... 6-13
6.4.3 Checking Calibration and Reagent Blank............................................... 6-17
6.4.4 Checking for Error Flags and Alarms ..................................................... 6-24
6.4.5 Checking QC .......................................................................................... 6-25
6.5 Processing Emergency Samples.................................................6-30

6.5.1 Performing STAT Table Analysis ........................................................... 6-32
6.5.2 Simple STAT Mode ................................................................................ 6-38
6.5.3 Using a red rack ..................................................................................... 6-39
6.6 Printing Results............................................................................6-41

6.7 Performing a Repeat Run ............................................................6-44
6.7.1 Preparation for standard (manual) repeat test ....................................... 6-45
6.7.2 Performing a repeat test on the STAT table........................................... 6-47
6.7.3 Performing repeat test using an orange rack ......................................... 6-47
6.7.4 Checking the repeat-test result data ...................................................... 6-48
6.8 Forwarding the Data to Other PC ................................................6-50

6.9 Pausing Analysis Operation.........................................................6-51
6.10 Rack Supply Stop ........................................................................6-52
6.11 System Shutdown........................................................................6-53
AU680 User Guide Version4.0 Contents v

6.12 Analysis Stop (emergency stop) ..................................................6-54
6.13 Editing Quality Control Data ........................................................6-55
6.14 Editing Analysis Data...................................................................6-58
6.14.1 Rewriting of Patient Sample Data .......................................................... 6-59
6.14.2 Correction of Patient Sample Data......................................................... 6-61
6.14.3 Recalculation of Analysis Data Using a Changed Calibration Curve ..... 6-63
6.14.4 The edited data are transferred online ................................................... 6-64
6.15 Confirming the ISE (option) status ...............................................6-65

6.16 Managing Regent Condition ........................................................6-68
6.16.1 Checking Reagent Condition.................................................................. 6-68
6.16.2 Editing and Managing Reagent Condition.............................................. 6-71
7 Additional Tasks ................................................7-1

7.1 Using the Automatic Startup Function ...........................................7-2
7.2 Setting User Login .........................................................................7-4
7.2.1 Setting User Name and Password ...........................................................7-4
7.2.2 Delete .......................................................................................................7-6
7.2.3 Setting Menu Access Level ......................................................................7-7
7.2.4 Security Settings ...................................................................................... 7-8
7.3 Creating a User Menu..................................................................7-10

7.4 Calculating Statistics....................................................................7-12
7.4.1 Viewing Data Statistics........................................................................... 7-12
7.4.2 Creating a Correlation Chart .................................................................. 7-16
7.4.3 Selecting Histogram Data....................................................................... 7-18
7.5 Calibration Verification .................................................................7-19

7.5.1 Entering Material Parameters................................................................. 7-19
7.5.2 Displaying the Verification Chart ............................................................ 7-20
7.6 Using Comment Master ...............................................................7-22

7.7 Data Management .......................................................................7-24
7.7.1 External Data Management.................................................................... 7-25
7.7.2 Backup of Analysis Condition File .......................................................... 7-27
7.7.3 Off line conditions................................................................................... 7-29
7.8 Print the Set Contents..................................................................7-31
vi Contents AU680 User Guide Version4.0

8 Maintenance ......................................................8-1
8.1 Using the Routine Maintenance Schedule.....................................8-2
8.2 Maintenance Log ...........................................................................8-3
8.2.1 Adding a Maintenance Task.....................................................................8-3
8.2.2 Updating the Maintenance Register .........................................................8-4
8.2.3 Viewing Maintenance History ...................................................................8-6
8.3 Daily Maintenance .........................................................................8-7

8.3.1 Checking for any leak from sample dispenser, reagent dispenser,
and wash water dispenser ....................................................................8-7
8.3.2 Checking for any leak from detergent rolling pump unit ......................... 8-10
8.3.3 Checking the quantity of master detergent and supplying it................... 8-12
8.3.4 Checking and cleaning the sample probe, reagent probe,
and mixing bar..................................................................................... 8-14
8.3.5 Checking the Printer and Paper ............................................................. 8-17
8.4 Weekly Maintenance ...................................................................8-18

8.4.1 Manual cleaning the sample probe and mixing bars .............................. 8-19
8.4.2 Execution of W2 (Automatic washing of each probe, mixing bar,
and cuvette, etc.)................................................................................. 8-22
8.4.3 Execution of Photocal measurement...................................................... 8-25
8.4.4 Cleaning the sample pre-diluent bottle................................................... 8-28
8.5 Monthly Maintenance...................................................................8-29

8.5.1 Cleaning the Sample Probe and Reagent Probe Wash Stations ........... 8-30
8.5.2 Cleaning the HbA1c probe wash station ................................................ 8-32
8.5.3 Cleaning the Mixing Bar Wash Station................................................... 8-35
8.5.4 Cleaning the wash nozzle unit and checking the tube mounting joints .. 8-37
8.5.5 Cleaning the Deionized Water Filter....................................................... 8-43
8.5.6 Cleaning the Sample Probe Filter .......................................................... 8-46
8.6 Maintenance Every Three Months ...............................................8-49

8.6.1 Cleaning Air Filters ................................................................................. 8-50
8.6.2 Replacing the Deionized Water Filter..................................................... 8-51
8.6.3 Replacing the Sample Probe Filter......................................................... 8-53
8.6.4 Cleaning the Deionized Water Tank....................................................... 8-55
8.6.5 Replacing the Detergent Rolling Tube ................................................... 8-58
8.7 Maintenance Performed Every Six Months .................................8-61

8.7.1 Replacing the Photometer Lamp............................................................ 8-61
8.7.2 Washing Cuvettes and the Cuvette Wheel............................................. 8-65
8.8 Maintenance Performed Yearly or As Necessary........................8-70

8.8.1 Replacing O-rings in the wash nozzle supply tube mounting joints ....... 8-71
8.8.2 Replacing cuvettes ................................................................................. 8-73
8.8.3 Manual Wash the reagent probe ............................................................ 8-75
8.8.4 Replacing Sample Probe and Reagent Probes...................................... 8-76
AU680 User Guide Version4.0 Contents vii

8.8.5 Replacing Mixing Bars............................................................................ 8-79
8.8.6 Replacing the wash nozzle joint ............................................................. 8-81
8.8.7 Replacing syringes ................................................................................. 8-85
8.8.8 Cleaning the inside of the STAT table unit
and reagent refrigeration unit .............................................................. 8-91
8.8.9 Replacing the antistatic brush ................................................................ 8-93
8.8.10 Replacing rack ID labels......................................................................... 8-94
8.8.11 Replacing the Sample Probe and Reagent Probes Tubes..................... 8-95
8.8.12 Executing W1 (auto-washing of the sample probe and cuvettes) .......... 8-97
8.8.13 Replacing Air Filters ............................................................................... 8-98
8.8.14 Replacing syringe cases and syringe heads .......................................... 8-99
8.8.15 Replacing packing in the wash nozzle tube mounting joints ................ 8-105
8.9 Resetting the system when switched to the stop mode

while performing maintenance ...............................................8-106
8.10 Using the OSV (Option) .............................................................8-107
8.10.1 Transmitting the files ............................................................................ 8-108
8.10.2 When the OSV connection is off .......................................................... 8-109
8.11 AU680 Maintenance Schedule ..................................................8-110
9 Error Flag...........................................................9-1
9.1 Summary of Error Flags.................................................................9-2
9.2 Error Flag Details ...........................................................................9-4
10 Error Messages ...............................................10-1
11 Troubleshooting ...............................................11-1
11.1 Troubleshooting and Maintenance ..............................................11-2
11.2 Troubleshooting the System - Data Problems .............................11-2
11.2.1 Data Problem Checklist.......................................................................... 11-2
11.2.2 Checking Abnormal Data ....................................................................... 11-3
11.2.3 Troubleshooting Software ...................................................................... 11-4
11.3 Troubleshooting the System - Reagents and Samples ...............11-6

11.3.1 Sample Related Issues .......................................................................... 11-6
11.3.2 Reagent Related Issues ......................................................................... 11-7
11.3.3 QC and Calibrator Related Issues.......................................................... 11-8
11.3.4 Detergent Related Issues....................................................................... 11-8
11.3.5 Deionized Water Related Issues ............................................................ 11-8
11.3.6 Other Causes of Abnormal Data ............................................................ 11-9
viii Contents AU680 User Guide Version4.0

11.4 Troubleshooting the System - Mechanical Problems ................11-10
11.4.1 Syringe Problems ................................................................................. 11-10
11.4.2 Probe Problems ................................................................................... 11-11
11.4.3 Abnormal Data Caused by Cuvette Wheel or Wash Nozzles .............. 11-12
11.4.4 Abnormal Data Caused by Photometer Lamp or Photometer Unit ...... 11-13
11.4.5 Mixing Problems................................................................................... 11-13
11.4.6 Deionized Water Tank Problems.......................................................... 11-13
11.4.7 Deionized Water or Filter Problems ..................................................... 11-14
11.4.8 Incubation Temperature Problems ....................................................... 11-14
11.4.9 Piping and Pump Problems.................................................................. 11-14
11.4.10 Reagent Refrigerator Problems............................................................ 11-15
11.4.11 STAT table problems............................................................................ 11-15
11.4.12 Rack Problems ..................................................................................... 11-15
11.5 Troubleshooting the System - System Problems.......................11-16

11.5.1 TEMP REF HIGH Alarm for the Cooling Unit ....................................... 11-16
11.5.2 Abnormal Sound from Inside the System............................................. 11-17
11.5.3 Empty alarm for the water supply tank ................................................. 11-17
11.5.4 Leaks from the detergent rolling pump................................................. 11-17
11.5.5 Barcode Errors ..................................................................................... 11-18
11.5.6 Leaks from the Bottom of the System .................................................. 11-18
11.5.7 No Detergent to Mixing Bars ................................................................ 11-18
11.5.8 Reagent Alarm when Sufficient Reagent Remains in Bottles .............. 11-18
11.5.9 Sample Alarm when Sufficient Sample Remains ................................. 11-19
11.5.10 No Sample Cup Alarm when Sample Cup is Present .......................... 11-19
11.5.11 No Sample Cup Irrespective of Its Presence on the STAT Table ........ 11-19
11.5.12 Printer Not Printing or Printer Light Not On .......................................... 11-19
11.5.13 Liquid Leaking from a Reagent Probe and Sample Probe ................... 11-19
11.5.14 Reagent Probe and Sample Probe not Aligned over the Cuvette ........ 11-20
11.5.15 Error Flag # (Sample Level Detection Error)
Displayed in the Second Half of the Sample Dispense Operation .... 11-20
11.5.16 TEMP DIL Alarm for the Wash Heat Unit ............................................. 11-20
11.5.17 Sample Rack Jammed ......................................................................... 11-20
11.5.18 Printer Problems................................................................................... 11-21
11.6 Troubleshooting the System - Data Processor Problems ..........11-22

11.6.1 Menu Cannot be Selected.................................................................... 11-22
11.6.2 Number Key Pad on Keyboard Does Not Work ................................... 11-22
11.6.3 Keyboard Not Responding ................................................................... 11-23
11.6.4 Inaccessible Floppy Disc...................................................................... 11-23
11.6.5 Results Do Not Print Automatically ...................................................... 11-24
11.6.6 Online Auto-Output by Host Computer Not Executed .......................... 11-24
11.6.7 No Data Stored Despite Space on Disc ............................................... 11-24
11.6.8 Unsuccessful Movement of Data between the System
and the Host Computer ..................................................................... 11-25
AU680 User Guide Version4.0 Contents ix

11.7 Recovering from an Emergency Stop or Power Loss ................11-26
11.7.1 Performing an Emergency Stop ........................................................... 11-26
11.7.2 Resetting the System after a Power Failure or an Emergency Stop .... 11-27
12 Menu Tree .......................................................12-1

12.1 Home Menu .................................................................................12-2
12.2 Permanently displayed Button Configuration and Function .........12-3
12.3 Menu Buttons Overview...............................................................12-4
12.4 Routine Menu ..............................................................................12-5
12.5 Calibration Menu..........................................................................12-6
12.6 QC Menu .....................................................................................12-7
12.7 Parameters Menu ........................................................................12-8
12.8 Maintenance Menu ......................................................................12-9
12.9 System Menu.............................................................................12-10
13 AU680 Terminology .........................................13-1
14 Index ................................................................14-1
x Contents AU680 User Guide Version4.0

1
Introduction
Thank you for choosing the Olympus AU680

system. This automated chemistry analyzer
measures analytes in samples, in combination
with appropriate reagents, calibrators, quality
control (QC) materials and other accessories.
This system is for in vitro diagnostic use only.
To ensure optimal performance and prevent
system failure, you should always operate the
system in accordance with the procedures
outlined.
This chapter discusses the following:
1.1 Olympus Guarantee. See page 1-2.

1.2 Using this Guide. See page 1-2.
1.3 Using the Online Help. See page 1-4.
1.4 Printing this User Guide. See page 1-6.
1.5 Typographical Conventions Used in this Guide. See page 1-7.
AU680 User Guide Version4.0 1. Introduction 1-1

1.1 Olympus Guarantee
Olympus guarantees this analyzer to be free from defects in materials or workmanship
under normal use for a period of one year commencing on the day of purchase. If the
system is rendered defective within the guarantee period, it is repaired onsite free of
charge. The Olympus guarantee does not include the following:
• Defect or damage caused by natural disasters such as fires or floods.
• Defect or damage caused by carelessness or abuse.
• Defect or damage resulting from maintenance performed by personnel not approved
by Olympus.
• Defect or damage caused by the use of consumable or fitting replacement parts not
supplied by Olympus.
• Malfunction caused by unauthorized disassembly.
• Corrosion of the electrical system caused by exposure to a system environment other
than that stated in this guide.
• Loss of stored data caused by inadequate or incorrect system maintenance.
Olympus is not liable for any consequential damages such as loss of profit or business
that might arise from the misuse of this system.
Olympus offers a maintenance and repair service after the guarantee period has
expired.
For details, please contact your local Olympus representative.
1.2 Using this Guide

This user guide explains how to use the system effectively and safely. It is also a
maintenance and troubleshooting guide and is intended as a primary source of
reference for all AU680 users. This includes all medical laboratory personnel who may
operate any part of the system or might have to prepare samples to be processed by
the system. The following describes how to use this user guide:
1.2.1 Assumptions. See page 1-2.
1.2.2 Where to Start. See page 1-3.
1.2.3 System Installation. See page 1-3.
1.2.4 Users New to Automated Analyzers. See page 1-3.
1.2.5 System Administrators. See page 1-3.
1.2.1 Assumptions
It is assumed that the user has a general understanding of biochemical analysis and
specialist knowledge of sample handling and analysis. This guide also assumes users
have basic PC operating skills and knowledge of the MS Windows® operating system.
Users who have never used a PC or a PC operating system should get basic PC skills
training before using the system.
1-2 1. Introduction AU680 User Guide Version4.0

1.2.2 Where to Start
Before operating this system, you should receive training either directly from Olympus
or from someone who has already attended an Olympus-approved training course.
While this user guide deals with each system procedure in a step-by-step manner, it is
not a substitute for training.
If you are looking for information related to a specific concept or topic, use the search
function in the PDF version of this guide, or the index at the back of this guide.
For information about how to use the online help, refer to “1.3 Using the Online Help” on
page 1-4.
If you are looking for information on a specific topic, use the index at the back of this
guide. The index lists every topic in alphabetical order, followed by the page number.
If you are looking for a specific chapter, you can either use the fast find tabs or the table
of contents at the beginning of the guide.
1.2.3 System Installation

This guide contains information related to the system environment and hardware, but it
is not an installation guide. Installation of the AU680 should be performed by Olympus-
approved engineers only. There is therefore no installation information supplied with this
system. If you wish to change any aspect of the installation, please contact your local
technical support organization or seek the help of an Olympus-approved installation
engineer.
1.2.4 Users New to Automated Analyzers

It is recommended that you read this user guide thoroughly before operating the system
even if you have completed an Olympus-approved, instructor-led training course.
1.2.5 System Administrators

Ensure you read chapters 1, 2 and 3 carefully and follow the procedures outlined. The
computer hardware and software parameters should be part of an internal maintenance
routine and all data produced by the system should be backed up regularly with copies
stored onsite and offsite.
Ensure you read the section “7.2.1 Setting User Name and Password” on page 7-4.
This allows you to:
• Create a secure operating environment where unauthorized users cannot interfere
with the system while it is in operation.
• Track the actions of each user. When each user logs out, the period of time spent
working on the system is added to the alarm log list file. This file should be backed up
regularly for security reasons.

1.3 Using the Online Help
This system is shipped with a PDF copy of this user guide. If there are concerns or
questions during system operation, alarm descriptions, operating procedures and other
functional instruction may be displayed on screen. To display the PDF version of this
guide, touch the Help icon on the screen.
Help icon
Alarm List
Help windows are available to assist the operator in accessing alarm descriptions, how
to use selected menu functions, etc., as described in the table below. There are three
types of help as shown in the following table.
Type of Help Displayed Description

Operation Help Displays operating procedures.
Touch the Help icon. When using a keyboard, press F1 while
holding down Ctrl.
Alarm Help Displays alarm descriptions and corrective actions.
Touch Alarm List to display the Alarm List screen. Touch the
Help icon on the Alarm List screen.
For information about alarm descriptions, refer to “10 Error
Messages” on page 10-1.
TIP Help Displays the range of input values such as analysis parameters.
When you move the mouse pointer to the input area. The Tip
help will show.

If you are unsure of the function of a button, hover the cursor over the button and a pop-
up message indicates what each button does.
TIP
This PDF file is viewed using the Adobe Acrobat® Reader® software. Major features of
the Adobe Acrobat® Reader® software include:
• Zoom in and out:
Use either the plus or minus button to the left and right of the percentage reading or
click the magnifier and then click the page. To decrease the size of the page, select
the minus magnifier from the drop-down list.
• Maximize and resize:
To resize the reader window (e.g. to make it smaller), click the Restore Down button
in the top right-hand corner of the window. Position the cursor at the edge of the
window and when it changes to a double-ended arrow, drag the borders of the
window to the size you want. As you do this, the size of the document automatically
zooms so you can still read as much text.
To expand the window to fit the full size of the screen again, click the Maximize
button.
• Browse from one page to another:
Use the Next Page and Previous Page buttons at the bottom of the window.
• Search for information by entering a search string:
Click the binoculars symbol. Enter the search string and click search.
• Close the Acrobat® Reader®:
To close the PDF file when you have finished using it, click the X button in the top
right-hand corner of the Reader® window.

1.4 Printing this User Guide
It is recommended that you print this guide double-sided on A4 paper of not less than
110g/m2. You can print it in either black and white, blue and black or full color.
To print the guide on both sides of the paper:
1. Click the printer icon on the top tool bar of the Adobe® Acrobat® Reader.
2. Click Properties and select a high print quality.
3. Select Print all pages and select print Even Pages Only.
4. When all even pages are printed, take them out and turn them printed side up.
Then re-insert the pages so that the header enters the feeder first. If your printer takes
paper from the top of the input hopper, you need to reverse the order of the pages.
When even pages have been printed, allow the pages to dry before re-inserting them.
This prevents smears.
TIP
5. Select Print all pages and select print Odd Pages Only.
6. When pages are printed, remove them and check that each odd page has printed
on the back of an even page. Check every page.
If your printer takes paper from the top of the input hopper, reverse the order of the pages.

1.5 Typographical Conventions Used in
this Guide
This section describes the conventions used in the text of this guide:
1.5.1 Tips, Cautions and Warnings. See page 1-7.
1.5.2 Software Paths. See page 1-8.
1.5.3 Software Buttons. See page 1-8.
1.5.4 Screen Illustrations. See page 1-9.
1.5.5 Notation of Units. See page 1-9.
1.5.1 Tips, Cautions and Warnings

This guide uses the following symbolic marks and terms according to the content of
information. Each convention and term indicates the level of its importance. A thorough
understanding of this information is necessary to use the system safely and correctly.
For other precautions, refer to “2 Precautions, Installation and Specifications” on page 2-1.
WARNING
This symbol indicates a warning. Warnings indicate that great care must be exercised.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury, serious degradation of system function or
the potential to generate incorrect sample data.
CAUTION
This symbol indicates a caution. Cautions indicate that appropriate care or action must
be taken. Failure to do so might result in minor injury, sub-optimal system performance
or damage, which might generate hazards.
TIP
This book symbol indicates a note. Notes contain important supplementary information
that users should take into account when performing procedures or understanding
concepts.

1.5.2 Software Paths
A software path is a sequence of options you should select in the software interface in
the order indicated.
Software paths in this guide are expressed as follows:
Select Routine>Test Requisition>Calibration.
Following this path, you first click the Routine menu, then Test Requisition on that menu
and finally Calibration on the resulting submenu. Software buttons, such as System
Status that are part of such a sequence also use this blue font.
1.5.3 Software Buttons

All buttons that appear in the software interface and are part of a single procedural step
appear in large highlighted blue font. When you should touch the Start Entry button, for
example, it appears as follows:
1. Touch Start Entry (F4).
Some software buttons have a corresponding function key that can be pressed on the
keyboard instead of using the mouse. This appears in brackets after each button in
every procedure.
The following figure shows an example of a software window with a button bar.
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8

1.5.4 Screen Illustrations
• The use of partial screen shots to enhance or reinforce understanding throughout this
guide.
• Illustrations are not intended to supersede printed instructions provided Screen shots
illustrated in this guide may differ from the actual appearance in font size or location
relative to other items on the displayed menu page.
1.5.5 Notation of Units

In this guide units are denoted with the International System of Units (SI). The
conversion ratio is as follows.
1 Pa = 0.102 Kgf/cm2

Precautions,
Installation and
2
Specifications
You must understand how to operate the
AU680 safely before you begin using the
system.
This chapter provides instructions on:
2.1 Safe Use of the System. See page 2-2.
2.2 Installation Environment Precautions. See page 2-12.
2.3 System Labels and Displays. See page 2-29.
2.4 Trade Marks. See page 2-33.
AU680 User Guide Version4.0 2. Precautions, Installation and

Specifications
2-1
2.1 Safe Use of the System
In case of not using this system according to the instruction we recommend, the safety
function provided to the system will not be exercised.
You should read the following safety precautions carefully before using the system. If
the system is not operated according to these precautions, the manufacturer or provider
cannot be liable for any damage or injury that might result.
This section provides safety information on:
2.1.1 Observing Warning Labels. See page 2-3.
2.1.2 Preventing Fire and Damage. See page 2-4.
2.1.3 Preventing Electric Shocks. See page 2-4.
2.1.4 Preventing Damage to Other Equipment and Facilities. See page 2-4.
2.1.5 Preventing Personal and Serious Injury. See page 2-5.
2.1.6 Preventing Infection. See page 2-5.
2.1.7 Handling the Keyboard, Monitor and Mouse. See page 2-6.
2.1.8 Precautions for Operating the System. See page 2-6.
2.1.9 Ensuring Optimal Analytical Performance. See page 2-6.
2.1.10 Performing Important Checks at Analysis. See page 2-6.
2.1.11 Handling Reagents, Detergents, Calibrators and QC Samples. See page 2-7.
2.1.12 Handling Samples. See page 2-8.
2.1.13 Managing Liquid Waste. See page 2-9.
2.1.14 Managing Solid Waste. See page 2-9.
2.1.15 Preventing Water Leaks. See page 2-9.
2.1.16 Electromagnetic Wave and Noise Precautions. See page 2-10.
2.1.17 Replacing Parts and Routine Maintenance. See page 2-10.
2.1.18 Setting Analysis Parameters. See page 2-10.
2.1.19 Precautions for using the analyzer independently. See page 2-11.
2.1.20 Cleaning contaminants from the covers. See page 2-11.
2.1.21 Other Precautions. See page 2-11.
2.1.22 System Waste. See page 2-11.
2-2 2. Precautions, Installation and

Specifications
AU680 User Guide Version4.0
2.1.1 Observing Warning Labels
Observe the following warning labels that appear on parts of the system where caution
must be exercised. Do not cover up or remove these labels. If they peel off or become
illegible, please inform your local technical support organization. Orange labels warn of
the risk of Serious Injury. Yellow labels warn of the risk of Personal Injury, Fire or
Damage.
These are the warning labels:
Label Explanation
Electric shock: This symbol denotes an area of the system that should
under no circumstances be accessed as a shock risk exists.
High temperature danger: This symbol denotes the caution of burning

by touching the hot photometer lamp directly when replacing it.
Biological risks: This symbol warns of biohazardous material. Wear

protective clothing and follow universal precautions as dictated by local or
national regulations (CLSI GP17-A2, ISO15190 or 29CFR 1910.1030).
Laser radiation: This symbol warns the user that a laser is part of the
device. To avoid eye injuries do not look directly into the laser beam.
Danger: This label indicates a potential hazard which, if not avoided, can
result in injury to an operator and/or serious property damage.
Personal injury: This symbol denotes areas where a risk of injury due to
system movement--fingers or other parts of the body should be kept clear of
these areas during system operation.

Specifications
2-3
2.1.2 Preventing Fire and Damage
To safeguard the system from fire and damage, adhere to the following guidelines:
• Install this system correctly in accordance with the installation environments and
conditions described in this guide.
• This system should only be installed by Olympus-approved personnel.
• Please contact the Olympus Sales or Service Department if you wish to alter your
installation.
• Any malfunction or system error should be dealt with promptly by contacting your
local technical support organization.
• In the event of a system malfunction, the system must be completely powered off
using the main breaker which is at the left side of the system prior to any intervention.
• In case of spilling liquid on the system, quickly turn off the main breaker which is at
the left side of the system. After turning off the breaker for the whole system, wipe off
the liquid.
• This system is not explosion-proofed. Do not use any flammable or explosive gases
near the system.
• In case of definitely shutting down the power to the system, shut down the breaker of
a power connector connected to the system.
2.1.3 Preventing Electric Shocks
To prevent electric shocks, adhere to the following guidelines:

• Never remove surfaces secured by screws, including the rear and side covers.
• If liquid spills or leaks within the system, contact the Olympus Service Department
immediately. Careless handling of liquids around the system might result in an
electric shock.
2.1.4 Preventing Damage to Other Equipment and

Facilities
This system should have a separate power connection socket outlet so that it cannot
interfere with other electrical devices.

Specifications
2.1.5 Preventing Personal and Serious Injury
Minor injury is considered any injury that does not require hospitalization or long term
medical care. Serious injury is considered any injury that leaves permanent effects and
requires long term medical care or hospitalization.
To prevent personal and serious injury, adhere to the following guidelines:
• When handling a reagent or detergent, be sure to wear appropriate protective gear
(rubber gloves, goggles, mask, and protective clothing -per facility SOP(s)).
• Always operate the system with all covers closed.
• Do not touch any moving parts of the system while it is in operation.
• Do not put your fingers or hands into any holes or openings.
• Observe the system labels and the precautions in this user guide.
• See the Personal Computer and Printer Operation Manuals for information on
operating those devices safely.
• Some reagents and detergents used in this system are either strong acids or strong
bases (alkaline). Do not handle them with bare hands or splash them on your
clothing.
• Do not look into the lens of the barcode readers while the system is powered on.
Light entering your eyes directly from the beam of light from the barcode reader may
result in eye damage.
• Prevent injury from handling sharp - tipped parts (ie; sample probe, reagent probe,
mixer bars) by wearing rubber gloves.
• To replace the photometer lamp, allow at least five minutes for the lamp to cool down.
The photometer lamp operates at very high temperatures. Direct contact with a hot
lamp may cause burns.
2.1.6 Preventing Infection

To avoid infection, adhere to the following guidelines:
• Always wear personal protective clothing when handling samples and racks,
performing maintenance and managing waste.
• Handle all patient samples as potentially infectious and follow universal precautions
as dictated by local or national regulations (Clinical and Laboratory Standards
Institute CLSI GP17-A2, ISO15190 or 29CFR 1910.1030).
• If infectious substances come in contact with your skin, flush the area and seek
medical advice.
• Wipe off any spilled contaminant immediately from the system.
• If any of the reagents or samples are accidentally swallowed, seek medical advice.
• Wear appropriate protective clothing. If you have any allergy, exercise special care
for chemicals.
• While the system is operating, do not touch the sample probe and wash nozzle.

Specifications
2-5
2.1.7 Handling the Keyboard, Monitor and Mouse
• To prevent the touchscreen, keyboard and mouse from deteriorating, do not allow
liquid to come into contact with them.
• This system is not intended for extended periods of computer keyboard activity. If you
intend to spend long periods of time (i.e >30mins) refer to local RSI guidelines and
adjust the workstation as needed to ensure a comfortable position and take frequent
breaks.
2.1.8 Precautions for Operating the System

• Exercise care in the setting of reference materials and patient samples. Incorrect
placement of reference materials or patient samples may cause erroneous analysis
results.
• After transferring the analysis results check the sample numbers and sample IDs.
Transfer each piece of measurement data correctly.
• Operate this system in accordance with the procedures described in this guide.
Erroneous operation may not only cause improper results, but also may result in
system failure.
• To learn about total system operations, attend the training course offered by
Olympus. The operation of this system is intended for personnel who have completed
the training course offered by Olympus, or personnel who have been trained by those
who have attended our training course.
2.1.9 Ensuring Optimal Analytical Performance

Interfering substances such as Lipemia, Icterus and Hemolysis can alter test results.
Refer to the reagent package insert for specific interfering substance information.
2.1.10 Performing Important Checks at Analysis

To ensure the validity of analytical data, operators should pay particular attention to the
following:
• Ensure system maintenance is performed adequately and repeat if necessary.
• Ensure the quality of deionized water is within specifications.
• Check the dispensers and tubing for leaks.
• Check the tubing and syringes for leaks, clogging, and air-bubbles before analysis.
For example, unless probe washing and cuvette washing are performed sufficiently,
correct measurement results may not be obtained.
• Check the samples for contaminants (dust, fibrin, etc.).
• Check the quantity of each sample and that no bubbles are present.
• Check the calibration for abnormality. Ensure that a valid up-to-date calibration is
being used.
• Check the quality control data.
• Check the individual analysis results for flags.

Specifications
2.1.11 Handling Reagents, Detergents, Calibrators and
QC Samples
• To analyze samples, the appropriate reagent, reference material, and QC sample are
required. The products are commercialized by reagent manufacturer. For information
about which reagent, etc., to use, consult the relevant reagent manufacturer or
distributor.
• Strictly follow any safety instructions supplied with reagents, calibrators and QC
samples. Refer to your local technical support organization for any questions
concerning the safe handling of any material to be used on this system.
• Consult the relevant reagent manufacturer or distributor for the stability of the
unsealed reagent, etc.
• To set reagents and others in the system, follow the instructions in this guide and
those from the reagent manufacturer or distributor. Check also that there are no
foreign substances in the reagent and no bubbles on the reagent surface. Unless the
reagent is set correctly, appropriate analysis results cannot be obtained. This may
result in damage to the system.
• Prepare reagents, detergents, calibrators and QC samples in accordance with the
Instructions For Use (IFU), paying particular attention to any reconstitution, mixing
and pretreatment instructions.
• Avoid excessive reagent agitation, which can cause bubbles. If bubbles on the
surface of the reagent are visible, they should be removed.
• After replacing the reagent be sure to perform calibration analysis. Unless calibration
analysis is performed, appropriate analysis results may not be obtained.
• Depending on the combination of reagents, a waste liquid precipitate may develop.
This may cause clogging of drain tubing. Consult the relevant reagent manufacturer
for details.
• Follow all applicable warnings or advice regarding carryover affects between analysis
tests. If a reagent is contaminated with another reagent during analysis operation, as
analysis results may be affected. The actual effect of interference differs depending
on the reagent. For detailed information, contact the relevant reagent manufacturer
or distributor. For information about how to check the interference between analysis
tests, contact an Olympus Service Department.

Specifications
2-7
2.1.12 Handling Samples
To handle samples safely, adhere to the following guidelines.
Samples available for analysis

• This system is designed to analyze serum, urine, whole blood (for HbA1c only), and
plasma samples. There may be some samples that cannot be analyzed depending
on the analysis test, reagent and sample tube used. Refer to Olympus Technical
Support for questions regarding reagent or sample tube type.
• Use serum or plasma that is sufficiently separated from blood clots, or urine that is
free from suspended matter. If serum or urine that is not sufficiently separated from
clots or suspended matter is used, the probe may be clogged and adverse effects on
analysis may result.
• Chemicals present in the sample (medicine, anti-coagulant, preservative, etc.) may
cause clinically significant interference with the samples. Care should be exercised.
• Highly viscous samples may impede the reliability of data.
Precautions in handling and storing samples

Refer to the package insert for sample collection and storage.
Refrigeration of blood will increase K (potassium) in the blood. Improper storage of
samples may alter the analyte in a sample.
Pretreating samples
• Use only the sample tubes that are specified by Olympus.
• Serum and plasma specimens should be adequately centrifuged and then separated
from blood cells as soon as possible, to reduce the risk of adulteration. Prior to
analysis, specimens should be free from suspended matter, such as fibrin. Whilst the
system has a sophisticated clot detection mechanism, this should not be relied upon
solely and careful inspection of the samples is imperative.
• Urine samples should be collected into appropriate preservatives and any suspended
matter removed by centrifugation prior to analysis (CLSI GP16-A2).
• Care should be taken to ensure that any anticoagulants or collection devices that
employ a barrier are compatible with the test reagent being used. Please refer to the
applicable reagents instructions for the specimen types that are suitable for use. Take
care when using sample tubes containing barriers or gels. Ensure the suitability of all
collection devices in use.
• When using the sample tubes containing a serum separating medium, pay attention
to the amount of serum so as not to contaminate the serum probes with the
separating medium.
• Set up an appropriate amount of sample for correct sampling in the system according
to this guide.
• All samples should be protected from evaporation and contamination prior to
analysis.
• Check the quantity of each sample, to prevent contact of the sample probe with the
separating medium which will block the sample probe. Check that no bubbles are
present.

Specifications
2.1.13 Managing Liquid Waste
This system is designed to discard the concentrated waste liquids (mixture) and
washing waste liquids (washing water and detergents) separately. To manage liquid
waste safely, adhere to the following.
• The liquid waste is potentially infections and should be handled as such.
• The waste liquids and mixtures might require special treatment before being
discarded.
• Some substances in the reagents, quality control (QC) samples, reference materials,
and detergents are regulated under the pollution ordinance and effluent standard.
Treat such substances in accordance with the effluent standard applied to the
facilities, consulting the relevant reagent manufacturer or distributor.
2.1.14 Managing Solid Waste
To manage solid waste such as sample/reagent probes, mixing bars, rolling tubes and
cuvettes safely, adhere to the following:
• All solid waste is potentially infectious and should be handled as such.
• The waste solids and mixtures might require special treatment before being
discarded. For proper waste disposal, refer to relevant local authority guidelines.
2.1.15 Preventing Water Leaks

To prevent inadvertent water leaks, ensure water supply and drainage hoses are fitted
by Olympus-approved personnel in accordance with local guidelines.

Specifications
2-9
2.1.16 Electromagnetic Wave and Noise Precautions
To safeguard the system from electromagnetic waves and noise, adhere to the following
guidelines:
• Do not locate this system near equipment that generates extreme levels of noise.
• Do not use mobile or cordless telephones and transceivers in the room where the
system is installed.
• Do not use medical equipment that may be susceptible to malfunctions caused by
EMF near the analyzer DPR or monitor.
2.1.17 Replacing Parts and Routine Maintenance

To ensure system performance, maintain and inspect the system periodically by
replacing the parts according to the instructions in this guide.
• Calibration of reagents might be required after replacement of key parts such as
syringes or a probe. After any part replacement or significant maintenance, it is
strongly recommended that QC analysis is undertaken. If any shifts are observed,
calibrate the system.
• Have a planned maintenance routine for this system and follow the guidelines
contained in “8 Maintenance” on page 8-1. If this system is not maintained in
accordance with these instructions, then optimum system performance and safe
operation cannot be guaranteed.
• Have a maintenance routine for the computer software and hardware. This must
include frequently backing up data that contains analysis parameters, and results
history.
For details on backing up data, refer to “7.7.2 Backup of Analysis Condition File” on
page 7-27.
• Back-up discs should not be stored onsite. Ideally, keep one copy onsite for
reference and one copy at another site.
• The computer hardware should be dedicated to running the system software only
and should never be connected to the Internet except when instructed to do so by
Olympus, in order to isolate it from harmful software viruses.
• Only Olympus-approved engineers can replace the fuse placed near the breaker on
the left side of the system.
2.1.18 Setting Analysis Parameters

Before using the system for the first time, you must set parameters such as the reagent
and sample quality, measurement wavelength, calibrator values, etc. Enter these
parameters from the Setting Sheet provided in the IFU, to ensure optimum system
performance. Any update to these settings should be entered into the system
immediately. For details on setting analysis parameters, refer to “4 Configuring Tests” on
page 4-1.

Specifications
2.1.19 Precautions for using the analyzer independently
The computer hardware should be dedicated to running the system software only and
should never be connected to the Internet except when instructed to do so by Olympus,
in order to isolate it from harmful software viruses.
2.1.20 Cleaning contaminants from the covers

Remove spills with a damp or dry cloth.
2.1.21 Other Precautions

If the reagents or samples come into contact with the mucous membrane, or if they are
accidentally swallowed, immediately rinse or induce vomiting, then follow the
instructions of the manufacturer or distributor.
2.1.22 System Waste

The waste this system requires special treatment before being discarded. Observe the
following precautions.
Class-1 specified equipment on Law Concerning the Recovery and Destruction of

Fluorocarbons:
CAUTION
The type of cooling medium used for this product is HFC.
It is prohibited to emit Fluorocarbons recklessly to the air.
It is necessary to retrieve Fluorocarbons in case of discarding this product.
The charging amount and the type of Fluorocarbons is mentioned on the refrigeration
unit at the center bottom of the back of the system.
• Type of Fluorocarbons: HFC-134 a
• Charging amount: 85 g

Specifications
2-11
2.2 Installation Environment
Precautions
Although this is not an installation guide, it is still important to be aware of installation
requirements. This section describes:
2.2.1 Installation Environment. See page 2-12.
2.2.2 System Specifications. See page 2-17.
2.2.3 Installation Space Requirements. See page 2-25.
2.2.4 System Connections. See page 2-27.
2.2.1 Installation Environment

To enable this system to operate safely and accurately, ensure that the installation
room:
• Is not subject to direct sunlight.
• Is not excessively dusty or subject to large amounts of airborne particles. This system
is design to withstand up to pollution degree 2 as defined by IEC and UL standards.
• Is level, with a gradient less than 1/200.
• Is not subject to vibration.
• Has a floor that can support at least 700 kg (1540 lbs.) This weight includes the
personal computer attached to the system.
• Is located less than 2,000 meters (6,500 feet) above sea level.
• Contains no corrosive gases.
Electrical and Noise Conditions

The power source must be prepared before delivery of this system.
The site should:
• Have a power connector within 10 metres of the location of the system.
• The capacity of the circuit breaker on the power switchboard for this system should
be equal or less than 20 amperes.
• Have a power source with minimum voltage fluctuations (± 10%) and transient
overvoltage less than 2500V.
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) systems are strongly recommended. Contact your
local technical support organization for further information.
TIP
• Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) systems are strongly recommended. Contact

your local technical support organization for further information.
• Ensure that the system is always grounded. The grounding terminal should conform
to class D (less than 100 Ω of grounding resistance) defined in the technical
standards for electrical facilities.
• Do not locate this system near equipment that generates extreme levels of noise.

Specifications
• Do not use mobile or cordless telephones and transceivers in the room where the
system is installed.
• Do not use medical equipment that may be susceptible to malfunctions caused by
EMF near the analyzer DPR or monitor.
Be sure to connect all the grounding terminals provided on the system and
distribution panel to earth. Failure to do so might cause electric shock and
WARNING system malfunction.
Crimp terminal
Hole diameter: 5.4 mm
Power cable connection should be performed by authorized technical personnel.

• When connecting the power cables, connect the grounding terminal first. When
CAUTION disconnecting the cables, disconnect the grounding terminal last.
• Connect the power cables to the distribution panel as shown below.
System side Power source/distribution panel side
Gray White Green
Connect these terminals to the power

.source specified for this system
Connect this terminal

Terminal to class D grounding
board terminal
Green
White
Black Black
White
Green

Specifications
2-13
Temperature and Humidity Conditions When in Use
Ensure that:
• The temperature of the installation room is between 18 ºC and 32 ºC.
• The temperature does not fluctuate more than ± 2 ºC.
• The humidity is between 40% and 80% Relative Humidity (RH), and with no
condensation.
• The site is well ventilated. Use ventilation equipment if necessary.
• The system is not exposed to direct airflow from air conditioners.
The heat output during operation of the system is approximately 9,600 KJ per hour.
When the room cannot keep the specified ranges of the temperature and humidity, the
system might not produce reliable data. If the temperature in the room fluctuates
excessively, the room requires air-conditioning.
The installation site must be well ventilated. To insure proper location dimensions,
refer to “Installation Space Requirements".
CAUTION
Temperature and Humidity Conditions When Not in Use

Ensure that:
• The temperature is between 5 ºC and 40 ºC.
• The humidity is between 15% and 90%.
Water Supply
The water supply and liquid waste facilities shown below must be prepared before
delivery of this system.
This system uses deionized water. For installation of a deionizer and piping from the
water supply facility to the deionizer, consult a relevant vendor. Note, deionizer
performance will be affected by the quality of the water supply to the facility. In this case,
consult the relevant vendor.
Ensure that:
• The system is within 10 metres of the DI water outlet. A drain should be within
3 metres, less than 1.5 metres high.
• The purity of the deionized water shall be so that the electric conductivity is 2 µS/cm
or less (resistivity: 0.5 MΩ x cm or more)
• Water should be passed through a filter of 0.5 µm or less.
• The temperature of the deionized water is between 5 ºC and 28 ºC.
• The pressure of the deionized water is between 0.49 x 105 Pa and 3.92 x 105 Pa.

Specifications
The water consumption of the system is as follows:
• Average water consumption is approximately 28 liters per hour.
• Maximum water demand is approximately 1.0 liter per minute.
• Deionized water supplied to the system should not contain excessive air bubbles.
The system includes the following tubing:

• Water supply tube: Braided Tube 12 mm (ID) x 18 mm (OD), L=10 m
• Exhaust Air tube: 12 mm (ID) x 18 mm (OD), L=10 m
• Waste tube: Braided Tube 15 mm (ID) x 22 mm (OD), L=10 m, 2 pieces
• If the tap water temperature exceeds the optimal temperature range for the deionizer,
consult the deionizer manufacturer.
CAUTION • If using the existing water supply piping and deionizer, check that no bacteria and germs
breed in the piping.
• This system operates under a range of water pressure from 0.49 x 105 to 3.92 x 105 Pa.
For the proper water pressure of the deionizer, contact the deionizer manufacturer.
TIP
• It is recommended that a system that employs a reverse osmotic membrane as the
deionizer be used. For detailed information, contact an Olympus Service Department.

Specifications
2-15
Drainage and Exhaust
Dispose of the waste liquids properly as infectious wastes in compliance with the
related regulation and ordinance.
WARNING
This system discharges the following two kinds of waste liquids by forced drain and
moist air containing the components of waste liquids.
• Condensed waste liquid: Compound liquid of sample and reagent retrieved from
cuvettes and detergent.
• Diluted waste liquid: Waste liquid of washing water used for cuvettes, mixing bars,
etc.
The drainage and exhaust should meet the following conditions.

• The drain hole should be located within 10 m from this system.
• The drain hole must be led to the infectious waste collection facility.
• The drain hole must be located no greater than 1.5 m and the exhaust hole must be
located no greater than 0.1m above the system installation floor.
• The ends of waste liquid hoses and exhaust air hose inserted into the drain hole
should be kept open to the air. Do not sink the hose ends into the liquid and do not
enclose the drain hole with a cover, etc.
• There should be no bend or crush on the waste liquid hoses.
• The drain hole should be able to drain the following amount of waste liquids.
Condensed waste liquid: 10 L/hour
Diluted waste liquid: 18 L/hour
Quantity consumed of water

The water supply and drainage facilities as shown “Water Supply” on page 2-14, must be
prepared before delivery of this system. This system uses deionized water. A deionizer
should be installed within 10 m from the water outlet. The deionizer and drain hole
should be located so that 10 m water supply and drainage tubes will reach the system.
For information about a deionizer, contact the manufacturer.

Specifications
2.2.2 System Specifications
The following table summarizes the installation specifications:
Installation Specifications
1. System Dimensions
ANL: 1250 mm (W) x 930 mm (D) x 1280 mm (H)
SMP: 670 mm (W) x 1040 mm (D) x 940 mm (H)
2. Weight
ANL: 460 kg
SMP: 130 kg
3. Water Supply and Drainage Conditions
Electric conductivity of the deionized 2.0 µS/cm or less
water
Water pressure Between 0.49 x 105 Pa and 3.92 x 105
Pa
Water consumption
Average 28 L/hour (50/60 Hz)
Maximum water demand 1.0 L/minute (50/60 Hz)
Water temperature 5 to 28 °C
Connection hose for water supply 12 mm x 18 mm x 10 m
Connection hose for concentrated and 15 mm x 22 mm x 10 m
diluted waste drain
Air exhaust hose 12 mm x 18 mm x 10 m
Drain height Less or equal 1.5 m from floor
4. Environmental Conditions (When in Use)
Temperature 18 to 32 °C
Fluctuation during measurement ±2 °C
Humidity 40 to 80% RH, no condensation
5. Power Source Conditions
Voltage, Frequency AC 208 V 50/60 Hz (USA)
AC 230 V 50/60 Hz (Europe)
AC 220 V 50/60 Hz (Asia)
AC 240 V 50/60 Hz (Australia)
Power Consumption 3.8 kVA

Specifications
2-17
The following table summarizes the general specifications:
General Specifications
1. Analytic Principle
Spectrum by a diffraction grating
2. Composition
Analyzer
Rack feeder unit including data processor
3. Options
ISE
Printer
OSV kit
Rack tray
2D barcode reader
External storage device
4. Sample Type
Serum Viscosities in the same range as serum.
Blood plasma
Whole blood (HbA1c)
Urine
5. Number of Tests on Board
Maximum 60 (63 including ISE) at a time
6. Throughput
Maximum 800 (1,200 including ISE) tests/hour
Maximum 100 tests/hour with analysis of HbA1c assay only.
7. Data Input Methods
Keyboard
Mouse
Touch panel display
Hand scanner (Option: Recommended Resolution 0.169 mm, Recommended Interface
PS/2), CD
Online (RS232C and TCP/IP)
8. Data Output Methods
Display
Printer (Option)
Online (RS232C and TCP/IP)
This system complies with IEC60825-1: 2001

Specifications
The following table summarizes the sampling specifications:
Sampling
1. Usable Sample Cups/Tubes
Micro-sample cup Hitachi cup (No.707-0313)
Use only outer circumference of STAT table
Sample cups Hitachi cup (No. 716-0425)
ISE-CAL, ISE-CLEAN, ISE-SEL, and ISE-CRS can
be set. at inner circumference (ISE) of STAT table
Commercial sample tube
Length 55 to 102 mm
Inner diameter 9 to 15 mm
Outer diameter 11.5 to 16 mm
The maximum diameter of the brim less than 17.5 mm
of a sample tube An adapter fitting to the outside diameter is
required.
When setting at inner circumference (ISE) of STAT
table, outside diameter φ12.3 mm is only
applicable. An adapter is required additionally.
Nested cups Hitachi cup
φ16 (OD) x 75 (length)
φ16 (OD) x 100 (length)
available only on a rack.
2. Dead Volume for Sample Cup
Cups/Tubes Dead Volume
12.3 mm tube 200 µL or less (NIPRO CT-7)
15.4 mm tube 250 µL or less (NIPRO CT-10)
Hitachi cup 50 µL or less
Hitachi-micro cup 30 µL or less (Aspiration quantity: up to 25 µL)
Nested cups compatible 180 µL or less
(Hitachi cup + BD#366509 (vacutainer)
or BD#366510 (vacutainer)
or BD#366588 (vacutainer)
3. Rack Loading Capacity
15 racks maximum
4. Sample Dispense System
The following functions are available:
Sample Repeat run with diluent capability
Liquid level detection
Crash detection
Microsyringe method
Clot detection
5. Dispensing Volume
1.6 to 25.0 µL in increments of 0.1 µL
(Repeat run dispensing volume 1.0 to 25 µL)
6. Rack Type
White Olympus rack
Yellow Olympus rack
Red Olympus rack
Orange Olympus rack
Green Olympus rack
Blue Olympus rack

Specifications
2-19
The following table summarizes the reagent set and reagent dispensing specifications:
Reagent
1. Storage Capacity
1. Reagent 1 refrigerator 60 (including HbA1c Pre-treatment)
Reagent 2 refrigerator 48
2. Concentrated Wash solution 2 L tank
3. ISE Buffer solution 2 L tank
4. ISE Mid Standard solution 2 L tank
5. ISE Reference solution 1 L tank
2. Refrigeration
Refrigeration temperature 4 to 12 °C
3. Reagent Setup Method
Turntable type
4. Types of Reagent
Normal-concentration reagent
high-concentration reagent
5. Reagent Dispense Mechanism
Micro-syringe type
Crash detecting function provided:
If the probe tip comes into contact with against a reagent bottle, or other solid object,
during probe down-feed, the system automatically stops probe transfer operation. The
dispense accuracy be compromised depending on the condition of the probe and may
require replacement.
6. Number of Reagent Steps
Up to 3 steps
7. Dispensing Volume
10 to 250 µL in increments of 1 µL (At the time of normal dispensing)
10 to 240 µL in increments of 1 µL (At the time of dilution dispensing)
The following table summarizes the reaction specifications:
Reaction
1. Incubator
Dry bath method 37 °C with 165
Square glass cuvettes 5 x 6 mm Inside diameter
2. Reaction Volume
120 to 420 µL (5 x 6 mm cuvette)
3. Reaction TIme
Maximum 8 minutes and 33 seconds
4. Mixing Method
Rotating mixing bar
5. Reaction Container
Glass cuvette (optical path length: 6 mm)
6. Incubator Temperature Control
Dry bath method
7. Reaction Line
Rotation disk type: 165 cuvettes

Specifications
The following table summarizes the measurement specifications:
Measurement
1. Photometric point
28 points
2. Type of Measurement
End point assay
Rate assay
Fixed point assay
Electrolyte method (ISE): The ISE is optional.
3. Optical System
Post spectroscopy (polychrometer)
4. Light Source
Halogen lamp: 12 V/20 W
Should be replaced every 1,000 hours as a guide.
5. Detector
Silicone photodiode array
6. Measuring Range
0 to 3 Abs (10 mm optical path conversion)
7. Photometric Resolution
0.0001 Abs
8. Wavelength Range
340 to 800 nm (13 wavelengths)
The following table summarizes the data processing specifications:
Data Processing
1. Storage Capacity
Data storage Hard disc
Capacity
Patient samples 100,000 samples
9999 samples/index
Reaction Monitor 200,200 test and max of 10,000
test/index
Maximum 300 indexes
QC 999 samples/index
Maximum 300 indexes
Data storage
Capacity 250 samples or 8 indexes (2HD)
2. Configuration of the Data Processor
Hard disk: 200 GB or over
Memory capacity: 2 GB or over
Keyboard: 101-109 keyboard
17-inch touchscreen display
CD-R drive
Printer (option)

Specifications
2-21
The following table summarizes the computation specifications:
Computation
1. Calculations
Calibration
Assay Types
End point assay
Rate assay
Fixed point assay
Indirect ISE
Calibration types
ACAL AA
ACAL AB
ACAL 2 to 7 AB
4 MC to 10 MC
MCAL MB
MCAL 2 to 7 MB
Calibration curve type

Straight Line
Polygonal Line
Quadratic Type
Tertiary Type
Tertiary Type (Reversed Function)
EIA TYPE 1 to 4
Spline
Correction
Water Blank correction
Reagent Blank correction
Two wavelength correction
Data correction
2. Quality Control
QC samples
Maximum of 10 types/test
Maximum of 100 types in total
QC checks
Shewhart day-to-day management (L-J method)
Multirule (Westgard method)
Twin plot
Riliback

Specifications
The following table summarizes the input/output specifications:
Input/Output
1. Worksheet
Patient sample worksheet
Emergency sample worksheet
Repeat sample worksheet
QC worksheet
Calibration worksheet
2. Data Input/Output
Analysis result output Realtime, batch online
Data correction possible
Recalculation possible
3. Input/Output for External Device
Online input/output RS232C and TCP/IP
Offline output External storage device HD
Floppy disc
USB

Specifications
2-23
The following table summarizes the ISE(option) specifications:
ISE(option)
1. Measurement Method
Diluted ion-selective electrode method
2. Measurement Items
Na, K, and Cl ions in serum and urine
3. Throughput
200 samples/hour
4. Dispensed Sample Amount
20 µL (DI water 10 µL)
5. Diluent Rate
32.4 times (DI water 10 µL, buffer solution 618 µL)
6. Measurement Range (Unit: mmol/L)
Item Serum Urine
Na 50 to 200 10 to 400
K 1.0 to 10.0 2.0 to 200
Cl 50 to 200 15 to 400
7. Calibration Setting
Auto calibration
Measures the high-concentration standard solution and low-concentration standard
solution, and performs two-point calibration.
8. Data Correction
Manual calibration correction (M-CAL) and auto calibration correction (A-CAL, 3-point
regression CAL) are possible.
9. Drift Correction
Auto correction
Measures the potential of the MID solution for each sample and corrects the drift.
10. Types and Standard Supply Intervals of Consumable
Name Estimated daily consumption
Buffer solution for ISE (option) Approx. 180 mL (at 100 serum samples/day)
MID solution for ISE (option) Approx. 260 mL (at 100 serum samples/day)
REF solution for ISE (option) Approx. 35 mL (at 100 serum samples/day)
Cleaning solution for ISE (option) Approx. 1 mL (at 100 serum samples/day)
The following table summarizes the PC rack unit (optional) specifications:
PC rack unit (optional)

1. Personal computer weight
Whole type: up to 15 kg
Separate type: 10 kg to 15 kg
2. Maximum weight of display
8 kg
3. Maximum weight of keyboard table
2 kg
4. Printer weight
Separate type: 5 kg to 50 kg
When using a separate type PC rack unit (optional), always select a personal computer
and printer of the specifications listed above to place in the PC rack unit (optional).

Specifications
2.2.3 Installation Space Requirements
The system
As shown in following figure, this system requires space around it for safe installation
and maintenance. It requires spaces of at least 500 mm (20 inches) from the wall.
500
1040
2040
930 AU680 (SMP)
(ANL)
F
R 670 500
500
O
N
T
500 1250
2920 mm
Dimensions:
Width Depth Height Weight

Analyzer 1250 mm 930 mm 1280 mm 460 kg
Rack feeder unit 670 mm 1040 mm 940 mm 130 kg

Specifications
2-25
PC rack unit (option)
When using a separate type PC rack unit (option), as shown in following figure, this
system requires space around it for safe installation and maintenance.
500
PC rack unit
620
(option)
500 556 500 500

mm
Dimensions:
Width Depth Height

PC rack unit (option) 556 mm 620 mm 1550 mm

Specifications
2.2.4 System Connections
The following figure shows the system connections.
Display/mouse
Hub
keyboard/speaker
Host computer(serial)
Printer(option)
DPR
SMP ISE
ANL (option) External memory unit
Modem(option)
2D barcode reader
(option)
Router
Devices connected to system

Water supply equipment
connector System rear face
To deionizer To DPR
LAN cable
Water supply
equipment
(optional) HUB
1.5 m or less
To DPR Power cable
To HUB (10m)
To Display
To Speaker
Drain hole
Power strip Drain hole
Water supply tube (10m)
Exhaust air hose (10m)

Washing waste liquid hose (10m)
Concentrated waste liquid hose (10m)

Specifications
2-27
Devices connected to DPR
Keyboard Display
Mouse
2D barcode reader
Printer
External Speaker
memory
unit Host computer
DPR Modem
To HUB Router
Supply the power of a printer from the power outlet of the facility, not from this system.
The circuit breaker may be turned off.
CAUTION

Specifications
2.3 System Labels and Displays
Displays
The following kinds of pictograms are used to represent the switches and the breaker
unit:
ON OFF GND Terminal
Labels
The system has the following labels:
• Strip labels: Orange strips are present on the surface of the system to indicate the
movement areas of the mechanisms. Users should take great care to avoid these
areas during operation.
• Warning labels: Draw the users’ attention to areas of the system where hazards
exist and indicate that great care must be taken to avoid serious injury or death.
Background Colors of Warning Labels

The warning labels have the following background colors:
• Orange:
Warning: Warnings indicate that great care must be exercised. Failure to do so might
result in serious injury or death, serious degradation of system function or the
potential to generate incorrect sample data.
• Yellow:
Caution: Cautions indicate that appropriate care or action must be taken. Failure to
do so might result in minor injury, sub-optimal system performance or damage, which
might generate hazards.
Label Explanation
Electric shock: This symbol denotes an area of the system that should
under no circumstances be accessed as a shock risk exists.
(Labeling Position: near the intake of the power code at the left side of the
analyzer)
High temperature danger: This symbol denotes the caution of burning

by touching the hot light source lamp directly when replacing it.
(Labeling Position: near the light source lamp unit)
Biological risks: This symbol warns of biohazardous material. Wear

protective clothing and follow universal precautions as dictated by local or
national regulations (CLSI GP17-A2, ISO15190 or 29CFR 1910.1030).
Rick of biohazardous materials such as sample probe, mixer bars, sample
rack, cuvette washing nozzle, cuvette, sample probe washing bath,
condensed waste liquid drain hole, ISE pot, ISE rolling tube, drain hole, etc.
(Labeling Position: on the surface of analyzer and on the real cover)

Specifications
2-29
Label Explanation
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT complies with IEC60825-1: 2001.
(Labeling Position: near the main switch at the left side of the analyzer)
CAUTION-CLASS 3R LASER RADIATION

WHEN OPEN AND INTERLOCKS DEFEATED
AVOID DIRECT EYE EXPOSURE.
(Labeling Position: near the CD interlock switch of rack feeder unit, and near
the interlock switch of STAT cover)
CAUTION-CLASS 3R LASER RADIATION

WHEN OPEN AVOID DIRECT EYE EXPOSURE.
(Labeling Position: near the window of laser the light irradiation for reading
sample IDs of STAT table units, and near the window of the laser light
irradiation for reading sample IDs of rack feeder unit)
Personal injury: This symbol denotes areas where a risk of injury due to
system movement--fingers or other parts of the body should be kept clear of
these areas during system operation.
• Danger of injury by moving parts of the sample probe, reagent probe,
mixer bars, cuvette washing nozzle, etc.
(Labeling Position: on the surface of analyzer and on the real cover)
• Danger of injury by moving parts of the sample probe, etc.
(Labeling Position: near the sample dispenser of the rack feeder unit)
• Danger of injury by moving parts of the S-syringe, etc.
(Labeling Position: near the S-syringe)
• Danger of injury by moving parts of the R-syringe, etc.
(Labeling Position: near the R-syringe)
• Danger of injury by moving parts of wash water dispenser, etc.
(Labeling Position: near the wash water dispenser)
• Danger of injury by moving parts, such as the ISE rolling pump unit, etc.
(Labeling Position: back of the ISE cover)
• Danger of injury by moving parts, such as the master detergent supply
pump, etc.
(Labeling Position: near the master detergent supply pump)
Danger: This label indicates a potential hazard which, if not avoided, can
result in injury to an operator and/or serious property damage.
• Danger of leak from Water supply and discharge unit.
(Labeling Position: near the water outlet)
• Do not remove the connect cover fixed by screws for water supply unit
(option). This may result in an electric shock.
(Labeling Position: near the power outlet of water supply unit (option))
• Do not lean against PC rack unit (option). This may result the rack unit
falls down.
(Labeling Position: near the location the keyboard of PC rack unit (option)
will be placed)

Specifications
*
* The label is attached to inside of the lid.

Specifications
2-31
Specifications
2.4 Trade Marks
The company names and product names used in this user guide are registered trade
marks of their respective companies.

Specifications
2-33
Specifications
3
System Outline
This chapter provides a general overview of

how the system works. It introduces key
processes that are explained in later chapters
of this user guide.
It also describes the system hardware. This
enables you to better understand the technical
composition of the system.
3.1 How the AU680 Analyze Samples. See page 3-2.

3.2 Key Sub-Processes. See page 3-11.
3.3 Understanding and Handling Reagents, Calibrators and Controls. See
page 3-14.
3.4 Understanding the System Hardware. See page 3-16.
3.5 Understanding the Computer Software. See page 3-33.
AU680 User Guide Version4.0 3. System Outline 3-1

3.1 How the AU680 Analyze Samples
This system performs automated analysis of serum, plasma, urine and whole blood
(HbA1c). It measures sample components and automatically generates results.
This section provides an overview of how the AU680 tests samples. It also describes
the ISE Measuring Method.
3.1.1 Reagent Blank. See page 3-2.
3.1.2 End Point Assay. See page 3-3.
3.1.3 Rate Assay. See page 3-5.
3.1.4 Fixed Point Assay. See page 3-6.
3.1.5 Quality Control. See page 3-6.
3.1.6 Principle of the ISE Measuring Method. See page 3-10.
3.1.1 Reagent Blank

To determine a measurement value (reaction OD), the reagent blank OD (reagent OD at
each photometric point of P0 to P27) and the deionized water blank OD values
(photocal data) must be subtracted from the measured OD of a sample reacted with a
reagent.
By performing reagent blank measurement the reagent blank OD values (RB) at all
photometric points shown in the following figure can be obtained.
Reagent blank measured uses the blue rack. Set sample on blue rack No.1 or blue rack
No.2. On the “Calibration Parameters” screen, set serum, urine, other-1, other-2, and
whole blood on either blue rack No.1 or No.2.
The system measures one sample cup up to 4 times and determines the reagent blank
data (reagent blank OD value) using 2 measurements excluding the maximum and
minimum values among the four measurements.
OD Reagent Blank (Compared with water blank; example of 2 step analysis)
Reagent OD value
at the last point
(second data)
Reagent OD value at the first point (first data)
Deionized water blank (photocal data)

Photometric
P0 P1 P10 P11 P27 point
R1 Sample (Water) R2
Dispensing Dispensing Dispensing R1: Reagent 1
R2: Reagent 2
The following describes the first point reagent OD value (first data) and last-point
reagent OD value (second data).
3-2 3. System Outline AU680 User Guide Version4.0

First point reagent OD value (first data)
• First point reagent OD value (RB) = {first point measured OD value} - {deionized
water blank (photocal data)}
• If the first point reagent OD value is outside the reagent OD range that was set up in
the reagent parameters, abnormal flags “y” (for over range) and “u” (for under range)
will be attached to the data.
Last point reagent OD value (second data)

• Last point reagent OD value (RB) = {last point measured OD value} - {deionized
water blank (photocal data)}
• If the last point reagent OD value is out of the reagent OD range set up in the reagent
parameters, abnormal flags “Y” and “U” are added to the data.
3.1.2 End Point Assay

This section describes the end point assay.
1-point Assay
This is a general end point assay that determines the reaction mixture OD from the OD
measured at a specified photometric position.
Reaction mixture OD = OD (at specified position) - OD0 (at position 0)
OD
R1 0 S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 27

2-point Assay (self-blank method)
This end point assay requires sample blank adjustment. The OD values before
dispensing the reagent 2 should be eliminated as the blank channel. The OD values of
the blank channel is subtracted from those measured after dispensing the reagent 2 to
obtain correct data without influences from turbidity or color of the serum.
The OD value in this assay is given by the following expression:
K2 = {R1. V / (R1.V + R2.V + S.V)}
K3 = {(R1.V + S.V) / (R1.V + R2.V + S.V)}
Reaction OD value = (Px - K2 × P0) - (K3 × Pz - K2 × P0)
This calculation result is defined as the reaction OD value.
OD
R1 0 S 1 2 .... 9 10 R211 .... 27

R1.V S.V Pz R2.V Px
R1.V: Reagent 1 dispense volume

R2.V: Reagent 2 dispense volume
S.V: Sample dispense volume
P0: OD value at the first point
Pz: OD value before dispensing the reagent 2
Px: OD value after dispensing the reagent 2
In case of end assay (sample blank correction)

OD values (blank item values) including turbidity of serum or impurities by interference
of the other test items are measured first. Then, the blank item value is subtracted from
the measured OD value of the actual sample (OD value of the color item).
With this end assay (sample blank correction), higher accuracy data can be obtained
than the 2 point measuring even when turbidity of serum or impurities by interference of
the other test items (dotted line in the figure below) is unavoidable.
Reaction OD value = [Color item OD value (ODC)] – [Blank item OD value (ODB)]
Color reaction channel

OD
ODC
Serum blank channel

ODB
R1 S R2 27

3.1.3 Rate Assay
This section describes the rate assay.
Rate Assay
This assay determines the rate of absorbance variation per minute by calculating the
average of the absorbance variations (ΔOD) between each photometric points using the
least squares method.
OD
ΔOD/min.
OD limit
R1 S R2 27
Double Rate Assay

This assay determines the rate of absorbance variation per minute by calculating the
average of the absorbance variations (ΔOD) between each photometric points using the
least squares method.
Next, the system obtains the OD rate of the objective substance from the calculation
expression {ΔOD(2) - ΔOD(1)}/min.
OD
ΔOD(2)/min.
ΔOD(1)/min.
R1 S R2 27
[ΔOD(2)-ΔOD(1)]/min.

3.1.4 Fixed Point Assay
Fixed point assay measures the OD value at two specified photometry points. The two
photometry points are measured after the beginning of reaction between sample and
reagent.
Reaction OD value = ODB - ODA
OD
R1 S R2 A B 27
3.1.5 Quality Control

A wide variety of quality control techniques is used to keep up daily inspection accuracy.
In this equipment, day-to-day control which is the most widely used accuracy control
technique, twin plot control for easier classification of system errors and accidental
errors, and multi-rule quality control for preventing detection of insignificant errors are
designed in as standard software.
This chapter describes the twin plot control and multi-rule control.
For details on about the day-to-day control, refer to “Checking the Daily Variation Chart” on
page 6-25.
Twin Plot Control

As a quality control serum, those whose normal region and the abnormal region form a
pair with each other are used.
The following figure shows the control chart given in “Checking the Daily Variation Chart” on
page 6-25 in a two dimensional fashion with reference to two sample types.
Abnormal
region sample
+2SD
MEAN
-2SD
-2SD MEAN +2SD Normal region

sample

When not only are the samples of normal region and abnormal region within the control
limit, but also both samples are high values or low values, a check of calibration system
should be made to determine system errors.
Also, if a high value of abnormal region is low, reagent degeneration is suspected. The
twin plot control technique offers the advantage of easy classification of a system error
and an accidental error, but it will be effective to make combined control with day-to-day
control because there is a difficulty of determining an aging change.
Multi-Rule Control
In the day-to-day control, a control error is checked by examining the control chart, but it
is difficult to do confirmation of numerous test on a real time basis.
The multi-rule control technique makes it possible to speedily cope with an error real-
time, as this control method notifies the worker of just which rule an error, when
generated, violates based on an alarm flag determine and notify just which rule an error
violates.
When employing this control technique, it is necessary to prepare samples of both the
normal region and the abnormal region, just in the case of the previously introduced
twin plot control.
For details of the multi-rule control, refer to the figure shown below.
Control OUT-OF-CONTROL REJECT RUN

Data
Yes Yes
No No No
12S Trend IN-CONTROL Trend
Yes No
No No No No
13S 22S R4S 41S Nx
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
OUT-OF-CONTROL REJECT RUN

Standard of judgement based on the multi-rule Shewhart technique.
(Logic diagram Applicable to Control Rules)
The Explanation of Symbols for the Multi-Rule Control and the

Logics are as follows
• 12S indicates that five judgment levels given in the accompanying table below are
sequentially checked to see whether or not there is any violation of the applicable
rule if one piece of control is exceeding the control limit determined as ‘MEAN ±2 SD’.
• 13S is a judgment level for determining if one piece of control has exceeded the
control limit determined as ‘MEAN ±3 SD’. If it dose not exceed the control limit, an
inquiry for judgment is made to the next judgment level 22S. On the other hand, when
it exceeds the control limit, it is judged that the accuracy control has been properly
made.

• 22S is a criteria level for judging whether or not the two continuous pieces of control
data have exceeded the control limit determined as ‘MEAN ±2 SD’ in one direction, if
these are not beyond the control limit, an inquiry is made to R4S for the next judgment
level. On the other hand, if the control is exceeded, it is judged that quality control
has not been made properly.
The term “continuous” above, has either of the following meanings.

TIP • To be continuous in both directions for one identical control substance.
• To have continuity of high-concentration and low-concentration between control
substances.
• R4S is a judgment level for determining whether either of two continuous pieces of
data with high and low concentrations has exceeded the control limit specified as
“MEAN + 2SD” and whether the other has exceeded the control limit of “MEAN –
2SD”. In other words, it judges whether the two continuous pieces of data have
exceeded 4SD in the same range.
If the data is within the control limit, judgment is advanced to the next judgment level,
41S. If the data is out of the control limit, it is determined that quality control has not
been properly attained.
• 41S is a judgment level for determining whether or not four continuous pieces of
control data have exceeded the control limit of either ‘MEAN +1 SD’ or ‘MEAN -1 SD’.
If they have not exceeded either control limit, an inquiry is made to the next judgment
standard Nx for necessary judgment, but if they have exceeded the limit, it is judged
that quality control has not been properly made.
• Nx is a judgment level for determining whether or not continuous N (7 to 10) pieces of
control data have sided to the control limit of either + mean side or - mean side. If
they have not exceeded the control limit, it is judged that quality control has been
properly made. But if they have exceeded the control limit, it is judged, quality control
has not properly been done.
Since this Nx rule uses a maximum of 10 pieces of previous data for judgment, the
system’s hard disk stores those pieces of data as QC stack values.
• Trend evaluates if 4 to 10 sequential results of measurement (parameter regulation:
the results includes measurement result of control data) which are the same control
as the control data, increases or decreases.
If an error is encountered through the 6 rules described above, an abnormal data flag is
sent to the printer as a list or displayed on the screen. The abnormal data flags and
causes are described below.
Control Limit Error Symbol Cause of Error

Exceeding 13S 2Q Random error
Exceeding 22S 3Q Systematic error
Exceeding R4S 4Q Random error
Exceeding 41S 5Q Systematic error
Exceeding Nx 6Q Systematic error
Trend abnormality 7Q Systematic error

Example of Control Errors According to the Multi-Rule Control
are shown below
22S: Systematic error extending over the
High value sample 13S
2 type concentration range
R4S: Random error
3SD
2SD
1SD
Mean
–1SD
–2SD
–3SD
41S: Systematic error extending 22S: Systematic error in the Day

over the 2 type concentration range high concentration region
Low value sample 22S: Systematic error extending over
the 2 type concentration range
3SD
2SD
1SD
Mean
–1SD
–2SD
–3SD
Nx: Systematic error in the Day

13S: Random error low concentration region
The following describes the possible causes and check items for the random errors and
systematic errors shown in the figure above. To deal with the errors, refer to the
following.
Random errors
• Poor dispensing accuracy (sample, reagent)
Leakage from syringe, air introduced into piping system, dirty probe, reagent eject
position runout, etc.
• Poor photometering accuracy
Lamp deterioration.
• Reagent degeneration
Reagent degeneration.
• Poor quality control sample
Mistaken sample, different lot, etc.
• Insufficient cleaning
Mixing rod cleaning improper or Insufficient.
• Poor mixing
Solenoid detective, cuvette wheel detective, set detective of mixing rod.

Systematic errors
• Incorrect calibration
Incorrect dissolution of calibration samples.
• Deteriorated reagent
Reagent degeneration, different lot, etc.
• Temperature
Improper temperature control.
3.1.6 Principle of the ISE Measuring Method

Sample and buffer solution are mixed in a specified diluent ratio in the diluent pot of the
ISE unit (optional). The mixture is aspirated and passed to the REF electrode and to the
selection electrode (Na, K, Cl), and the difference of the potentials generated at both
electrodes is measured. MID fluid is passed each time between samples to measure
the reference potential for measuring and to prevent carry-over.
ISE calibration uses MID fluid and external standard fluid with high (H) and low (L)
concentration. Calibration is used to obtain the MID fluid concentration and the
electrode sensitivity (slope) for each electrode. The obtained MID fluid concentration
and the slope value are used to calculate the concentration of each sample according to
the following formula.
Sample concentration = MID fluid concentration x 10(EX-EM/slope)

EX: Sample potential
EM: MID fluid potential

3.2 Key Sub-Processes
There are a number of key automated sub-processes to be understood.
3.2.1 Computer Automation. See page 3-11.
3.2.2 Sample Identification. See page 3-12.
3.2.3 Sample Transfer. See page 3-13.
3.2.4 Reagent Transfer. See page 3-13.
3.2.5 Reaction Fluid Mixing. See page 3-13.
3.2.6 Reaction fluid incubation and washing. See page 3-13.
3.2.7 Measurement by Photometry. See page 3-13.
3.2.1 Computer Automation

The analysis process is controlled by a computer linked to the system and located
beside it as an integral part of the system. The computer system is a PC with MS
Windows® Operating System. While this computer manages the analysis process
independently, systems are often connected to a laboratory network. This allows test
requisition information to be received from a host computer and used to automate the
test ordering process. The computer uses this information to process the desired tests
and produce test results.
The computer system allows you to:
• Save and load test data and parameter files with several kinds of media and devices.
For more details, refer to “7.7 Data Management” on page 7-24.
• Enter test requisitions (programming each sample test).
• Monitor the sample status.
• Analyze and edit analysis results.
• Print analysis results.
• Track which users use the system and at which times.
• Enforce security by limiting the functions accessible to those required by the User's
task requirements.

3.2.2 Sample Identification
A test requisition is an instruction to perform specified tests on a sample. When a
sample is placed into the system, the test requisition information is used to link the
sample to the required tests. It is important that the system can identify samples
correctly. Basic information on the sample is given by the rack barcode. This barcode is
used to identify the sample type (for example, serum, urine, whole blood, others) the
rack contains. The system can also use sample barcodes to link test requisition
information to each sample to be tested.
There are three analysis modes for recognizing samples on racks.
Sequential mode
The sample barcode is not read in sequential mode. The system analyzes the first
sample on the first rack presented, using the information in the first test requisition. It
uses the second test requisition for the second sample on the rack and so on.
Samples therefore need to be placed on the racks in strict numerical order, and without
empty spaces left on the rack. Running the system in sequential mode (i.e. without
reading sample barcode ID) is not recommended due to the possibility of sample/result
mismatch. If you must run without sample barcode ID, please be extremely careful and
have additional cross checks in place.
To produce correct sample results in sequential mode, leave no vacant spaces in

racks used. Never have different sample types on one rack.
WARNING
Rack No. analysis mode

Sample barcodes are not read in Rack No. analysis mode. The system reads the rack
ID and assigns the sample number according to the cup position in the rack.
Accordingly, the samples must be set in the rack in the order entered for the samples at
the time of sample requisition.
For example, when the samples from No. 1 to No. 10 are set on rack No. 1 and the
samples from No. 11 to No. 20 are set on rack No. 2, sample No. 14 can be found in
position 4 on rack No. 2 and sample No. 57 can be found in position 7 on rack No. 6. In
rack No. analysis mode, the racks can be placed onto the feeder in any order.
In rack No. analysis mode, there is the danger that mistakes at the time of setting the
samples in the racks can cause mismatching of samples and results. Take sufficient
care and perform suitable crosschecks.
Barcode (Sample ID) analysis mode

The system reads the sample barcode on each sample cup and then links this
information to a corresponding requisition to perform analysis. Samples can therefore
be in any order and there can be vacant spaces on each rack. It is critical to test results
that sample barcodes match sample requisitions.

3.2.3 Sample Transfer
Primary sample tubes are loaded into sample racks or the STAT table. The sample
probe then transfers the sample to the cuvette in which analysis is performed according
to the test requisition.
The sample volume, use of diluent, and if so, diluent volume are determined based on
system parameter information.
After dispensing, the sample probe is washed in the wash station with deionized water
internally and externally.
3.2.4 Reagent Transfer

The system has two reagent transfer units that aspirate reagent from reagent vials in
the reagent refrigerators and dispense them into the cuvette in the incubation bath. The
system uses information in the system parameters to determine reagent volume.
The reagent probes are washed internally and externally with deionized water, at a
washing station between each reagent dispense, to ensure minimal reagent carryover.
3.2.5 Reaction Fluid Mixing

The mixing unit uses teflon coated mixing bars to mix the reaction fluid in the cuvette
uniformly. There are two mixing units. Both mixing units have three sets of mixing bars,
and while one set of mixing bars is mixing, the remaining two sets are being washed
simultaneously.
3.2.6 Reaction fluid incubation and washing

The cuvette wheel is set in an incubation bath to keep the reaction temperature in the
cuvette at a constant level.
The reaction fluid in a cuvette after completion of photometry is aspirated by the wash
nozzle unit, and the cuvette is washed and dried.
3.2.7 Measurement by Photometry

The various chemical components in the sample and the measuring regents make a
color reaction in the cuvette. The light of a halogen lamp is passed through this
detection fluid, and is separated into its specific components by a diffraction grating.
This determines the optical density of the reaction fluid being measured. Measurement
is performed at 18 second intervals throughout the reaction period. The measured
values for the period and wavelengths defined in the specific test parameters are used
for concentration calculation.

3.3 Understanding and Handling
Reagents, Calibrators and Controls
This section discusses the system supplies used in the AU680.
3.3.1 Reagents. See page 3-14.
3.3.2 Sample diluent. See page 3-14.
3.3.3 Calibration sample. See page 3-14.
3.3.4 QC control sample. See page 3-15.
3.3.1 Reagents
Olympus supplies high concentrated and ready to use reagents.
This system can use reagents, calibration samples, and QC samples supplied by
manufacturers other than Olympus. Verify with the reagent manufacturer, the dealer,
etc. in regard to usability.
Reagents are supplied in bottles of 15 mL, 30 mL, 60 mL or 120 mL. Reagent bottles
containing reagent are set in the reagent refrigerator fixed by separators depending on
the size.
The barcode label of a set reagent bottle is read and registered with the system.
3.3.2 Sample diluent

For analysis of samples with a high concentration, a physiological saline solution or
water can be used for automatic diluent analysis. Diluent is set in a 60 mL bottle in the
bottle setting position near the reagent1 refrigerator. For further information refer to the
relevant Instruction For Use (IFU).
3.3.3 Calibration sample

When you add a new reagent, the system recognizes it from the barcode. You can
calibrate a reagent using only the calibration sample(s).
Lot specific user calibration should also be performed in the following situations:
• You have changed a reagent lot.
• You have been using the same lot on the system for a predefined number of days.
• QC recovery is outside specified limits.
• There has been major preventive maintenance, or critical part replacement, and QC
performance is affected.
For details on precaution for operation, refer to “2.1.11 Handling Reagents, Detergents,
Calibrators and QC Samples” on page 2-7.

3.3.4 QC control sample
Quality Control (QC) analysis should be performed after calibration to verify the system
is working properly. QC analysis should also be performed at regular intervals for
verification of system stability. You can perform this check using either the Olympus QC
sample or QC sample from another supplier.
For details on precaution for operation, refer to “2.1.11 Handling Reagents, Detergents,
Calibrators and QC Samples” on page 2-7.

3.4 Understanding the System Hardware
This section provides an overview of the main mechanisms in the AU680.
3.4.1 System Switches and Buttons. See page 3-18.
3.4.2 Rack Feeder Unit. See page 3-19.
3.4.3 Hand Scanner (Option). See page 3-20.
3.4.4 Sample Cups and Tubes. See page 3-21.
3.4.5 Racks. See page 3-22.
3.4.6 Sample Transfer Unit. See page 3-23.
3.4.7 Reagent Transfer Unit. See page 3-24.
3.4.8 Mixing Unit. See page 3-24.
3.4.9 Incubation bath part. See page 3-25.
3.4.10 Photometry Unit. See page 3-25.
3.4.11 Wash Nozzle Unit. See page 3-26.
3.4.12 Reagent Refrigeration Unit. See page 3-27.
3.4.13 STAT Table Unit. See page 3-28.
3.4.14 Syringe Unit. See page 3-30.
3.4.15 Detergent rolling pump unit. See page 3-31.
3.4.16 Tank Storage. See page 3-31.
3.4.17 Breakers and Fuses. See page 3-32.
3.4.18 ISE Unit (option). See page 3-32.

Reagent transfer unit
Photometry unit
Mixing unit
Reagent refrigeration unit
Incubation bath part
Wash nozzle unit
Sample transfer unit
Rack feeder unit
STAT table unit
Tank storage
Rolling Pump unit
ISE unit (option)
Syringe unit System switches and buttons
Breaker and fuses
Water supply/drain unit Power supply unit

3.4.1 System Switches and Buttons
The AU680 contains the following buttons, shown in below:
• ON (sub-power) button. See page 3-18.
• EM STOP (Emergency Stop) button. See page 3-18.
• RESET button. See page 3-19.
• TABLE ROTATION/DIAG button. See page 3-19.
ON, EM STOP,
RESET buttom
TABLE ROTATION/DIAG button
ON (sub-power) button
This button turns the system power on and the PC will start up.
EM STOP (Emergency Stop) button

When this button is pressed in case of an emergency, the main power supply
(secondary side power supply) is switched off immediately. Power supply for the
incubation bath and the reagent refrigerator are off also.
At the time of an emergency stop, the analysis data may be lost or the hard disk
computer may become damaged.
CAUTION

RESET button
Use this button to restore the main power supply following an emergency stop. Always
press the RESET buttton and ON button, and operate the END processing after turning
the system power on, in order to start tempreture control of the incubator and regular
wash on ISE (option) when sub-power is off. The reagent refrigerators rely on power
from the main switch and are reconnected using Reset. This button also resets the
power failure detection circuit. The power failure detection circuit alerts you to any
power failure that might have happened while the main power on and sub-power off.

This button rotates the STAT table to place sample cups on the STAT table. Use this
button also to activate diagnostic or maintenance functions.
3.4.2 Rack Feeder Unit

Keep the sample protective covers closed at all times to prevent dirt and dust getting
into the sample cups on the feeder unit. Always ensure racks are placed on the rack
supply unit with the rack barcode facing the rack ID barcode reader on the inside of the
feeder unit.
Surface where the rack ID label is applied
Window for reading rack ID

Sample
protection cover
Rack
Rack supply unit Barcode reader

laser radiation
(Sample ID)
The following table summarizes the specifications for the barcode readers
Barcode Reader Specifications

Wave length: 660 nm
Maximum output: 4.9 mW
Pulse width: 89 µS
Frequency: 524 Hz
Class: 3R

3.4.3 Hand Scanner (Option)
The hand scanner is used to manually scan the 2D barcode (Mastercurve) on the
Olympus reagent.
The following table summarizes the specifications for the barcode readers in the hand
scanner:
2D Barcode Reader Specifications

Hand Scanner
Wave length: 630-680 nm
Output: 1.0 mW
Class: 2

3.4.4 Sample Cups and Tubes
The following are the sample cups and tubes, that can be used in the AU680:
Sample Cups and Tubes

Sample cups To use on rack and STAT Table: Hitachi cup (No.716-0425 MB0355), ACA
cup (GB6350 and GB9684)
To use only on the STAT Table: Hitachi (No. 707-0313)
Sample cups must not have a slope barrel or a spitz tube
Nested cups Total high of Tube and nested cup:
Rack: less than or equal to 112 mm
Hitachi cup (No.716-0425 MB0355)
Sample tubes Outside diameter: 11.5 mm to 16 mm (less than or equal to 17.7 mm at
the collar)
Inside diameter: 9 mm to 15 mm
Length: 55 mm to 102 mm

3.4.5 Racks
Sample cups and tubes are placed in racks before analysis. The system identifies the
rack type from small magnets set in the bottom of each rack. Up to ten sample cups or
tubes can be set into one rack. For details on how to load racks, refer to “5.1 Preparing
Samples for Analysis” on page 5-2.
This system uses six types of racks:

• White Rack. See page 3-22.
• Yellow Rack. See page 3-22.
• Green Rack. See page 3-22.
• Orange Rack. See page 3-22.
• Red Rack. See page 3-23.
• Blue Rack. See page 3-23.
White Rack
Use the white rack for normal patient samples, barcoded calibrators and barcoded QC
samples. Three different analysis modes can be selected for the white rack:
• Sequential mode,
• Rack ID mode and
• Barcode (Sample ID) mode
Refer to “3.2 Key Sub-Processes” on page 3-11.
Yellow Rack
Use the yellow rack for lot-specific user calibration. Non - barcoded calibrators require
that calibrators be placed in designated positions in the yellow racks.The barcoded
calibrators can be placed in any order. If the barcode of the calibrator is damaged, you
can also run calibrators in fixed positions on this rack. Refer to “5.5 Calibrating Tests” on
page 5-33.
Green Rack
Use this rack to analyze barcoded or non-barcoded QC samples. Refer to “4.8
Configuring QC Analysis” on page 4-59.
Orange Rack
Use this rack for manual (standard) repeat runs. Refer to “4.6 Programming Repeat Tests”
on page 4-42.

Red Rack
Use this rack for emergency samples. Refer to “6.5 Processing Emergency Samples” on
page 6-30.
Blue Rack
Use this rack for measuring (updating) the reagent blank. Refer to “4.7.1 Calibrator
Registration” on page 4-48.
3.4.6 Sample Transfer Unit

This unit has the sample probe and the wash station for washing the sample probe.
The specimen in the sample cups set in the rack are dispensed by the sample probe to
the specified cuvettes.
When the ISE (optional) is installed, dispensing to the sample pot of the ISE part is also
performed. In addition, there are two types of wash stations; one is for whole blood and
the other is for other sample types.
Sample probe
Wash station

3.4.7 Reagent Transfer Unit
The AU680 has two reagent transfer units. Each unit has one reagent probe; one for
reagent 1 and one for reagent 2. These units are responsible for transferring the
components required for performing assays into the cuvette wheel.
Each probe has a dedicated wash station. The reagent probes are washed internally
and externally with deionized water between each reagent dispense, to ensure minimal
reagent carryover.
Reagent probe 2
Wash station
Reagent probe 1
3.4.8 Mixing Unit

The AU680 has one mixing bar unit containing 6 spiral sharped mixing bars (after
Sample and R1) and one mixing bar unit containing 3 L sharped mixing bars (after R2).
Rotating the mixing units means that while one set of bars are mixing, the next ones are
being washed with diluted was solution and rinsed with deionized water in the mixing
bar wash stations.
Mixing unit 1
Mixing unit 2

3.4.9 Incubation bath part
The incubator keeps the reaction temperature at 37°C. 165 cuvettes distributed
between cuvette wheel. A cuvette is a made from quartz glass. The light path of a
cuvette is 6 mm.
• Minimum reaction volume: 120 µL
• Maximum reaction volume: 425 µL
Incubator
3.4.10 Photometry Unit

This unit consists of a photometer halogen lamp, lenses, a diffraction grating and a
photo-detector to perform photometry of reaction fluids in a cuvette.
Photometry
Never touch the photometer lamp while it is hot and never allow the light from it
to enter you eyes directly.
WARNING

3.4.11 Wash Nozzle Unit
The wash nozzle unit comprises six sets of three wash nozzles of different lengths, one
single aspiration nozzle and two single drying nozzles with white teflon tips. The longest
wash nozzle aspirates the mixture from the cuvette. The next longest dispenses the
detergent or water. The shortest wash nozzle aspirates any excess detergent or water,
to prevent spillage.
The single aspiration nozzles removes all liquid from the cuvette and the drying nozzles
dry the cuvettes completely.
The dispensing sequence of the wash nozzles is as follows:

• Nozzle 1 and 2 - Diluted Wash Solution
• Nozzle 3 to 6 - Warm water
• Nozzle 7 - Aspiration
• Nozzle 8 - 9 Drying
Wash nozzle

3.4.12 Reagent Refrigeration Unit
The two reagent refrigerators house the reagents. They maintain their temperature
between 4°C and 12°C even when the system is shut down touching End. The reagent
bottles are housed in trays that rotate to carry the bottles to the aspiration position.
There are 60 reagent spaces in the R1 and 48 reagent spaces in the R2 refrigerator.15
ml, 30 ml, 60 ml and 120 ml bottles can be placed on each unit, using the bottle
supporters provided.
Reagent 2 refrigerator
Reagent 1 refrigerator
Always ensure reagent bottles are placed on the unit with the barcode side of the bottle
to the outer surface.
CAUTION
Be sure the caps are removed from all bottles placed in the unit.

3.4.13 STAT Table Unit
The STAT table is used for short turn around time samples. It has a switch for rotating
the STAT table unit.
The STAT table unit maintains its temperature between 4 °C and 12 °C even when the
system is shut down touching End.
In addition to emergency samples, QC samples, calibration samples, ISE calibration
samples, etc. can be set to the STAT table unit.
Sample cup
STAT table cover
Barcode reader
laser radiation
(Sample ID)
STAT table
Top view of STAT table

Hole Sample
No.1 to No.22 STAT sample, QC sample, and Cal sample
S-H ISE Serum Standard Solution H
S-L ISE Serum Standard Solution L
U-H ISE Urine Standard Solution H
U-L ISE Urine Standard Solution L
CRS-H ISE CRS Standard Solution H
CRS-M ISE CRS Standard Solution M
CRS-L ISE CRS Standard Solution L
CLEAN ISE Cleaning solution
SEL-K ISE Electrode Check Liquid (K)
SEL-Na ISE Electrode Check Liquid (Na)
RB-1, ARB-2 Reagent Blank Sample
• The STAT table can only read barcodes on samples (if set up) that are placed on the
outer positions of the table. Always keep the cover on the table to keep the temperature
CAUTION on the table down and to prevent dust from entering the samples. While the STAT table is
refrigerated, you should never store samples on it.
Although the inside of the STAT table is refrigerated, it is not appropriate for preserving
samples for a long time. Therefore, you should never store samples on it.
• In case of opening the STAT table cover (s), do not open it too much. The hinge of the
cover (s) may be deformed.
The following table summarizes the specifications for the barcode readers.
Barcode Reader Specifications

Wave length: 660 nm
Maximum output: 4.9 mW
Pulse width: 89 µS
Frequency: 524 Hz
Class: 3R

3.4.14 Syringe Unit
This system has a sample syringe and a dispenser for specimen, two syringes and two
dispensers for R1 and R2 reagent respectively and a syringe and dispenser for sample
washing. There is an additional dispenser for ISE Buffer solution, if the ISE option is
installed.
Various syringes are used to dispense minute quantities of serum, urine, reagent, etc.

3.4.15 Detergent rolling pump unit
This unit has the detergent rolling pump for supply of detergent from the master
detergent tank to the diluted detergent tank (detergent tank).
Rolling tube
Detergent
rolling pump unit
Connectors
3.4.16 Tank Storage

The tank storage has a deionized water tank, a master detergent tank, and a diluted
detergent tank.
The solutions required in support of analysis operations are supplied from these tanks.
When ISE (optional) is installed, a buffer solution tank, a Mid-Standard fluid tank, and a
Reference solution tank are included as ISE tanks.
• Deionized Water Tank. See page 3-31.
• Concentrated Detergent Tank. See page 3-32.
• Diluted Detergent Tank. See page 3-32.
Master detergent tank

Detergent tank
Deionized water tank
Deionized Water Tank

The deionized water tank has a capacity of 20 liters. A float switch indicates when the
volume in the tank is low and then opens a valve to automatically fill it. The deionized
water is produced from tap water using a deionizer.

Concentrated Detergent Tank
The concentrated detergent tank has a capacity of 2 liters of concentrated detergent.
Diluent is automatically performed from the concentrated solution in this tank to
generate diluted detergent.
Diluted Detergent Tank

The diluted tank has a capacity of 2 liters of diluted detergent. Diluted detergent is used
to wash cuvettes and mixing bars.
3.4.17 Breakers and Fuses

The main system breaker board allows you to isolate power from specific areas of the
system. The System Main Power Switch is the main switch and automatically shuts
down all the breaker switches. All breaker switches should be in the ON position during
normal conditions.
3.4.18 ISE Unit (option)

3.5 Understanding the Computer
Software
This system is controlled using a MS Windows® software application. It is therefore
easy to navigate for anyone who has basic PC skills and experience with MS
Windows®. You can use the touch screen on the display to access every button you
see on the window. The keyboard can also be used.
3.5.1 Graphical User Interface (GUI). See page 3-33.
3.5.2 Main button bar. See page 3-34.
3.5.3 Processing time. See page 3-34.
3.5.4 Measure Modes. See page 3-35.
3.5.5 Touch Screen and Keyboard. See page 3-36.
3.5.1 Graphical User Interface (GUI)

You can control the system using a standard windows GUI.
C
This interface is composed of the following three main window display areas.
A. Action control area

The control buttons for start, stop, pause of analysis process and display of menus on
the display.
B. Menu area
This allows you to access all other system functions.
For details on a complete list of the functions available here, refer to “12 Menu Tree” on
page 12-1.

C. Alarm area
The alarm messages for processing problems during system operation are displayed
here.
3.5.2 Main button bar

You can control the system using the following main buttons:
Button Item Contents

Home Touch this button to transit to the Home
screen
Menu List Touch this button to display the Menu list
screen
User menu Touch this button to display the user
menu list screen set by the user
Mode Display area Display of the present mode and the time
until operation completion
Start Touch this button to start analysis.
Pause Touch this button to pause analysis.
Feeder Stop Touch this button to stop the rack feeder.
Stop/Stand by Touch this button to stop the analysis.

When stopped, you can also use this
button to shift the system to standby
mode.
Help Touch this button to display operation
help.
Logout Touch this button to log out the user.
End Touch this button to shut down the

operation system and switch off the
auxiliary power supply.
Time Display area Present date and time are displayed.
3.5.3 Processing time

The analysis time is defined as the time from aspiration of a sample by the sample
probe until the end of measurement of applicable items.
The necessary time for rack analysis and Simple STAT Mode are both approximately 8
minutes and 30 seconds.

3.5.4 Measure Modes
The system measure modes displayed in the “Mode Display Area” are shown below.
Mode Contents
Initialization The initialization has started. The operating system starts to run
the DPR program. The ANL program is also loaded on the
analyzer from the DPR.
Warm up When End is touched and the system has shut down, only the
refrigerators are maintained at operational temperatures.
Therefore after system initialization, the system waits for the
operational temperature of all other areas to be reached and
become stable. After the system temperature is stabilized, the
operation mode changes to Standby.
Warm up time depends on the environment temperature. The
specification states that warm up time is maximum
approximately 20 minutes.
Standby When the system is ready to perform sample analysis, the
operation mode changes to Standby.
Analysis can be started.
Measure 1 Start analysis when the rack set on the feeder, rack will feed
from rack feeder. The system has started analysis.
Measure 2 Rack supply from the rack feeder has stopped. Analysis can be
restarted.
Stop The operation mode changes to Stop due to either system error
or user operation. Analysis cannot be started in the Stop mode.
When the operation mode is changed to Stop touching the
Stop/Standby, you can change the mode back to Standby by
touching the Stop/Standby again.
When the operation mode has changed to Stop due to a system
error, remove the cause of the error and then touch the Stop/
Standby to change the operation mode back to Standby.
Pause The operation mode changes to Pause due to either system
error or user operation. Part of the loaded racks are not
analyzed and remain on the rack feeder. The analysis can be
restarted.
When the mode has changed due to an error, check the cause
of the error using the alarm log list, take appropriate action, and
then resume analysis by pressing Start.
If an analysis operation is forcibly stopped, the analysis operation is aborted while a

sample remains in the sample probe and reagents remain in cuvettes as they are.
CAUTION Eliminate the reagents in cuvettes and the sample in the sample probe by performing
W1 operation. For details on W1 execution procedure, refer to “8.8.12 Executing W1
(auto-washing of the sample probe and cuvettes)” on page 8-97.

3.5.5 Touch Screen and Keyboard
This system permits selection of buttons and drop-down lists by touching the touch
screen. This is the same operation as a left click with the mouse.
The keyboard of the accessory personal computer can also be used instead of touching
the touch screen or mouse button. It is not necessary to set operation by touch screen,
mouse or keyboard, and use in any combination is possible. This guide describes the
use of touch screen and keyboard for the procedures to be explained.
Key Button name

F9 Start key
F10 Pause key
F11 Feeder Stop key
F12 Stop/Standby key
Home Home key
Scroll Lock Menu List key
Pause Alarm clear key
End End key
Shift+End Log out
Ctrl+Home Help
PrintScreen Print Screen key

4
Configuring Tests
This chapter shows you how to add a new test

to the system. Follow these procedures:
4.1 Setting Analysis Mode. See page 4-2.

4.2 Setting the System Time. See page 4-9.
4.3 Entering Online Settings. See page 4-10.
4.4 Entry of Test Items. See page 4-15.
4.5 Setting Specific Test Parameters. See page 4-28.
4.6 Programming Repeat Tests. See page 4-42.
4.7 Set Calibration Analysis. See page 4-47.
4.8 Configuring QC Analysis. See page 4-59.
4.9 Setting the Tests to be Checked. See page 4-69.
4.10 Preventing Contamination. See page 4-71.
4.11 Setting up Data Lists. See page 4-76.
4.12 Setting the test requisition format. See page 4-81.
AU680 User Guide Version4.0 4. Configuring Tsets 4-1

4.1 Setting Analysis Mode
Set tube/patient identification method as barcode or sequential, repeat run method,
sample setting position on the STAT table, and other basic analysis conditions.
4.1.1 Set the common conditions for rack analysis and STAT analysis. See page 4-2.
4.1.2 Set the Rack Number Limit. See page 4-5.
4.1.3 Parameter Setting for STAT Table Analysis. See page 4-6.
4.1.1 Set the common conditions for rack analysis and

STAT analysis
1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>System>System Condition>Analysis
mode to display the “System Condition: Analysis mode” screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).

The screen becomes editable.
4-2 4. Configuring Tsets AU680 User Guide Version4.0

3. Set the analysis parameters with drop-down list and dialog box.
Item Options, set range Remarks

Test requisition
Routine Sequential Sequential: Perform item inquiry in the order
Emergency Rack No. of sample arrangement.
Barcode Rack No.: Perform item inquiry in the order of
STAT Sequential rack No. and sample arrangement on the rack.
Barcode Barcode: Perform item inquiry according to
the barcode ID attached to the sample cups.
Sequential Check box Set sample ID reading Yes/No.
Sample ID When the inquiry method is other than
Read “Barcode analysis”, the sample ID is stored as
sample information.
Auto Repeat
Rack Disabled Disabled: After first run, a repeat run list is
STAT Enabled created, and the operator determines the
samples to be repeated manually. And the
operator performs repeat run execution
judgment and start of repeat run.
Enabled: The system performs automatic
repeat run under referencing the repeat run
parameters.
S. ID Barcode:
The inquiry method can be set only in case of “Barcode analysis” or when “Sequential Sample ID
Read” is select.
Barcode Type Selection from 7 types
Digits 0 to 26 digits Including the check digit
Check Mode No (No Chk. Chr.) No (No Chk. Chr.): When checking is not
No (With Chk. Chr.) possible because barcodes without a check
Yes character are used.
No (With Chk. Chr.): When barcodes with
check characters are used, but checking is not
done.
Yes: In case of check execution.
Others
Device No. Any 7-digit number
Default type Serum, Urine, Other-1, On all screens selecting the sample type, the
Other-2, Whole Blood selected types are displayed first.
STAT Operation Auto Auto: Auto Analysis Mode
Manual Manual: Sample Confirmation Mode
No Reagent Alarm Only Alarm Only: Analysis is continued except for
Operation With Pause the respective item.
With Pause: Analysis is stopped for all tests
and transition to Pause is made.
When the barcode type is “MULTI CODE” and the number of digits to be used is “No
setting”, this system recognizes only digits could be read for 2 of 5 interleave and 2 of 5
CAUTION standard. For example, when the digits at the label edges cannot be read because the
label has been attached inclined, judgment of erroneous recognition is not possible.
Accordingly, attache the labels correctly to the sample cups.

• When the barcode type “ISBT128” has been selected:
ISBT128” barcodes are handled as “CODE128”.
TIP The check mode is set forcibly to “Yes”.
The number of used digits is fixed to “13”.
The first and the last two characters of the barcode are disregarded automatically.
• When the barcode type is “MULTI CODE”, the barcode type to be read should be set at the
time of set-up. Max. 4 types can be set.
• Max. 26 digits can be entered for a barcode.
• For details on barcode specifications, refer to “5.1.2 Sample Barcode Specifications” on
page 5-4.
• For details on barcode label attachment method, refer to “5.1.4 Applying Barcode Labels to
Sample Cups” on page 5-9.
4. Touch Alarm Sound (F5).

This brings up the “Alarm Sound” dialog.
5. Select the alarm sound to be used for “Announce”, “Caution”, and “Trouble” from
the respective drop-down list.
The selected alarm is played when Play is touched. The playback sound stops after the
specified time or when Stop, OK or Cancel is pressed.
TIP
6. Touch OK.
The “Alarm Sound” dialog is closed and alarm sound set as “Alarm Sound” on the edit
screen is displayed.
7. Touch Confirm (F1).

The set contents are registered.

4.1.2 Set the Rack Number Limit
Set the range of rack numbers that define the categories of sample types.
mode to display the “System Condition: Analysis Mode” screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).

3. Enter the upper limit value for the rack No. according to the following input value
limitations into the table “Rack No. Limit”.
Serum Urine Other-1 Other-2 Whole blood

<First Run> 0 to 9999 Left column + Left column + Left column + *0 or 9999
Routine 1 to 9999 1 to 9999 1 to 9999
<First Run>
Emergency
<Repeat Run> Same as Same as Same as Same as Left column +
Routine above above above above 1 to 9999
<Repeat Run> <Repeat Same as Same as Same as *0 or 9999
Emergency Run> Routine above above above
+1 to 99
• In each column, only 0 can be used when up to 9999 is used in the column on the left.
• Columns with “*” have automatic setting. Input is not possible.
• When the sample setting method is “Mixed sample types possible”, setting is not possible in
the hatched part of the above table.


4.1.3 Parameter Setting for STAT Table Analysis
Set the STAT table sample placement positions etc.
mode to display the “System Condition: Analysis mode” screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).

3. Select the check method at the time of starting STAT table analysis from the drop-
down list of “STAT Operation” of “Others”.
Option Explanations
Auto The system automatically recognizes the sample cups set on the STAT table and
the IDs when starting analysis.
Manual The operator starts the confirmation for the placement of sample cups as well as
barcode identification on the STAT table before the start of analysis.
This setting is performed automatically when the “Test Requisition” is other than
barcode ID.
4. Select the group to be set from the drop-down list of “Group” of “STAT Table
Attribution”.
Three groups can be selected.

5. Enter the STAT table setting positions No. 1 to 22 into “STAT Table Attribution” so
that there is no overlap. There are use limitations below depending on whether
barcode IDs are used or not.
• Mixed sample type possible
It is possible to set different type of sample in one STAT table.
Combination of
STAT table Attribution
barcode ID (Yes/No)
Variable Position of Calibrator
Variable Position of Control

Fixed Position of Calibrator
Fixed Position of Control
Free Position
Repeat Run
Calibrator
First Run
STAT
QC
STAT, calibrator,
Yes Yes Yes UNP* UNP UNP UNP
and control
No need for UP UP Only calibrator
No Yes Yes UNP UNP
defining the and control
set positions
Other than above by sample type UP UP UNP
*UP:Use Possible
UNP:Use Not Possible
• Mixed sample type impossible
It is impossible to set different type of sample in one Stat table.
Combination of
STAT table Attribution
barcode ID (Yes/No)
Variable Position of Calibrator
Variable Position of Control

Fixed Position of Calibrator
Fixed Position of Control
Free Position
Repeat Run
Calibrator
First Run
STAT
QC
Yes Yes Yes Define the set UNP UNP Only calibrator
No Yes Yes positions by UP UNP UP UNP and control
Other than above sample type UP UP UNP
When the sample setting method is “Mixed sample types possible”, some settings are not
possible.

The set values are registered.
For details on ACAL barcode ID operation, refer to “4.7.1 Calibrator Registration” on page 4-
48.
In case of calibration, the position of installation of a necessary calibrator at the test

requested for calibration will be automatically assigned to the set position when
TIP
calibration is requested.
In case of control, the position of installation of a necessary control at the test requested
for QC will be automatically assigned to the set position when QC is requested.

4.2 Setting the System Time
The system time at the time of analysis is added to the test data as the index time.
When searching for test data, the index time can be used as a search key.
For smooth saving and retrieval of test data, confirm the system time periodically and
set the correct time.
Setting the Date and Time

To set the date and time:
1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>System>System Condition>Set Date
and Time to display the “System Condition: Set Date and Time” screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).

3. Set “Date” and “Time” as 24 hour display.

The set system time is enabled.

4.3 Entering Online Settings
You can set how the system communicates with a host computer.
For example, whether information is transferred between a host computer and the
system’s computer immediately, or in a batch, or not at all.
4.3.1 Editing online conditions. See page 4-10.
4.3.2 Setting the Online Protocol. See page 4-12.
4.3.3 Editing an online item No.. See page 4-14.
4.3.1 Editing online conditions

The following operation permits setting of the following I/O conditions as online
conditions.
Test Requisition Information Receiving Method

The communication methods for receiving information concerning the following samples
are set in “Realtime”, “Batch”, and “None” respectively. To change the setting, select
one from the drop-down list. The default is “None”.
• Routine normal
• Routine repeat
• Emergency normal
• Emergency repeat
• STAT normal
• STAT repeat
Test Data Transmission Method

The communication methods for analysis results concerning the following samples are
set in “Realtime”, “Batch”, and “None” respectively. To change the setting, select one
from the drop-down list. The default is “None”.
• Routine normal
• Routine repeat
• Emergency normal
• Emergency repeat
• STAT normal
• STAT repeat
• STAT quick
• Reagent blank
• Calibration
• QC

Take the following procedures to set reception of sample information and transmission
of test data to real-time or batch.
1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>System>Online>Set Up to display
the “Online: Set Up tab” screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).

3. Set the operating procedure following the message display.


4.3.2 Setting the Online Protocol
The protocol for online communication can be referred and set.
Setting items and setting ranges are shown below.
Setting item Setting range Initial value

T.R.I Receive Error Control Stop / Continue Stop
Results Transfer Error Control Stop / Continue Stop
Rack No. Transfer None / 4 / 5 4
Format Configuration 6/9 6
Zero Suppress Unchecked / Checked Checked
Character Length 7/8 7
Parity Bit No / Even / Odd No
Stop Bit 1/2 1
Start Code (1st.) 01h to 1Fh 02h: STX
Start Code (2nd.) None / 01h to 1Fh None
End Code (1st.) 01h to 1Fh 03h: ETX
End Code (2nd.) None / 01h to 1Fh None
Text Length 256 / 512 / 1024 256
Device No. Unchecked / Checked Unchecked
Device No. 00 to 99 00
ETB Control Unchecked / Checked Unchecked
Bit/Sec. 4800 / 9600 9600
Class Class A / Class B Class A
Retry 0 to 3 3
BCC Check Unchecked / Checked Unchecked
<Time Out [×100msec.]> T1 00 to 99 msec. 20
Diluent Inf. Unchecked / Checked Unchecked
Reagent Inf. Unchecked / Checked Unchecked
R1-2 / R2-2 Use Unchecked / Checked Unchecked
Online Test No. Digit 2/3 2
No. of Data Marks 2/4 2
Cal No. / Control No. Digit 2/3 2

Editing the Online Protocol
1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>System>Online>Protocol to display
the “Online: Protocol tab” screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).

3. Set the parameters following the message display.


4.3.3 Editing an online item No.
The test items and item Nos. used for online communication can be referred and set.
1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>System>Online>Online Test No. to
display the “Online: Online Test No. tab” screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).

3. Move the cursor to the set item.

4. Enter the “Online Item No.”.
5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 for each test item to be set.

4.4 Entry of Test Items
4.4.1 Test Name Setting. See page 4-15.
4.4.2 Creating a New Profile. See page 4-21.
4.4.3 Adding the New Test to a Group. See page 4-25.
4.4.1 Test Name Setting

This menu allows the user to name each of the tests, define calculated tests, and define
reagent ID settings. A maximum of 120 tests can be programmed. The contents of this
menu may be printed.
Editing the Test Name

Naming a test on the “Test Name Setting: Test Name tab” screen is done according to
the following procedures.
1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>Parameters>Common Test
Parameters>Test Name>Test Name to display the “Test Name: Test Name tab”
screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).


3. Select the cell for the test to be set with using and to scroll the list.
4. Set the following items as required.
Setting item Setting contents Input limit

Name Recognizable abbreviation for 6 characters
each test
Long Name Full test name (up to 20 20 characters
characters)
Reagent ID A code for each reagent bottle A value of 3 digits (000 to 999)
Alarm Shots Number of tests remaining at Any value from 1 to 200
which point an alarm will be
issued
Multi Reagent Switch Multi reagent switch for each “Yes”, “No”
test item
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each test item to be set.

6. After input, touch Confirm (F1).
• The test name cannot be edited for test Nos. 96 to 102.
TIP • With group condition setting, max. three test items to be used for LIH judgment can be set.
• The setting information for “Sample Blank” dialog and “Calculated Tests” dialog is
displayed in the remarks column.
Sample Blank setting

Interference from other substances in the serum may contribute to optical density
measured. Sample blank correction is performed to remove this interference from the
optical density measurement. Sample blank correction uses color items (active reagent)
and blank items (inert reagent). The OD value of Y obtained from the formula Y = X – B
(X is the OD value of a color item and B is the OD value of a blank item) is multiplied
with a factor. Max. 10 sample blanked tests can be set.

Editing the Sample Blank
Parameters>Test Name>Test Name to display the “Test Name: Test Name tab”
screen.
2. Touch Sample Blank (F5).
This brings up the “Sample Blank” dialog.
3. Select the test item to be set to color item from the drop-down list of the column
“Color Item”.
4. Select the test item to be set to blank item from the drop-down list of the column
“Blank Item”.
5. Touch Close.
The dialog closes and the setting contents are registered.
Test items without a test name and test items set to calculated test items cannot be
used for color items or blank items.
TIP

Programming Calculated Tests
A test can gain its final analysis result from a calculation formula. This formula can
combine the results of up to five separate tests together with up to four constant values.
For details on formula setting, refer to “4.9 Setting the Tests to be Checked” on page 4-69.
Parameters>Test Name>Test Name to display the “Test Name: Name tab” screen.
2. Touch Calculated Tests (F6).

This brings up the “Calculated Tests” dialog.
3. Move the cursor to item to be set.

4. Select the setting item from the drop-down list.
Selecting the drop-down list will change the display to “Selected status (blue)” or
“Deselected status (gray)”.
5. Repeat step 3 and 4 for each test item to be set.

6. Touch Close.
The dialog closes and the settings will be registered.
• Tests used in the formula cannot be selected from color items, blank items, LIH, calculated
test items, and HbA1c-related tests.
TIP
• In the case of an illegal entry, the cursor moves to the corresponding input column without
closing the dialog window for corrections to be made.
Test items without a test name cannot be set to calculated test items.

LIH editing
Lipemia/Icterus/Hemolysis testing may be completed to judge sample integrity. The
reagent and analysis mode must be set.
1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>Parameter>Common Test
Parameters>Test Name to display the “Test Name: Test Name tab” screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).

LIH (F7) appears.
3. Touch LIH (F7).
This brings up the “LIH” dialog.
4. Select the reagent to be used for LIH judgment from the drop-down list of the “LIH
Reagent”.
Select either Dedicated or Non - Dedicated.
5. Select the analysis mode to be used for LIH judgment from the drop-down list of
the column “LIH Selection”.
Select “Select All” or “Selectable”.
• Select All: Automatically apply the LIH test to all the sample.
TIP • Selectable: Select the sample to apply the LIH test manually.
6. Touch Close.
The dialog closes and the setting contents are registered.

Editing the Common Reagents
When using subsidiary or third reagent items that are common to one or more tests, it is
possible to define these “common” items.
Follow the procedures below for setting the name of common reagents etc. Max. 10
items can be set.
Parameters>Test Name>Common Reagents to display the “Test Name: Common
Reagents tab” screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).

3. Select the column “Common Reagent Name”.

4. Enter the setting item.
Enter within 6 characters.
5. Select the “Reagent ID”.

6. Enter the Reagent ID.
Enter 3-digit value (000 to 999).
7. Select the column “Alarm Shots”.

8. Enter the alarm shots.
Enter 1 to 200 values.
9. Select the column “Onboard Stability Period”.

10. Enter the day and hour.

11. Repeat steps 3 to 10 for each test item to be set.
Max. 10 items can be set.
12. Touch Confirm.

4.4.2 Creating a New Profile

A profile is a group of tests that are usually requested at the same time. Using a profile
reduces the number of key strokes needed, as a single profile is selected instead of
multiple tests. A maximum of 100 profiles (No.0 to No.99) can be registered for test
items, RB/CAL, and quality controls, and up to 99 test items can be registered in one
profile.
Individual profiles can be assigned a name (profile name) according to the application.
For details on batch setting of multiple test items for a sample, refer to “5.7.2 Entering
Manual Requisitions” on page 5-43.
Profile 0 is the default profile. This is automatically used when:

TIP • There is a barcode read error.
• There is no requisition found for a sample in sequential mode.
• There are online errors.

Edit Profiles for Patient Samples
1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>parameters>Common Test
Parameters>Profile>Sample to display the “Profile: Sample tab” screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).

3. Select the sample type to be set from the drop-down list of “Type”.
Select one out of “Whole blood”, “Serum”, “Urine”, “Other-1”, and “Other-2”.
4. Select the profile No. from the drop-down list of “Profile Name”.
5. Enter the profile name to be set to “Profile Name”.
6. Select the test to be included in to the profile from the test item list.
The selected column changes to the selection color. The selected number is displayed in
the column “Selected Tests”.
7. Repeat steps 3 to 6 for each profile to be set.

8. After profile setting, touch Confirm (F1).

RB/Calibration Profile editing
Parameters>Profile>RB/Calibration to display the test items set to profile No. 0 as
a list on the screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).

5. Select the type to be set from the drop-down list of “Type”.

Select one out of “Serum”, “Urine”, “Other-1”, and “Other-2”.
6. Select the item to be registered to the profile from the Test Item list.
The selected column changes to the color corresponding to the calibration type which can
be set (ACAL+RB, one-point correction, or RB Only). The selected number is displayed in
the column “Selected Tests”.
7. When the calibration type needs to be changed, touch Calibration Options (F5).
The colors which can be set are displayed in the order of yellow for ACAL+RB, green for
one-point correction, and blue for RB only and the setting is changed.

9. After profile setting, touch the Confirm (F1).
• ACAL setting at the profile of RB/ACAL is not available without setting of calibration items
analyzing condition.
TIP
• Depending on the analysis mode, the calibration type in step 7 may not be changed.
Quality Control Profile editing

The profile name and the tests included in it can be set according to the following
procedure.
Parameters>Profile>QC to display a list of test items set for profile No. 0 on the
screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).

The profile settings becomes editable.
5. Select the type to be set from the drop-down list of “Type”.

Select one out of “Serum”, “Urine”, “Other-1”, and “Other-2”.

6. Select the item to be registered to the profile from the Test Item list.
The selected number is displayed in the column “Selected Tests”.

8. After profile setting, touch Confirm (F1).
The selection status for the following profile Nos. becomes the initial status of QC
reception for each sample type.
TIP
• No. 87: Serum: For group 1
• No. 90: Urine: For group 1
• No. 93: Other-1: For group 1
• No. 99: Whole Blood: Common for all groups
4.4.3 Adding the New Test to a Group

You must add a test to a group before you can perform it on your system. A group is a
preselected set of tests. You can therefore access a specific set of tests quickly by
selecting a group.
You can set up to three groups, each with up to 60 tests. When you select which group
to perform, the system verifies (during a reagent check) that reagents set in this group
are present, and checks their status.
Tests not in the group are inactive and any errors related to these tests do not appear.
You can choose which group of tests to perform in the “Start Condition” screen before
starting analysis. See “5.2.3 Setting the Start Condition” on page 5-20.
• The number of test items that can be registered are 61 when the LIH special reagent is
“Not Special Reagent” in the test name specification, and 63 when the ISE (option) is
TIP installed.
• Test data are printed by the printer (option) in the order of the test items registered for each
group. LIH items and calculated test items are printed last.

Group Editing
Set a group name for each group, LIH analysis selection possible or not possible, test
items, etc. according to the following procedures. You can add a test to a group, or
remove an existing test, and add or change a name of the group. To do this:
Parameters>Group of Tests to display the “Common Test Parameters: Group of
Tests” screen for setting of group names and groups.
2. Select the group to edit from the “Group” drop-down list or with using or .
3. Touch Edit (F1).
For change of the group name, enter the new group name within 20 characters.
4. Touch Test Item Setting (F5).

This brings up “Test Item Setting” screen.
5. Touch the test name to change.

Each button touch changes Select and Non-select alternately. Newly added test joins the
end of order.
The number of test selected is shown in “Selected Tests”. Selected tests (maximum of 60
tests) are shown in blue.
6. Touch Confirm.

7. To change the test order of the group, select the test you like to reorder.
The selected test is highlighted in blue.
8. Touch Forward (F2) or Backward (F3) to change the order.
When “Special Reagent” has been specified for LIH reagent in “4.4.1 Test Name Setting”
on page 4-15, “Test Item Setting” is not displayed on the screen.
TIP
You can select up to three tests as special reagents for the LIH test.
9. Touch LIH Test Item Setting (F6).
The “LIH Test Item Setting” dialog is displayed.
10. Select a test using the “LIH Test Item” drop down.
Up to three test can be used for LIH.
Each button touch switches the selected test item with the preceding or following test item
respectively.
11. Touch Close.

The set contents are registered and the screen returns to “Group Setting”.
12. Touch Confirm (F1) to save the settings.

4.5 Setting Specific Test Parameters
Sample volume, reagent volume, and other analysis parameters are set by tests.
4.5.1 Set General Tests. See page 4-29.
4.5.2 LIH Test Setting. See page 4-33.
4.5.3 ISE (option) Test Setting. See page 4-35.
4.5.4 Set the HbA1c Analysis Parameters. See page 4-36.
4.5.5 Set Calculated Test Items. See page 4-38.
4.5.6 Set the range. See page 4-40.
Incorrect specific test parameters will cause erroneous analysis results, and can lead to
misdiagnosis. Specific test parameter settings should be confirmed through visual veri-
CAUTION fication against the published settings, as well as through analysis using materials with
known concentrations.
• For details on display a list of set values, refer to “List Display” on page 4-32 of “4.5.1 Set
General Tests“.
• For details on print a list of set values, refer to “7.8 Print the Set Contents” on page 7-31.

4.5.1 Set General Tests
The analysis parameters for general biochemical tests are set. Before this setting,
register the analysis test name.
For details on registration of the analysis test name, refer to “4.4 Entry of Test Items” on
page 4-15.
Edit General Tests

1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>Parameters>Specific Test
Parameters>General to display the “Specific Test Parameters: General” screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).

3. Select the Test Name from the drop-down list of “Test Name” at the top of the
screen.
4. Select the Type from the drop-down list of “Type”.
Selection is possible from the four types of “Serum”, “Urine”, “Other-1”, and “Other-2”.

5. Enter the analysis parameters according to the following table.
Setting item Setting range Remarks

Operation YES, NO Turns on/off the operation of a test
according to sample type.
Sample Volume and Diluent Sample In steps of 0.1 µL
Diluent 0 µL : 1.6 to 25.0 µL
10 µL : 1.6 to 20.0 µL
Pre-Dilution Rate 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 50, 75, 100
Reagent Volume and Diluent Sample • In steps of 1 µL
Diluent 0 µL : 15 to 250 µL • Total of reagent volume and
10 µL : 15 to 240 µL diluent within 250µL
6. In case of 3-step reagent, touch Change Reagent Type (F5).

This brings up the “Change Reagent Type” dialog.
7. Select from the drop-down list according to the type.

Type None None: In case of 2-reagent type
R1-2 R1-2: When the reagent 1 is a 2-
R2-2 reagent type
R2-2: When the reagent 2 is a 2-
reagent type
8. Touch Close.
The “Change Reagent Type” dialog is closed and the Reagent Volume part displays the
R1-2 and R2-2 dispensing volume input area.
9. Enter the dispensing volume for R1-2 and R2-2.

Reagent Volume Diluent Reagent • In steps of 1 µL
10 µL : 5 µL • Total of reagent volume and
0, 10 to 235 µL : 15 to 240 µL diluent within 250µL
10. Touch Set Common Reagents (F6) when common reagents are used.
This brings up the “Set Common Reagents” dialog.
11. Select the Common reagent from the drop-down list according to the reagent
used as common reagent.

Type None
R1-2
R2-2
Name Reagent registered in “Common See “4.4.1 Test Name Setting” on
Reagents” page 4-15.
12. Touch Close.

The “Set Common Reagents” dialog is closed and the set “Common Reagents” are
displayed.

13. Set the remaining analysis conditions according to the following table.

Wave length pri. 340, 380, 410, 450, 480, 520, 540, Ths setting range of pri. and
sec. 570, 600, 660, 700, 750, and 800nm sec. are the same.
Method END, RATE, FIXED, END1, RATE1,
FIXED1
Reaction Slope +, - + used for an increasing
reaction curve
- used for a decreasing reaction
curve
Measuring Point-1 First: 0 to 26 The photometry points are
Measuring Point-2 Last: 1 to 27 limited by the analysis mode.
Linearity limit 1 to 100, None Step of 1
Linearity check of the reaction
curve
Lag Time Check YES, NO Only used for Rate or Rate1
methods
OD Limit -2.0000 to 3.0000 Only used for Rate, Rate1,
Fixed and Fixed 1 methods
Reagent OD Limit -2.0000 to 3.0000
Dynamic Range Low: -9999999 to 9999999
High: Low value to 9999999
Correlation Factor A: -9999999 to 9999999 Correlation value = A x
B: -9999999 to 9999999 measuring value + B
Factor for Maker A: -9999999 to 9999999 The factor for Maker coefficient
B: -9999999 to 9999999 revises concentration value with
an equation of Y=AX+B. The
difference between the
correlation is the fact that the
correlation correction is
performed after checking the
dynamic range while the Factor
for Maker correction is
performed before checking the
dynamic range. Editing is not
possible when the login user
level is “General user”.
Onboard Stability Days (0 to 999) and hours (0 to 23)
Period
LIH Influence Check YES, NO For each tests, set the judgment
level of chyle (L), icterus (I), and
hemolysis (H) to the level where
the test result will be affected by
exceeding the level.
For the test data, which exceed
the judgment level, the data flag
will be added.
Lipemia +, ++, +++, ++++, +++++
Setting is possible only when the
Icterus
LIH Influence Check is YES.
Hemolysis

List Display
Use the following procedures to confirm the test details for set analysis tests.
1. Touch List Display (F7).
This brings up the “List Display (test requisition)” dialog.
2. Select the sample type from the “Type” drop-down list.

3. Select up to six tests on the screen.
Selected test are highlighted in blue.
4. Touch Display and a List Display is shown for the selected tests.
5. Touch Close to get back to the list display selection screen, and close again to
return to the specific test parameters screen.

4.5.2 LIH Test Setting
Set the analysis parameters and the judgment levels when LIH is measured individually.
Register the LIH reagent name before setting the judgment level.
For details on LIH reagent name registration, refer to “LIH editing” on page 4-19 of “4.4.1
Test Name Setting“.
Edit the analysis parameters

Parameters>LIH to display the “Specific Test Parameters: LIH” screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).

“Dedicated” or “Not dedicated” is displayed in the “LIH Reagent”.

3. Set each set value according to the following table.

Sample Volume and Dilution Sample In steps of 0.1 µL
Dilution (*) 0 µL : 1.6 to 25.0 µL
10 µL : 1.6 to 20.0 µL
Reagent Volume and Dilution Sample In steps of 1 µL
Dilution (*) 0 µL : 15 to 250.0 µL
10 µL : 15 to 240.0 µL
Onboard Stability Period Days (0 to 999) and hours (0 to 23)
(*)
Judgment level The judgment level is set separately for Lipemia,
Icterus, and Hemolysis.
+ : 0.0 to 3.0
++ : + value to 3.0
+++ : ++ value to 3.0
++++ : +++ value to 3.0
+++++ : ++++ value to 3.0
(*): “Sample Volume” and “Diluent”, “Reagent R1(R1-1) Volume” and “Diluent”, and
“Onboard Stability Period” can be set only when “LIH reagent” is set as dedicated.
4. Touch Confirm(F1).

4.5.3 ISE (option) Test Setting
ISE analysis Operation, Dynamic Range, and Correction Factor are set. The Sample
Volume etc. is fixed by the system and cannot be changed.
ISE is an option. Option setting is required.
ISE Test Setting

Parameters>ISE to display the “Specific Test Parameters: ISE” screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).

3. Select “Yes” or “No” from the drop-down list of “Operation” and set whether
analysis is to be performed or not.
4. In case of execution, set “Dynamic Range” and “Correlation Factor” according to
the following table.

Correlation Factor A: -9999999 to 999999 Correlation value = A × measuring
B: -9999999 to 999999 value + B

5. Confirm the set values and touch Confirm (F1).
4.5.4 Set the HbA1c Analysis Parameters
This function is intended for use with Olympus reagents only. Using other than
Olympus reagent may cause incorrect diagnosis results.
CAUTION
Operation of the three tests 100.DENAT, 101.T-Hb, and 102.HbA1c and part of the
specific analysis parameters are set. Sample Volume etc. is fixed by the system and
cannot be changed.
Set HbA1c Tests

Parameters>HbA1c to display the “Specific Test Parameters: HbA1c” screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).

Editing becomes possible.

3. Select “Yes” or “No” from the drop-down list of “Operation” and set whether
analysis is to be performed or not. The settings are for all three tests together,
and individual setting is not possible.
4. In case of execution, set the remaining tests according to the following table.

Reagent OD Limit First Low:-2.0000 to 3.0000
High:-2.0000 to 3.0000
Last Low:-2.0000 to 3.0000
High:-2.0000 to 3.0000
Correlation Factor A: -9999999 to 9999999 Correlation value = A x measuring
B: -9999999 to 9999999 value + B
Factor for Maker A: -9999999 to 9999999 The factor for Maker coefficient
B: -9999999 to 9999999 revises concentration value with
an equation of Y=AX+B. The
difference between the correlation
is the fact that the correlation
correction is performed after
checking the dynamic range while
the Factor for Maker correction is
performed before checking the
dynamic range.
Editing is not possible when the
login user level is “General user”.
Onboard Stability Days (0 to 999) and hours (0 to
Period 23)


4.5.5 Set Calculated Test Items
Set Calculated Test Items

Parameters>Calculated Tests to display the “Specific Test Parameters: Calculated
Tests” screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).

3. Select the calculated test name from the drop-down list of “Calculated Test
Name”.
4. Select the type from the drop-down list of “Type”.

5. Set the following items according to the table.

Test Name Select the items to become Max. 5 types can be set.
calculated test items.
Constant Constant type: Value Value input is made only when the
Not set: - Constant type is “Value”.
Value: -9999999 to 9999999 Max. 4 types can be set.
Patient Information 1: -
Formula Calculated test formula Within 20 characters
Combination of +-*/()ABCDEabcd
QC Perform Not perform Specification of execution or no
Perform execution of quality control


4.5.6 Set the range
It is possible to compare the test data with multiple judgment standards and to display
the result added to the test data. The judgment standard is called check range. This
section explains the method for check range setting.
For details on error flag, refer to “9 Error Flag” on page 9-1.
Check Range Setting

Parameters>Range to display the “Specific Test Parameters: Range” screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).

3. Select the test name to be set from the drop-down list of “Test Name”.
Selection is possible from the five types of “Serum”, “Urine”, “Other-1”, “Other-2”, and
“Whole Blood”.

5. Select the flag or value from the drop-down list of “Value/Flag”.

Flag Test results are compared to the See “9 Error Flag” on page 9-1
High and Low set values for the
“Level”.
Value Test results are compared to the
High and Low set values for the
“Normal Ranges”.
When flag has been selected, setting ends. Execute step 11.
6. For input of setting values after the decimal point, touch Set Decimal Places
(F5).
This brings up the “Set Decimal Places” dialog.
7. Select decimal places from the drop-down list and touch Close.
The screen display changes to decimal places setting.
8. Set “Level” and “Panic Value”.

Level Low: -9999999 to 9999999 See “9 Error Flag” on page 9-1
Panic Value Low: -9999999 to 9999999
High: -9999999 to 9999999
Judgment is performed
independent of the setting (flag or
value) for “Data judgment”.
9. Set the values for Sex, Age, etc. of “Specific Ranges”.

Specific Ranges Low:
High:
10. select the check box in front of the Normal Ranges to be used for judgment.

4.6 Programming Repeat Tests
4.6.1 Repeat run Parameter Setting. See page 4-43.
4.6.2 Setting Specific Test Repeat run Parameters. See page 4-45.
The AU680 allows either manual or automatic repeat sample analysis. This section
describes how to configure the repeat mode.
Normal repeat:
Analysis is performed in the same conditions for the initial analysis and sample volume.
Repeat run with diluent:
Analysis is performed with a smaller sample volume than for the initial analysis.
1 The sample volume used for analysis is reduced with the same dilution rate as for the
initial analysis.
2 The dilution ratio is increased from the initial analysis.
Repeat run with condense:
Analysis is performed with a larger sample volume than for the initial analysis.
1 The sample volume used for analysis is increased with the same dilution rate as for the
initial analysis.
2 The dilution ratio is decreased from the initial analysis.

4.6.1 Repeat run Parameter Setting
Automatic overwriting of the judgment standard for repeat run execution and the repeat
run results over the original data or not is set.
Repeat run Common Parameters Setting

1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>Parameters>Repeat
Parameters>Repeat Common>Data Flag to display the “Repeat Common: Data
Flag tab” screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).

3. Select “Yes” or “No” from the drop-down list of “Auto Repeat Requisition”.
The setting ends when “No” is selected. Go to step 6.
4. Select “Yes” or No” from the drop-down list of “Repeat Data over-writes Original
Data Automatically”.
When “Yes” is selected, the original data are overwritten by the repeat run data.
5. Select any error flag from “Select Data Flag” and set the repeat run extraction
parameters.

OR mode Extraction with either selected flag
AND mode Extraction only when all selected
flags apply

6. When setting has been completed, confirm the set values and touch Confirm
(F1).
For details on error flag, refer to “9 Error Flag” on page 9-1.
Repeat run Group Setting

It is possible to set combinations of one analysis test as deciding test and one or more
analysis tests for this deciding test as related tests. For example, when ALB is set as
deciding test and TP as related test, when repeat run is judged necessary for ALB, TP
repeat run is judged necessary at the same time.
A maximum of 10 combinations of deciding tests and related tests can be set.
Parameters>Repeat Common>Group to display the “Repeat Common: Group tab”
screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).

3. Select “Deciding Test” and “Related Test” from the respective drop-down list.

4.6.2 Setting Specific Test Repeat run Parameters
Set the sample volume etc. by repeat run parameters for Repeat with diluent and
Repeat with condense.
Edit the specific repeat run parameters.

Parameters>Repeat Specific to display the “Repeat Parameters: Repeat Specific”
screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).

3. Select the Test Name from the drop-down list of “Test Name”.
“Whole Blood”.

5. Set “Repeat with diluent” or “Repeat with condense”.
“Normal Repeat” cannot be edited.

Sample Volume and Diluent Sample Sample Volume is in steps of 0.1
Diluent 0 µL : 1.0 to 25.0 µL µL
10 µL : 1.0 to 20.0 µL Select the diluent from the drop-
down list.
Pre-Dilution Rate 1 to 100 (refer to the drop-down
list)
6. Setting the “Repeat Decision Range”

Repeat Decision Low: -9999999 to 9999999 Input required
Range Repeat Decision Range: Low
value to 9999999
When this range is exceeded, all “Deciding Tests” and “Related Tests” set in “Repeat
Common: Group Tab” screen become objects for repeat run.
7. Setting the “Reflex Range”

Reflex Range Low: -9999999 to 9999999 Input required
Repeat Decision Range: Low
value to 9999999
When this range is exceeded, only the “Related Tests” set in the “Repeat Common: Group
Tab” screen become objects for repeat run.
8. When dynamic range check is to be executed, select the check box “Dynamic
Range Check”.
• This sets to decide whether items of the dynamic range error are subject to the repeat run
extraction.
TIP
• When the test data drop below the Low value, repeat with condense is recommended, and
when they exceed the High value, repeat with diluent is recommended. The repeat run
method can be changed on the “Repeat Specific” screen after the analysis results have
been seen.


4.7 Set Calibration Analysis
Before the start of analysis, calibration analysis is performed to obtain calibration curves
for each analysis item from concentrations obtained from the absorbance of the mixture
fluid. A sample with a known concentration, used for calibration analysis, is called a
calibrator. In this chapter, calibrators are registered and the parameters for calibration
analysis are set.
4.7.1 Calibrator Registration. See page 4-48.

4.7.2 Set the Specific Calibration Parameters. See page 4-51.
4.7.3 Set Calibration using the STAT Table. See page 4-55.
Calibration analysis can be performed using yellow racks or using the STAT table.
When a barcode label is attached to a calibrator, the calibrator can be set to any
position on a yellow rack or on the STAT table.
Incorrect calibration parameters for analysis testing will cause erroneous analysis
results, and can lead to misdiagnosis. Specific test calibration parameter settings
CAUTION should be confirmed through visual verification against the published settings, as well
as through analysis using materials with known concentrations.
• For details on display a list of set values, refer to “List Display” on page 4-53 of “4.7.2 Set
the Specific Calibration Parameters“.
• For details on print a list of set values, refer to “7.8 Print the Set Contents” on page 7-31.

4.7.1 Calibrator Registration
Register calibrators to be used with general tests and with ISE.
Calibrator registration and editing

1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>Parameters>Calibration
Parameters>Calibrators to display the “Calibrator Parameters: Calibrators”
screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).

3. When the calibrator is identified by a barcode, select the check box “Barcode
Operation”.
4. Enter the information for the calibrator to be used according to the sample type.
When “Barcode Operation” is not selected, the setting position on the yellow rack is
decided by the input order.

Name Up to 20 characters
ID Up to 26 characters Alphanumerics, only at the time of
barcode use
Lot No. Up to 16 characters Alphanumeric
Expiration Date: YYYY/MM/DD

5. When samples for reagent blanks are used, enter the “RB Sample Information”.

ID Up to 26 characters Alphanumerics, only at the time of
barcode use
Serum, Urine, Other-1, Enter a check for the sample type
Other-2, Whole Blood for which this reagent blank
sample is to be used.
The cup for the regent blank can be set for each sample type.
TIP When No.1 is selected, set the cap on the first cap pos of the blue rack.
When No.2 is selected, set the cap on the second cap pos of the blue rack.


Change of the calibrator concentration value
When using the multi-calibrator, the concentration value of each item can be set all
together. The calibrator concentration value is entered on the “Specific Test
Parameters” screen, but the concentration value of a registered calibrator can be
changed from the “Calibrators” screen.
When this function is used to change the calibrator concentration value without going to
the “Specific Test Parameters” screen (especially multi-point calibration curves etc.),
CAUTION always confirm the concentration values for errors in the “Specific Test Parameters”
screen.
For details on specific test parameters, refer to “4.5 Setting Specific Test Parameters” on
page 4-28.

Parameters>Calibrators to display the “Calibrator Parameters: Calibrators”
screen.
2. Touch Set Conc Value (F5).
This brings up the “Set Conc Value” window.
3. Select the calibrator for which the concentration value is to be changed from the
drop-down list of “Calibrator”.
The analysis items using the selected calibrator and the concentration values of their
calibration curves are displayed.
4. Change the concentration values of the analysis items subject to change.

5. In case of a multi-point calibration curve, select the calibrator for a different point
and repeat changing.
6. Touch Close to close the “Set Conc Value” window.
The confirmation message for concentration change is displayed.
7. Touch OK to close the confirmation message.


4.7.2 Set the Specific Calibration Parameters
The calibrator to be used, the concentration values, and other calibration parameters
are set for each analysis test.
Set the Specific Calibration Parameters.

Parameters>Calibration Specific>General to display the “Calibrator: General tab”
screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).

3. Select the test from the drop-down list of “Test Name”.

When select check box “Use Serum Cal.” serum is to be used for calibration of a test
with a sample type other than “Serum” or “Whole Blood”.
TIP
5. Select the calibration curve type from the drop-down list of “Calibration Type”.
“Calibrator Parameters” and other related input columns may change depending on the
type of calibration curve.

6. Select the formula approximating the calibration curve from the drop-down list of
“Formula”.
7. Select the execution number from the drop-down list of “Counts”.
It is possible to perform the same calibration analysis a maximum of four times and to
decide the calibration curve from multiple results.
8. Select the calibrator to be used from the drop-down list “Calibrator” of “Calibrator
Parameters” or “Point Cal. for Master Curve”.
9. Enter the required OD value, concentration value, and range (OD or factor).
For the respective values, refer to the parameter sheet supplied with the reagent etc.

OD From -2.0000 to 3.0000
Conc From -9999999 to 9999999 Max. 9 characters, including
decimal point and sign
Factor Range Different according to the Refer to the tool hints.
calibration type
10. Set the other calibration parameters according to the calibration curve type.

MB Type Factor From -9999999 to 9999999 When the calibration curve is MB
1-point Calibration No setting or 1 to 7 When the calibration curve is 2AB
Point to 7AB
With Conc-0 Yes, No When the calibration curve is 2AB
to 7AB
11. Select slope check execution or no execution for the calibration curve from the
drop-down list of “Slope Check” and select the slope in case of checking.
12. When the calibration curve is AA, AB to 7AB, or 4MC to 10MC, and OD delta
check is to be performed for reagent blank and calibration, select the respective
check box and enter the OD delta check value.

Reagent Blank From -2.0000 to 3.0000
Calibration From -2.0000 to 3.0000

13. Make the settings for advance calibration.
Calibration of multiple bottles of the same reagent set in the reagent refrigerator can be
performed together in advance. This is called advance calibration. Use only with the
TIP
specific reagent that Olympus provide. For detailed information, contact your local
technical support organization.

Operation Yes, No
Interval (RB/ACAL) Bottle/Bottle:
Execution of reagent blank and
calibration for all bottles.
Bottle/Lot:
Execution of reagent blank for all
bottles and perform a calibration
once per lot of reagent loaded on
the analyzer.
Lot/Lot:
Execute Reagent Blank and
Calibration only when a change in
lot number is read for that reagent.
Lot Calibration Check box
14. Set the calibration expiration in “Stability” as days and hours.

15. Confirm the input values and touch Confirm (F1).
List Display
When the calibration parameters have been set, the registered contents must be
confirmed.
1. Touch List Display (F7).
This brings up the “List Display” (test requisition) dialog.
2. Select the type and the tests for detailed display.

Max. 6 test requisitions can be selected.
3. Touch Display.
This brings up the “List Display” (set information display) dialog.
4. Touch Close.

Set the calibration parameters for ISE tests
The calibrator for ISE tests (Na, K, Cl), the concentration values, and other calibration
parameters are set.
Parameters>Calibration Specific>ISE to display the “Calibration Specific: ISE tab”
screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).

Setting becomes possible.
3. Select “Serum” or “Urine” from the drop-down list of “Type”.

4. Select “Calibration Type”, “Counts”, and “MCAL Factor Type” from the drop-down
list.
These three settings are common for the three ISE tests and cannot be set individually.
The other items which can be set differ according to the set values.

Calibration Type MCAL, ACAL Common for Na, K, and Cl
Counts From 1 to 4 Common for Na, K, and Cl
Only if “Calibration Type” is
“ACAL”, “Counts” can set.
MCAL Factor Type Manual, CRS Calibration. Common for Na, K, and Cl

5. Select the calibrator to be used from the drop-down list of “Calibrator”.
6. Enter the required concentration value and the factor range (Low/High).
For the respective values, refer to the parameter sheet supplied with the reagent etc.

Conc. -9999999 to 9999999 Set only when the calibration type
is ACAL.
Factor range (Low/ -9999999 to 9999999 Set only when the calibration type
High) is ACAL.
7. When the calibration type is ACAL and OD delta check is to be performed, select
“Yes” in the drop-down list of “Allowable Range Check”.
8. When the calibration type is ACAL and OD delta check is to be performed, set the
OD delta check value in “Allowable Range Check Value”.
4.7.3 Set Calibration using the STAT Table

During analysis, it is possible to set a calibrator on the STAT table and to perform
automatic calibration when the reagent bottle is changed etc.
The following conditions are required to perform calibration using the STAT table.
• Set all calibrators registered for analysis tests, for which calibration is to be
performed, on the STAT table.
• Set the reagent blank samples to be used for the sample type.
When barcode operation has been set on the “Calibration Parameters: calibrators”
screen, the calibrators set on the STAT table can be identified by barcode independent
of the setting position.
The inside of the STAT table is refrigerated, but it is not intended for long-term storage
of samples. Calibrators should be set on the STAT table only for the shortest time
CAUTION required.
For details on calibrator registration and barcode operation setting, refer to “4.7.1
Calibrator Registration” on page 4-48.

Register calibrators to be used for the STAT table.
Register the calibrators to be used for each group.
Parameters>STAT Table Calibration>Position to display the “STAT Table
Calibration: Position tab” screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).

3. Select the group to be edited from the drop-down list of “Group”.

4. Select the calibrator to be used from the drop-down list of “Calibrator”.
The display contents for the numbers on the left side of the column “Calibrator” differ
according to use or no use of barcodes.
Barcode operation Display Remarks

Available Position No. Fixed No. on the STAT table
Unavailable Number Sequentially from 1
5. Repeat step 4 for the number of set calibrators.


Edit the specific calibration parameters
Set the calibration method using the STAT table and when the calibration is performed
for each test.
Parameters>STAT Table Calibration>Calibration Specific to display the “STAT Table
Calibration: Calibration Specific tab” screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).



5. Set the calibration parameters when Yes is set in the column “Available/
Unavailable”.

Calibration Mode None: STAT calibration is not performed.
All points: Calibration is performed for all
points.
RB: Only reagent blank is performed.
Execution Type ACAL: Bottle No. change/RB: Bottle
No. change: Calibration is performed when
the bottle No. has changed.
ACAL: Lot No. change/RB: Lot No.
change: Calibration is performed when the
lot No. has changed.
ACAL: Lot No. change/RB: Bottle No.
change: Calibration is performed when the
lot No. has changed and reagent blank is
performed when the bottle No. has changed.


4.8 Configuring QC Analysis
Quality control (QC) samples are used to verify system performance and are an integral
part of any diagnostic device.
You should check the performance of the AU680 regularly by analyzing QC samples.
Each laboratory should establish its own control frequency. Good laboratory practice,
however, suggests QC samples be tested each time patient samples are tested and
each time calibration is performed. If any trends or sudden shifts in values are detected,
review all operating parameters.
QC analysis can be performed using green racks or using the STAT table. When a
barcode label is attached to a control, the control can be set to any position on a green
rack or on the STAT table.
Each laboratory should also establish guidelines to ensure corrective action if controls
do not recover within the specified limits.
Erroneous analysis data can lead to erroneous diagnosis results. Always perform QC
analysis at the same time as analysis of general patient samples to confirm that
CAUTION analysis is performed normally.
4.8.1 Requesting QC Analysis. See page 4-60.

4.8.2 Set the Specific Quality Control Parameters. See page 4-61.
4.8.3 Set Quality Control Using the STAT Table. See page 4-65.

4.8.1 Requesting QC Analysis
A QC requisition defines which QC samples the system is to analyze.
Edit Control
1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>Parameters>QC
Parameters>Controls to display the “QC Parameters: Controls” screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).

3. When the control is identified by a barcode, select the check box “Barcode
Operation”.
4. Enter the information for the control to be used according to the sample type.
When “Barcode Operation” is not selected, the setting position on the green rack is
decided by the input order.

ID Up to 26 characters Alphanumerics, only at the time of barcode use
Lot No. Up to 15 characters Alphanumeric
Expiration Date: YYYY/MM/DD
STAT Uses Enable Set whether control use with the STAT table is
Uneable possible or not.


4.8.2 Set the Specific Quality Control Parameters
Set the quality control method, the control to be used, the concentration value, and
other quality control parameters for each analysis test.
There are two quality control methods: single check using the mean value and the
standard deviation of the control and multiple check with multiple rule including the
tendencies of past results in the control.
The statistical values becoming the standard for each quality control can use the
keyboard to enter or can be calculated from past data.
For details on quality control, refer to “3.1.5 Quality Control” on page 3-6.
Set the Specific Quality Control Parameters

1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>Parameters>QC Parameters>QC
Specific>Check to display the “QC Specific: Check tab” screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).


4. Check each test of “Single Check Level” and “Multi Check Level” according to the
quality control to be performed.

5. Select the reference value to be used from “QC Mode”.

Off Checking only with the quality control data.
Preset Direct input of the reference value.
Cumulative The reference value is calculated from the
past cumulative data.

Reference value (preset) editing

This is the method for using the keyboard to enter of the reference values for quality
control.
Specific>Preset to display the “QC Specific: Preset tab” screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).


“Whole Blood”.

5. Select the control to be edited from the drop-down list of “Control”.
6. Select the quality control method to be used (single check or multiple check) from
the drop-down list of “Multi/Single”.
7. Enter the mean value, the standard deviation, and the range reference value.
8. When reference to past QC data is desired, touch QC Stack Review (F7).
The “QC Stack Review” dialog is displayed and the max. value and the min. value for the
last 10 QC data are displayed.
9. Touch Close to close the “QC Stack Review” dialog.

When calculated test items, HbA1c, etc. have been selected for Test Name, only
controls common for all analysis tests can be selected and edited.
TIP

Reference value (cumulative value) editing
This is the method for setting the reference value for quality control by automatic
calculation from past data.
Specific>Cumulative to display the “QC Specific: Cumulative tab” screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).


“Whole Blood”.
5. Select the control to be edited from the drop-down list of “Control”.

6. Select the quality control method to be used (single check or multiple check) from
the drop-down list of “Multi/Single”.

7. Touch Adds to Cumulative (F5) or New Cumulative (F6).
Adds to Cumulative (F5) brings up the “Adds to Cumulative” dialog.
New Cumulative (F6) brings up the “New Cumulative” dialog.
8. Select the index date from the drop-down list of “Start Index” and “End Index” and
set the period for the reference value calculation data.
9. Touch OK and close the reference value calculation dialog.
The calculated reference value is displayed on the screen. The period of the data used for
calculation is displayed in “Period Cumulative”.

When calculated test items, HbA1c, etc. have been selected for Test Name, only
controls common for all analysis tests can be selected and edited.
TIP
4.8.3 Set Quality Control Using the STAT Table

During analysis, it is possible to set controls to the STAT table and to perform QC
analysis automatically at specified intervals.
When barcode operation has been set on the “QC Parameters: Controls” screen, the
controls set to the STAT table can be identified by barcode independent of the setting
position.
The inside of the STAT table is refrigerated, but it is not intended for long-term storage
of samples. Controls should be set to the STAT table only for the shortest time required.
CAUTION
For details on barcode operation setting, refer to “4.8.1 Requesting QC Analysis” on page 4-
60.

Registration of controls to be used with the STAT table
The controls to be used are registered by groups.
1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>Parameter>QC Parameters>Stat
Table QC>Position to display the “STAT Table QC: Position tab” screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).


4. Select the control to be used from the drop-down list of “Control”.
The display contents for the numbers on the left side of the column “Control” differ
according to use or no use of barcodes.
Barcode operation Display Remarks

Available Position No. Fixed No. on the STAT table
Unavailable Number Sequentially from 1
5. Repeat step 4 for the number of set controls.

6. Confirm the input values and touch Confirm(F1).

Editing of quality control performed at the STAT table
Set the interval for performing quality control for each test.
1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>Parameters>QC Parameters>STAT
Table QC>QC Specific to display the “STAT Table QC: QC Specific tab” screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).


5. Select the unit for the interval at which QC analysis is to be performed from the
drop-down list of “Cyclic Type”.
Setting item Display Remarks

None QC analysis is not performed during
analysis.
Test Judgment is made by the test number of the
respective analysis test.
Sample Judgment is made by the number of
samples.
6. Set the interval (count) for performing QC analysis from the drop-down list of
“Count”.

7. Select “Yes” from the drop-down list of “Execute after Calibration” when QC
analysis is to be performed after calibration (reagent blank or ACAL analysis) is
performed.

4.9 Setting the Tests to be Checked
It is possible to obtain a value with optional calculation expressions using multiple
analysis items and to check if this value is within a range set in advance. If the check
result is outside the range, an error flag (flag) is added to the analysis result.
For each sample type, a maximum of 10 types of calculation expressions can be set.
Values from the patient information can also be used for the calculation expressions.
Setting the Tests to be Checked

Set the operation expression for the tests to be checked.
1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>Parameters>Misc.>Checked Tests to
display the “Misc.: Checked Tests” screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).

3. Select the name of the test to be checked from the drop-down list of “Checked
Tests Name” or enter a new test name to be checked.
4. Select the sample type from the drop-down list of “Type”.
5. Select the check box of “Check Name” to make test checking effective.
Input is possible for each item.
6. Select the analysis items to be used in the calculation from the drop-down lists A
to E of “Test Name”.

7. Select the type of constant from the drop-down list of “a” to “d” of “Constant
Type”.
Option Explanation
No setting This constant is not used.
Value A value is set.
Patient information 1 to 6 When the patient information is a value, selection is
possible.
8. When “Value” has been selected, any value within nine characters (including sign
and decimal point) can be entered for “Constant”.
9. Enter any calculation expression for “Formula”.
Usable characters: +, -, *, /, (, ), A, B, C, D, E, a, b, c, d (within 20 characters)
10. Enter the upper limit value and the lower limit value into “Check Range”.
Enter within 9 characters, including sign and decimal point.

Changing the decimal places for the test check range

1. Touch Set Decimal Places (F4) on the edit screen of the “Checked Tests”
screen.
This brings up the “Set Decimal Places” dialog.
2. Select the number of decimal places from the drop-down list.

3. Touch OK.
The dialog box is closed and the check range value is changed.


4.10 Preventing Contamination
This system is provided with sufficient washing capability, but mutual contamination
may be caused in case of sample types with a high degree of influence or analysis
items with high sensitivity. The washing conditions etc. can be set to prevent such
contamination.
When contamination prevention conditions are set, the analysis processing speed may
decrease in some cases. Perform setting after consulting the reagent manufacturer, the
CAUTION sales agent, etc.
4.10.1 Preventing Contamination between Items. See page 4-72.

4.10.2 Preventing Contamination between Sample Types. See page 4-74.
4.10.3 Setting the Contamination Prevention Conditions by Analysis Items. See
page 4-75.

4.10.1 Preventing Contamination between Items
Set the combination of easily influenced items and the contamination prevention
conditions.
1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>Parameters>Misc.>Contamination
Parameters>Contamination prevention to display the “Contamination Parameters:
Contamination prevention tab” screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).

3. Select the influencing analysis item from the drop-down list of “Preceding Test
Name”.
4. Select the influenced analysis item from the drop-down list of “Following Test
Name”.
5. Select the washing fluid from the drop-down list of “Reagent Probe Cleaner
Kind”.
Option Explanation
Water Washing method using deionized water in the same way as the normal
method.
CLN-1 The washing fluid set to “Detergent-1” is aspirated and used for
washing.
CLN-2 The washing fluid set to “Detergent-2” is aspirated and used for
washing.

6. Select the wash count from the drop-down list of “Wash Count”.
The max. count which can be set is 5.
7. Select one of the following from the drop-down list of “Effective of water
cleaning”.
Option Explanation
Yes This option considers that no contamination exists when reagent other
than the preceding test, detergents or water is dispensed more than
the count specified at “Wash Count” before dispensing the following
test.
No In this option, the system dispenses the following test only after
dispensing the specified washing fluid as count as that at “Wash
Count”, even when reagent other than the preceding test, detergents
or water is dispensed more than the count specified at “Wash Count”.
8. Select whether the mixing bar and the cuvette used for the preceding test name
are to be used or not from the drop-down list of “Same use”.
Option Explanation
Yes The ones used for the preceding test name are not used.
No The ones used for the preceding test name are also used.

An example below shows difference between when “Effective of water cleaning” is set
to “Yes” and when set to “Not effective”.
TIP
Settings other than “No” are:
• Preceding Test Name: A
• Following Test Name: B
• Reagent Probe Cleaner Kind: CLN-1 or CLN-2
• Wash Count: 5
In these settings, test sequence of two samples that require seven test items, A, B, C,
D, E, F and G is as following. In this sequence, “w” is a cycle of cleaner washing.
• Effective of water cleaning is “Yes”:
First sample: B, A, C, D, E, F, G
Second sample: B, A, C, D, E, F, G
• Effective of water cleaning is “No”:
First sample: B, A, C, D, E, F, G
Second sample: A, C, D, E, F, G, w, w, w, w, w, B
This is one example, and test sequence possibly changes depending on the settings.

4.10.2 Preventing Contamination between Sample Types
The sample probe washing method at the time of change of the sample type can be set.
Parameters>Carry-over Prevention (Type Changes) to display the “Contamination
Parameters: Carry-over Prevention. (Type Changes) tab” screen.
A list of sample type combinations and washing methods is displayed.
2. Touch Edit (F1).

3. Select the wash count for the sample probe from the drop-down list for each
washing fluid of “Wash Count”.
Option Explanation
Detergent-1 The washing fluid set to “Detergent-1” is aspirated and used for
washing.
Detergent-2 The washing fluid set to “Detergent-2” is aspirated and used for
washing.
Water Washing method using deionized water in the same way as the normal
method.


4.10.3 Setting the Contamination Prevention Conditions
by Analysis Items
The sample probe washing conditions before and after analysis are set for any analysis
item.
Parameters>Carry-over Prevention (Test) to display the “Contamination
Parameters: Carry-over Prevention. (Test) tab” screen.
All analysis items and their sample probe washing conditions are displayed.
2. Touch Edit (F1).

3. Select the sample probe wash count from the drop-down list for each washing
fluid of “Pre-Dispense Wash Count” and “Post-Dispense Wash Count” for the
respective analysis item.


4.11 Setting up Data Lists
4.11.1 Set the Basic Condition for Print. See page 4-76.
The print format for reports, inspection ledgers, etc. is set.

This system has three types of basic print format layouts (list types), and they are used
with change of the details. Also, when the real-time print format is set, analysis data are
printed automatically during analysis.
Printer is an option.
4.11.1 Set the Basic Condition for Print

Select the list format adding the list name and set the basic condition.
Edit the list

1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>System>Format>List Format>Basic
Condition and display the “List Format: Basic Condition tab” screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).


3. For editing of already created lists, select the list to be edited from the drop-down
list of “List Name”.
The list format is displayed on the right side.
4. For new creation of a list, directly enter the new list name into “List Name”.
5. For new creation of a list, select the list format from the drop-down list of “Data
Format”.
The corresponding “Layout” tab becomes effective. When the layout tab which has
become effective is touched, the layout can be confirmed.
6. Select or enter the required setting items.

7. Touch Print Information to display the “List Format: Print Information tab”
screen.
8. Select the information to be printed in the list.
9. Touch Test Item to display the “List Format: Test Item tab” screen.
10. Select the test items to be printed by touching them in the list of test items.
The selection can be cancelled by touching again.
11. Touch Layout which has become valid to display the layout.
12. Specify or move the information to be printed and arrange the layout.
For details on layout editing method, refer to “Layout editing” on page 4-80.
13. Touch Image (F8).

The image of set list is displayed.
14. Confirm the settings and touch Close to end the image display.
15. Repeat layout correction as required.

Set the format for real-time printing
When this format is set, real-time printing is performed automatically during analysis.
As the print format is selected from created print formats, format setting is required in
advance.
Condition to display the “List Format: Basic Condition tab” screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).

3. Touch Realtime List (F5).

This brings up the “Realtime List” dialog.
4. Select the print format from the drop-down lists of “Patient”, “Calibration”,
“Reagent Blank”, and “QC”.
5. Touch OK.
The “Realtime List” dialog is closed.


Store the format parameters as a template
The format parameters can be stored as a template. Test selection or input can be done
efficiently by displaying the format on the screen by “Basic Form” function.
2. Touch Edit (F1).

3. Touch File (F3).

This brings up the “File” dialog.
4. select the check box “Output File”.

5. Touch OK.
The format parameters are stored with the List Name specified on the screen.
Display format parameters set in advance

Format parameters set in advance can be displayed on the screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).

3. Touch Basic Form (F5).

This brings up the “Basic Form” dialog.
4. Select the template type (manufacturer form or created form).

5. Select the list name from the drop-down list of “List Name”.
6. Touch OK.
The format parameters are displayed on the screen.

Layout editing
1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>System>Format>List
Format>Layout to display the “List Format: Layout tab” screen.
2. Select the items to be printed from the drop-down list of “Print Items”.
Matching the item selected in step 1, information for “Page Header”, “Sample Information”,
“Line”, and “Comment” can be selected.
3. Enter the max. number of print digits for the printed item in “Print width”.
4. Touch Confirm.
The print item is displayed in the layout field and the screen enters print position
specification mode.
5. Specify the print position.

The print position can be specified according to the following two methods.
• Specification of the layout field coordinates by “Start Position” and “End position”.
• Select an item in the layout field and use the following F-keys to move the print items.
Delete (F2): Deletion of the print position of the specified print item.
Left (F3): Movement of the print position (digit) for the specified print item by one (scale
value) to the left.
Right (F4): Movement of the print position (digit) for the specified print item by one (scale
value) to the right.
Up (F5): Movement of the print position (line) for the specified print item up by one (scale
value).
Down (F6): Movement of the print position (line) for the specified print item down by one
(scale value).
6. Specify the sheet to be printed by “Sheet/Number” and “Character in Sheet”.

7. Touch Confirm.
The print position is set. Also, the screen changes to print item specification mode.
8. Repeat steps 1 to 6 for each item to be printed.


4.12 Setting the test requisition format
The operation in this section sets the parameters to be entered on the Demographics
tab screen of test requisition. The comments registered in the Comment Master
Demographics can be used. Set the Comment Master beforehand.
4.12.1 Setting the test requisition format. See page 4-81.
For details on comment master, refer to “7.6 Using Comment Master” on page 7-22.
4.12.1 Setting the test requisition format

1. From the AU860 “Home” screen select Menu>System>Format>Requisition Format
to display the “Requisition Format” screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).

3. Select the parameters such as sample ID, sex, age, etc. to be used.
4. When the sample ID is used, enter the “Digit” with 4 to 24.
5. When the patient information is used, select Enable. The Attribute and the
followings become editable.
6. Enter Title in 20 digits or less. This title is displayed on the “Demographics tab”
screen of test requisition.
7. Select Attribute (1 to 6) from the drop-down list of “Comment Master Selection”.
(This “Attribute” is an attribute assigned to each comment in the Comment
Master. Group of the comments set to the same attribute (1 to 6) is displayed in
the drop-down list of the “Demographics tab” screen of test requisition.)

8. To download the patient information via online, select attribute (numeric character
or alphabetical character) from the drop-down lists of “Attribute”, and enter Digits.
Maximum digit number is 20.
The title in step 6 above can be displayed on the table title (A and B in the figure below) on
“Sample Status” screen (Home > Sample Status).
A B
9. Select attribute (None, 1 to 6) from the drop-down list of Representation-1 and

Representation-2.
Settings of Representation-1 and -2
Representation-1 Other than None Other than None
Representation-2 None Other than None
Display of A and B in the settings above
A Sample No. (No change) Attribute title of Representation-1
B Attribute title of Representation-1 Attribute title of Representation-2

Settings are registered.

5
Preparing for Analysis
This chapter describes how you prepare the

system for use:
5.1 Preparing Samples for Analysis. See page 5-2.

5.2 Starting the System. See page 5-18.
5.3 Performing System Preparation. See page 5-27.
5.4 Performing Daily Maintenance. See page 5-32.
5.5 Calibrating Tests. See page 5-33.
5.6 Performing Quality Control (QC). See page 5-36.
5.7 Sample Requisitions: Entering Data and Choosing Tests. See
page 5-40.
AU680 User Guide Version4.0 5. Preparing for Analysis 5-1

5.1 Preparing Samples for Analysis
This section explains following:
5.1.1 Attaching barcode labels to Sample Racks. See page 5-3.
5.1.2 Sample Barcode Specifications. See page 5-4.
5.1.3 Sample cup preparation. See page 5-7.
5.1.4 Applying Barcode Labels to Sample Cups. See page 5-9.
5.1.5 Sample Preparation. See page 5-10.
5.1.6 Placing the Sample Cups/Tubes in the Rack. See page 5-11.
5.1.7 Placing Racks on the Feeder. See page 5-16.
Before starting analysis, place samples in the sample cups and place them in the
correct racks. The method of preparing samples and racks differs in each laboratory
and depends on local preferences.
White: Routine Patient analysis and automatic repeat runs
Yellow: Calibration analysis
Green: QC analysis
Orange: Manual (standard) repeat run analysis
Red: Emergency analysis
Blue: Reagent blank analysis
5-2 5. Preparing for Analysis AU680 User Guide Version4.0

5.1.1 Attaching barcode labels to Sample Racks
The system will not process a rack without a barcode ID. Attach barcode labels to
sample racks. (Units: mm)
1. Attach rack ID labels to the white, red, green, orange, yellow, and blue racks.
2. Attach the rack ID label to the front of the rack so that it is perfectly perpendicular.
Rack front
The label should not stick out 1±1
from the rack.
Rack ID label
(Stick the label on the rack in The label should not stick
parallel with the side face.) out from the rack.
The label should not stick

out from the rack.
The label should not stick
out from the rack.
+1
0 0 The label cannot be
placed on the protruding
part of the rack.
Orient the label so the numbers
are located to the left if viewed
from the front. Rack side
Protruding part of the rack

5.1.2 Sample Barcode Specifications
You can perform analysis using a barcode as the sample ID. These are the
specifications of the barcodes used to identify AU680 samples.
• Barcode type. See page 5-4.
• Character types. See page 5-4.
• Barcode digits. See page 5-4.
• Label dimensions. See page 5-5.
• Bar Dimensions. See page 5-5.
• Check character. See page 5-6.
• label Quality. See page 5-6.
Barcode type
The sample barcode types are shown below.
• NW-7
• CODE 39
• CODE 128, ISBT-CODE 128
• I 2 of 5, S 2 of 5
Except for the ISBT-CODE 128, mixed reading of multiple codes is possible.
The barcode specifications conform to the following standards.
Barcode Observed standard

NW-7 JIS-X-0506, USS-NW7
I 2 of 5 JIS-X-0502, USS-I2/5
CODE 39 JIS-X-0503, USS-CODE 39
CODE 128 JIS-X-0504, USS-CODE 128
ISBT 128 ISBT 128
Character types
Barcode Character types

NW-7 0 to 9
CODE39 Alphanumeric characters, special symbols
CODE128 Alphanumeric characters, special symbols
ISBT-CODE128 Alphanumeric characters, special symbols
I2 of 5 0 to 9
S 2 of 5 0 to 9
Barcode digits
Max. 26 digits

Label dimensions
The sample labels should have the following dimensions. (Units: mm)
• Label length (A) < Test tube length - (5 + Y)
Y = 36 or
*7: Part hidden by rack insertion, or,
5: Upper and lower margin at the time of label attachment
(Numbers marked with an asterisk (*) are for use of a rack.)
• Label width (B): Not regulated. However, the bars shall not be covered by wrapping
around the test tube.
• Barcode height (D) >= 10mm
• Right/left margin (M) = Shown below
Other than CODE 128: 3 or more
CODE 128: 10 times the X dimension or 2.54, whichever is larger, or more (quiet zone)
• Barcode part (C) = A - 2 x M
D B
C
M M
Bar Dimensions
The bar space width is as shown below.
NB NS WB WS G X
(Narrow bar) (Narrow space) (Thick bar) (Wide space) (Gap) (Dimension)*
Minimum 0.165 to 0.2 mm NB to 1.25 NB 2.2 to 3.0 NB 2.2 to 3.0 NB NB to 3.0 NB 0.191 and up
Maximum 0.2 to 0.5 mm 2.0 to 3.0 NB 2.0 to 3.0 NB NB to 3.0 NB
*: In case of CODE128

Check character
One of the following three methods can be used as a check:
• Using the check methods of the following table.
• Not using check characters.
• Check characters are included, but no checking is done.
Barcode Check character method

NW-7 Last digit, MODULUS-16
CODE39 Last digit, MODULUS-43
CODE128 Last digit, MODULUS-103
ISBT-CODE128
I2 of 5, S 2 of 5 Last digit, MODULUS-10
Check character is required for CODE128 and ISBT-CODE128.

These barcode cannot select neither method 2 nor 3 in the above check character
method.
label Quality
Barcode label should be printed according to the following standard to maintain reading
accuracy.
• PCS value
When NB (narrow bar) is 0.165 to 0.50 mm: A PCS value of 0.60 or more is required.
When NB (narrow bar) is 0.130 to 0.156 mm: A PCS value of 0.85 or more is
required.
PCS value = (RL – R0) / RL
RL: Reflectance of white bars and margins
R0: Reflectance of black bars
• Reflection ratio of white bar and margin is 70% or more.

• There shall be no scratches, dropped patterns, blurring, voids (black points) or
blemishes with a diameter of 0.1 mm or more on a white bar.

5.1.3 Sample cup preparation
Use sample cups satisfying the following use conditions.
• Outer diameter: 11.5 to 16.0 mm
• Inner diameter: 9.0 to 15.0 mm
• Length: 55.0 to 102.0 mm
Even when the use conditions are satisfied, sample cups of the type Benoject II cannot
be used because of mutual interference of the lid parts of the sample cups.
When sample cups with barcode labels attached to the part inserted into the rack hole
are used, use sample cups where the outer diameter with attached barcode label is
16.0 mm or less at the upper part of the rack.
Barcode label
Top view
φ16.0mm or less
Sample cup (outside diameter including
the barcode label)
Rack
Barcode label
Rack top

• Use sample cups satisfying the use conditions for the rack where they are to be set.
When a sample cup not satisfying the use conditions is used, analysis may not be
CAUTION performed.
• The mechanically lowest point of the probe is matched to the sample cup with the highest
bottom. Accordingly, when a sample cup with a lower bottom position is used, sample
may not be aspirated or the dead volume may increase.
Also, it’s possible to set 5 different lowest points of probe when a sample gets aspirated
from a rack. When a sample cup with a lower bottom position than the set lowest position
is used, sample may not be aspirated or the dead volume may increase.
Sample probe
Most shallow
sample cup
Lower point of
the sample probe
Dead volume

5.1.4 Applying Barcode Labels to Sample Cups
Attach barcode labels to the outside of the sample.
To apply barcode labels:
1. Stick the barcode labels onto the outside of the sample cup so the end of each
label is at least 7 mm from the bottom of the cup.
2. Rub the label gently with your finger to ensure that it is firmly attached and will not
peel off.
The inclination angle must be 5° or less.
Sample cup
Barcode Label
Rack
7mm minimum
Barcode labels that are too long or too short might not be identified by the barcode.
Barcode labels must not protrude from the top of a sample cup. You must position the
CAUTION
label perpendicularly. The angle can vary by a maximum of 5°.

5.1.5 Sample Preparation
Ensure there is sufficient sample for analysis in addition to the dead volume. To display
the volume needed for the required tests, from the AU680 “Home” screen select
Menu>Routine>Test Requisition>Sample>Test Requisition. The sample volume required
for requisitioned tests is displayed at the bottom right hand side, however this does not
include the dead volume.
The minimum dead volume required for sample detection varies depending on the
sample cup/tube.
If the serum or plasma level is too low, transfer the serum or plasma to a smaller sample
cup, to avoid blood cells being aspirated.
Pay attention to the following items. The analysis results can be influenced and system
trouble may occur.
• Except for whole blood, the sample should not contain fibrous material or fibrin.
• Take care that there are no air bubbles in the sample.
• Dispense samples as the quantity required for analysis plus the dead volume.
• HITACHI cup: Required volume + 50 µL or more
• φ12.3 mm tube: Required volume + 200 µL or more
• HITACHI-micro cup (STAT only): Required volume + 30 µL or more
• Nested cup* (Rack only): Required volume + 180 µL or more
*Nested cup use only HITACHI cup.
The above necessary sample amount includes remainder (5 mL) for each test item in
addition to the sample amount necessary for analysis.
When analyzing 20 tests/sample or more, set the required sample amount + 200 µL
(provisional) to suppress dilution by sample probe wash water.
When containers used for centrifuging are set as they are on to this system as samples
and analysis is performed, check that a quantity of serum sufficient for analysis and the
dead volume required for sample detection are present. The dead volume required for
sample detection is 4 mm down from the serum surface in the sample cup.
When the serum quantity is small, perform analysis after moving the sample to a
smaller sample cup.
When the serum quantity is small, blood cells below the serum may be aspirated and
defective dispensing etc. may occur.

5.1.6 Placing the Sample Cups/Tubes in the Rack
The following section provides information on the correct use of sample cups and tubes
on the AU680.
By conditions of rack ID labels may not be read correctly.

For rack ID labels, re-attach appropriate labels when the following is recognized.
CAUTION
• When bars of labels are cracked or damaged because of rubbing or scratching.
• When foreign objects (liquid, solid) cause dirt and blot.
• When labels are torn or peeled.
Setting Sample Cups into the Rack

The prepared sample cups are set into the rack as follows.
1. Place each sample in the correct rack.
Racks are color coded. Each color indicates a different mode of analysis. See “Setting the
Sample Order” on page 5-13.
2. Look at each opening in the rack and ensure the barcode is aligned in the center.
2 mm is the most each barcode should deviate from the center. If a barcode label
is not aligned with the opening in the rack, lift it out and replace it correctly.
The rack ID label is

Barcode label applied to this surface.
The rack ID label is

Sample cup
applied to this surface.
Rack
Direction that rack moves
+2mm
Center
-2mm
Barcode label
OK NG NG
3. Fit a rack adapter if required.

4. If using an adapter on the rack, ensure the openings allowing barcodes to be
scanned are aligned.
For details on replacing the rack ID labes, refer to “8.8.10 Replacing rack ID labels”
on page 8-94.
• Do not have different sample types on the same rack. When using sequential mode,
place the samples on the racks in strict numerical order and with no empty positions.
CAUTION Barcode and Rack ID modes permit spaces.
• Do not use Benoject-II type sample cups, because the caps of adjacent sample cups
interfere with each other. Use only cups with an outside diameter of ø16 mm or less in the
rack.
• Running the system in sequential mode (i.e. without reading sample barcode ID) is not
recommended. There is a possibility of sample/result mismatch. If you must run without
sample barcode ID, please ensure that you are aware of the risks involved. Contact your
local technical support organization for more information.
• Use only Olympus NE racks.
As the figure below, NE rack has a slit at its side for setting a sample cup.
TIP
Using Adapters on Sample Racks

Adapters hold thin sample cups (approximately 11.5 to 13.5 mm) firmly in place on the
racks. Thicker sample cups (approximately 13.6 to 16 mm) do not need an adapter.To
ensure a tube fits correctly place it into a rack with and without an adaptor and
determine which option holds the tube most securely.
To insert an adapter:
1. Align the adapter opening and the rack opening.
2. Insert the adapter guide into the guide groove of the rack.
3. Push the adapter into the rack until you hear a click.
4. Ensure the adapter has engaged the rack.
Adapter lock
Guide
Slit
Adapter
Rack window
Push in
Guide groove
Rack
Slit

To remove an adapter:
1. Push the adapter lock lightly with a finger from the outside of the rack window to
disengage the lock.
2. When the upper edge of the adapter comes out from the rack, pull it out the rest
of the way.
Adapter lock
Rack window
Push up lightly
with a finger
Setting the Sample Order

You must set samples in order according to their type.
Yellow rack
Set standard liquid with known concentration or standard serum in order of the
calibrator Nos. set as parameter.
The calibrator No. (1 to 200) corresponds to the rack ID of the yellow rack and the
sample position (1 to 10). For example, a yellow rack with the rack ID 1 has calibrator
Nos. and sample positions from 1 to 10, and a yellow rack with the rack ID 2 has
calibrator Nos. and sample positions from 11 to 20.

White rack
Set the sample cups following the analysis mode.
• In case of sequential analysis
Set in sample number order.
• In case of rack ID analysis
Sequentially set the samples with “1” as the ones digit of the sample number to the
rack. For example, these are the samples 1, 11, 21 in case of calculation as
“rack No. × 10 – 9”.
• Barcode analysis
Setting is possible in any order.
• For sequential analysis, set the sample cups in sample number order and without any
gaps to a white rack. When setting is done with gaps, the sample number set at the time
CAUTION of requisition and the sample number determined automatically from the setting position
on the white rack will not coincide and analysis will not be performed normally.
• In case of sequential analysis or rack ID analysis, set all sample cups with samples
registered by requisition for normal analysis.
For details on setting the analysis mode, refer to “4.1.1 Set the common conditions for rack
analysis and STAT analysis” on page 4-2.
Depending on the setting, serum and urine can be set on the same rack.
TIP
Blue rack
Set sample cups with deionized water to a blue rack. Setting of calibrator parameters
makes it possible to set what to install at the first and the second position.
For details on setting the setting positions for sample cups, refer to “4.7 Set Calibration
Analysis” on page 4-47.
Green rack
Set the control samples in order of the control Nos. set as parameter.
The control No. (1 to 100) corresponds to the rack ID of the green rack and the sample
position (1 to 10). For example, a green rack with the rack ID 1 has control Nos. and
sample positions from 1 to 10, and a green rack with the rack ID 2 has control Nos. and
sample positions from 11 to 20.
For details on setting the setting positions for sample cups, refer to “4.8 Configuring QC
Orange rack
Set the sample cups to an orange rack in order of the repeat run analysis sample Nos.
according to the contents of the repeat run analysis work list. Set the sample cups
without gaps from the first position of the orange rack.

Red rack
There are no special restrictions for the setting sequence and the positions of sample
cups. Sample Nos. for emergency samples are assigned automatically in setting order.
For example, when analysis is performed with sample cups set to positions 1, 3, and 5
of the rack, the sample Nos. E001, E002, and E003 are assigned in this order.
When red racks are used for sequential analysis, use a work sheet etc. to confirm that
the measuring data correspond to the set samples.
CAUTION
Rack preparation
Prepare racks for setting the sample cups.
There are six rack types for the various applications, and the racks have different colors.
There are two types of special trays for rack setting, for 5 racks and for 10 racks.
Rack types
The racks have different colors according to the application. This system identifies the rack
type from the combination of magnets set into the rack bottom. The rack colors, applications,
and magnet combinations are shown below.
Color Rack application Magnet

White For general patient sample analysis. Entirely white ←
racks are used for analysis of general patient samples.
Depending on the setting, use is also possible for
calibration analysis and for QC analysis.
Blue For reagent blank analysis. Used for calculation of ←
reagent blanks for creation of calibration curves.
Yellow Used for calibration for automatic calibration curve ←
setting (ACAL). Used for creation of calibration curves.
ACAL automatically sets calibration curves from
standard serum or standard fluid.
Green For QC analysis. Used for analysis of QC samples. ←
Orange For repeat run analysis. The methods for repeat run ←
analysis with this system are a method using a STAT
table and a method using orange racks. When many
repeat run samples are to be analyzed at the same
time, orange racks are used.
Red For emergency sample analysis. The methods for ←
emergency analysis with this system are a method
using a STAT table and a method using red racks.
When many emergency samples are to be analyzed at
the same time, red racks are used.
←: Rack advance direction : Magnet present

5.1.7 Placing Racks on the Feeder
You can place up to 15 racks on the feeder. When the cover of the rack feeder is
opened, the operation of the rack feeder stops. Close the cover of the rack feeder
immediately when racks are set. If the rack feeder keeps to be opened the cover, the
racks are not provided from the rack feeder.
Never look directly into the barcode readers. They use a LED that can seriously
damage your eyes.
CAUTION
To set racks on the feeder:

1. Open the sample protective cover on the rack supply unit.
2. Set the prepared racks on the rack supply unit Figure.
Surface where the rack ID label is applied
Sample
protection cover
Rack
Rack supply unit
Top view of the rack feeder
CAUTION Rack identification sensor (white board)
A A
Up to 15
Rack setting position
Place a rack more right position than the figure shows. The rack feeder does not
operate properly when it is placed on the position A.

3. Arrange the racks in color order.
Set in order of smallest calibrator No.

Set the sample cup with
distilled water at the front. Set in order of
(In case of Serum) smallest control No. Set in any order
Direction that
racks move
Blue Yellow Green White White Red

rack rack rack rack rack rack
White rack
In case of sequential analysis, set in sample number order to the rack.
In case of rack ID analysis or barcode ID analysis, the setting order is free.
Yellow rack
Set to a yellow rack in increasing order of the calibrator No. set by parameter.
When several yellow racks are required for creation of calibration curves, set the yellow
racks one after the other.
Green rack
When several green racks are required for QC, set the green racks one after the other
consecutively in numerical order.

5.2 Starting the System
This section describes the first steps in starting the AU680.
5.2.1 Switching on the System.. See page 5-18.
5.2.2 Logging into the System. See page 5-19.
5.2.3 Setting the Start Condition. See page 5-20.
5.2.4 Creating New Index. See page 5-21.
5.2.5 Preparing for ISE (Option). See page 5-22.
5.2.1 Switching on the System.

There are two power switches on this system:
• The main power switch, which is a single entry point for current to the whole system.
This is located on the back of the system. Before you use the system for the first time,
you must turn this on and then leave it on permanently while the system is in use.
• The ON button is located on the front of the system. This button controls power to the
computer system and analyzer.
Switching on the System

1. Open the main valve for supply of deionized water.
2. Perform maintenance inspections.
For details on maintenance inspections performed before power on, refer to “5.4
Performing Daily Maintenance” on page 5-32.
3. Press the ON button to switch on the power.

Warm up and initialization start. Until switching to the standby mode, completion requires a
maximum of approximately 20 minutes.
When turning off the power supply with the EMSTOP button, it takes 105 minutes to
switch.
4. Perform maintenance inspections.

For details on maintenance inspections performed after power on, refer to “5.4 Performing
Daily Maintenance” on page 5-32.

5.2.2 Logging into the System
The system can be set up with a security system that allows access to different parts of
the system according to preset levels. Once established, you must have a user name
and password, from the system administrator, before you can log in. Keep your
password secret. Menus that you do not have access to are greyed out. When you start
the system, the login box appears automatically.
For details on system use authority setting, refer to “7.2 Setting User Login” on page 7-4.
Login requires the following operation.
Ask the system administrator to register a user name and a password.

The system cannot be used without a user name and a password.
CAUTION
For security reasons, use of the same user name and corresponding password by
several users should be avoided.
1. Enter the “User Name”.

2. Enter the “Password”.
3. Touch OK.
This brings up the “Index Creation” dialog.
4. Enter a new index as needed.

See “5.2.4 Creating New Index” on page 5-21.
5. Touch OK.
This brings up the “Home” screen.

5.2.3 Setting the Start Condition
When you start the AU680, open the “Start Condition” screen and enter information
about the tests you are about to run, including:
• Data index: this is a date and time used to label a set of test data. See “5.2.4 Creating
New Index” on page 5-21.
• Group number: this indicates which group you are going to use. A group is a
preselected set of tests. When you choose a group, you make only those tests
available for use. See “4.4.3 Adding the New Test to a Group” on page 4-25.
• Operator name.
• Start numbers of the samples to be tested, including “serum”, “urine”, “others-1”,
“others-2” and “whole blood”.
The system displays a default start condition when you switch the system on. If you
want to keep these settings, touch Exit (F2). The “Start Condition” screen must be
closed before analysis can be started.
To change the start condition data after startup:
1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>Routine>Start Condition to display
the screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1) on the “Start Condition” screen.

3. Enter your new starting data as required.
4. Touch Confirm (F1) to save these settings.

5.2.4 Creating New Index
In order to make storage and retrieval of this data easier, the system is able to
bookmark the data using a date and time index. it is recommended that you create a
new index regularly (usually daily).
Setting system date and time at the time of analysis

the “Start Condition” screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).
The screen for setting the start conditions is displayed.
3. Touch New Index.

System date and time are set automatically as index date and time.

This brings up the “Confirmation” dialog.
5. Touch OK.
Date and time set by the user

2. Touch Edit (F1).
The screen for setting the start conditions is displayed.
3. Touch Index Date and Time (F8).

This brings up the “Index Date and Time” dialog.
4. Set the date and the time from the drop-down list.
5. Touch OK.
7. Touch OK.

5.2.5 Preparing for ISE (Option)
When using the ISE unit (option), it is necessary to prepare the standard solution for
ISE or the control serum. Use RESET button to turn power on for ISE drive, such as
rolling pump unit. Use ON (sub-power) button to turn power on for ISE data processing
unit.
Commercial Control Serum for the ISE (option)

When using the commercial control serum for the ISE, be sure to exercise great care for
the following points.
• Commercial control serum contains additives for regulating the density of
components, as well as various preservatives. If these kinds of control serums are
measured using an ion-selective electrode, the added materials may adversely affect
the electrode, and could cause measurement errors including abnormal data.
• The commercial control serums that Olympus recommends are listed below.
Changes in added components (especially preservatives) are likely in the future.
Recommended Control Serums
Control serum Manufacturer

AU control level 1 Olympus
AU control level 2 Olympus
The following items affect the measurements:

• Errors may occur in normal samples depending on the dosage.
CAUTION
• The K and Cl electrodes are not affected by bilirubin, but small positive errors will occur in
the Na electrode.
• Positive errors will occur in the Cl electrode due to other halogen ions (Br, I).
• A positive error will be recognized in the K electrode for samples where the hematocrit
value is 65% or more. If a hemolytic sample is used, K shows an excessively positive
error.
• The measurements are not affected by ascorbic acid or lipemic (lipid emulsion additives).
• Use the anticoagulant heparin Li or heparin Na. Any other anticoagulants may cause an
error in measured values. Use the anticoagulant immediately after collecting blood.
• In order to prevent fluctuations due to the sample evaporation, blood serum and plasma
samples should be kept in a tightly-closed refrigerator. Also, samples stored in a
refrigerator should be measured after the temperature of the sample has returned to room
temperature.
Starting the ISE (option)

When starting the ISE (option), perform following procedure “Starting the ISE (option)”
and “Performing ISE Calibration” in this order.
Starting the ISE (option)

1. Perform the procedure described in “5.2 Starting the System” on page 5-18.
2. Open the right front door of the analyzer.

3. Check that the liquid level of the solution in each of the following tanks is above
the reference line indicated 3 cm above the bottom of the tank.
• Buffer solution tank
• MID solution tank
• REF solution tank
An insufficient liquid alarm is generated when the level drops below the 3 cm line. Even
after alarm occurrence, about 180 samples can be dispensed in case of MID. solution,
about 600 samples in case of REF. solution, and about 240 samples in case of Buffer
solution.
ISE reagent dispenser
REF solution tank
MID solution tank
Buffer solution tank
For information about supplying the reagents, refer to “AU680 ISE User Guide”.
4. Inspect the ISE reagent dispenser to make sure that no reagent is leaking.
For information about inspecting the ISE reagent dispenser for leaks, refer to “AU680 ISE
User Guide”.
5. Close the right front door of the analyzer.

6. Open the STAT table cover (s).
7. Rotate the STAT table so that the positions of “S-H”, “S-L”, “U-H”, and “U-L” can
be accessed by pressing the TABLE ROTATION/DIAG button.
When setting the ISE standard solution on the STAT table, be careful not to mistake the
LOW and HIGH positions. If the solution is not set properly, appropriate analysis results
CAUTION will not be obtained.
8. Dispense the ISE standard solution for serum and urine in the supplied glass
sample cups and set them in the inner side holes of the STAT table.
For blood serum, standard solution “H” should be set in the hole “S-H” and
standard solution “L” should be set in hole “S-L”, and for urine, standard solution
“H” should be set in hole “U-H”, and standard solution “L” should be set in hole
“U-L”.
9. Close the STAT table cover (s).

Performing ISE Calibration
After analysis is started or if BUSY is displayed on the “ISE Maintenance: Calibration”

screen, do not add the standard solution. Do not place your hand on the trace of the
CAUTION sample probe.
The ISE calibration takes the following time to update the calibration data.
Serum only: 4 minutes approx.
Urine only: 4 minutes approx.
Serum and urine: 7 minutes approx.
1. Check that the main cover and ISE cover are completely closed.
2. From AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>Maintenance>User Maintenance>ISE
Maintenance>Calibration to display the “ISE Maintenance: Calibration tab” screen.
3. Touch Serum/Urine start. To analyze just the serum, touch Serum start, or to
analyze just the urine, select Urine start.
A dialog box to start the calibration process will be displayed.
4. Touch OK.
The ISE calibration process begins.
After processing has finished, the results are displayed in a list.

5. Check the calibration results to make sure there are no abnormal data.
After analysis is started or if BUSY is displayed on the “ISE Maintenance: Calibration”

screen, abnormal values are highlighted in yellow. Perform calibration again. If the
CAUTION slope value exceeds the range of the following upper and lower limits, or if the MID
solution correction factor falls outside the range of the following normal region, as the
result of calibration, check the ISE status to eliminate the cause of the anomaly, then
perform calibration again.
• Slope value
Lower limit Upper limit
Na, K 38.0 68.0
Cl -38.0 -68.0
• MID solution correction factor
Normal range
Na, K, Cl 0.800 to 1.200
For details on checking the ISE status, refer to “6.15 Confirming the ISE (option) status” on
page 6-65.

Performing ISE CRS Calibration
After analysis is started or if BUSY is displayed on the “ISE Maintenance: CRS

Calibration” screen, do not add the standard solution. Do not place your hand on the
CAUTION trace of the sample probe.
The ISE CRS calibration takes 6 minutes approx.
1. Check that the main cover and ISE cover are completely closed.
2. From AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>Maintenance>User Maintenance>ISE
Maintenance>CRS Calibration to display the “ISE Maintenance: CRS Calibration
tab” screen.
3. Touch Start.
A dialog box to start the CRS calibration process and to enter the value of standard
solution will be displayed.
4. Enter the standard solution value.

5. Touch OK.
The ISE CRS calibration process begins.
After processing has finished, the results are displayed in a list.
6. Check the CRS calibration results.

5.3 Performing System Preparation
Before selection of test items and preparation of samples, confirm the system status
according to the following procedures.
5.3.1 Confirm the analyzer status and the reagent. See page 5-27.
5.3.2 Checking the Printer (Option) and Paper. See page 5-31.
5.3.1 Confirm the analyzer status and the reagent

The “Analyzer Status” screen displays the reagent refrigerator temperature, the liquid
quantity in each tank, the rack status in the rack supply unit, etc.
When ISE (option) is installed, an outline of the ISE status is also displayed.
The remaining reagent quantity is displayed on the “Reagent Management” screen.
Confirmation of the “Analyzer Status” screen

Touch Analyzer Status on the “Home” screen.
The “Analyzer Status” screen is displayed.
For details on the “Analyzer Status” screen, refer to “Checking the Analyzer Status” on
page 6-4 of ”6.2 Monitoring Analysis”.

Reagent confirmation
1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>Routine>Reagent>Reagent
Management>Main to display the “Reagent Management: Main tab” screen.
2. Touch Reagent Check (F5).

This brings up the “Reagent Check” dialog.
3. Select “Check All Positions”.

4. Select “Read reagent ID”.
5. Touch Start.
Reagent check starts and “Checking” is displayed on the screen.
After check completion, “Reagent check completed” is displayed.

6. Confirm the reagent bottle setting status, the remaining reagent quantities, etc.
The background color for the columns “R1 Status” and “R2 Status” indicates an error
status such as “No remaining reagent”, “No bottle”, etc. for R1 and R2.
In case of red or yellow indication, confirm the “Reagent Management: Details” screen.
For details on the “Analyzer Status” screen, refer to “Checking the Analyzer Status”
on page 6-4 of ”6.2 Monitoring Analysis”.
7. In case of no remaining reagent, no bottle, etc., add a reagent bottle and repeat
the reagent check.
Reagent replacement
In the case where reagent volume is insufficient, remove the old reagent bottles and
replace with a new set. Never add new reagent to existing bottles.
Reagent preparation
Prepare reagent bottles with the reagents corresponding to the test items.
The following four types of reagent bottles can be used with this system.
• 120 mL reagent bottle
Procedure for setting reagent to the reagent refrigerator
• Condensation may form on the walls of the reagent compartment, the bottle neck or label
area. If condensation is present, remove it using a dry paper towel.
WARNING • If 15 mL bottles are used, ensure they are placed in the Reagent Tray with the barcode
facing out. Setting the bottles incorrectly may damage the bottle and reagent probe.
• Verify that no bubbles exist in the bottles placed in the Reagent Tray. Bubbles in the
reagent may adversely affect reagent volume measurement and volume aspiration.
• When setting 30 mL or 15 mL reagent bottles, a partition must also be used. If a partition

is not used, it will not be possible to secure the reagent bottle.When setting partition,
CAUTION make sure to insert properly in reagent tray.
• A width of two 60 mL reagent bottles is required to set a 120 mL reagent bottle in the
reagent refrigerator.
Reagent 1 refrigerator: Remove partition plate and set on the side of fixed partition plate.
Reagent 2 refrigerator: Remove partition plate
• When a 60 mL reagent bottle or a smaller one is to be set at a place where a 120 mL
reagent bottle had been set, a partition plate and, as required, a separator must be set.
• The adapter is common for the Reagent 1 refrigerator and the Reagent 2 refrigerator. Use
an original separator.

A maximum of 60 bottles can be set to the reagent 1 refrigerator, and a maximum of 48
bottles can be set to the reagent 2 refrigerator.
However, the possible number of bottles is reduced when setting 120 mL bottles.
1. Open the main cover.
2. Raise the reagent refrigerator lid and remove it.
Reagent refrigerator lid
Reagent bottle Reagent bottle

(15 mL) (30 mL)
Reagent bottle Reagent bottle
(60 mL) (120 mL)
Partition plate
Adaptor
3. Set reagent bottles.

4. Reinstall the reagent refrigerator lid.
6. Check the remaining reagent quantity.
When the barcode label on a reagent bottle is dirty or has moisture on it, barcode
reading errors may occur. In such a case, check the barcode label of the reagent bottle.
CAUTION When the barcode label is dirty or has moisture adhering to it, wipe it off.

Cautions for use of commercial reagent bottles
When using commercial reagent bottles, light-colored bottles may not be detected
properly by the sensor. In this case, apply the labels of the consumable to the reagent
CAUTION bottle as shown in the figure below.
If the labels have been used up, order new MU9879 labels.
When using commercial reagent bottles, the remaining reagent volume displayed on
the screen may differ from that actually remaining.
If stains or water bubbles are stuck to the barcode label on the reagent bottle, a
barcode read error may result. If this occurs, check the barcode label on the reagent
bottle and thoroughly remove the stains or water bubbles.
Reagent bottle
Label
5.3.2 Checking the Printer (Option) and Paper

If the printer (Option) printer paper has been consumed during analysis or if the power
to the printer (Option) is turned off, a printer error will result. While a printer error exists,
the data transferred to the printer (Option) will not be printed.
Procedure for Checking the Printer

Before starting analysis everyday, be sure to check that a sufficient amount of printer
paper is loaded, and that the printer (Option) power indicator and “Print-enable” LED
are lit.
1. Check that the printer power indicator is lit.
If the indicator is not lit, turn on the power to the printer (Option).
2. Check that the “Print-enable” LED is lit.

If the LED is not lit, press the “Print-enable” button.
If the “Print-enable” LED will not light by pressing the “Print-enable” button, a problem may
have occurred in the printer. After clearing the problem, press the “Print-enable” button
again.
3. Check that the printer paper is correctly loaded and a sufficient amount of paper
remains.
If the printer paper is not loaded correctly, reload it.

5.4 Performing Daily Maintenance
Periodic maintenance of the various system parts is required to maintain the intrinsic
performance of the system.
Perform the following maintenance inspection work daily to let the system keeps its
performance sufficiently and to use the system safely.
In addition to these, you should perform any procedures that are due in the Weekly
Maintenance, Maintenance Every Two Weeks, Monthly Maintenance, Maintenance
Every Three Months, Maintenance Performed Every Six Months and Maintenance
Performed Yearly or As Necessary sections.
The maintenance intervals assume analysis of approximately 600 samples per day.
Depending on the number of samples analyzed daily and the environment conditions,
the periodic maintenance intervals may be shortened for a system.
If ON (sub-power) is off, we recommend these maintenances are performed before
power is on.
• Check for any leak of sample dispenser, reagent dispenser, and wash water
dispenser
• Check for any leak from the detergent rolling pump unit
• Check the quantity of master detergent and supplying it
• Check for any leak of reagent dispenser for ISE (Option)
After the power is ON

• Checking and washing of sample probes, reagent probes, and mixing bars
• Checking the Printer (Option) and Paper
• Confirmation of the liquid quantity of buffer solution container, MID solution container,
and REF solution container (each when ISE is installed)
For details on performing daily maintenance inspections, refer to “8.3 Daily Maintenance”
on page 8-7.
At the maintenance of each part of the system always wear rubber gloves, etc. to avoid
infections.
CAUTION
For consideration of other than infection, observe the respective “WARNING” and
“CAUTION” described in the main text.

5.5 Calibrating Tests
Before starting analysis, perform requisition for calibration analysis.
Procedures for requisition for calibration analysis

1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>Routine>Rack
Requisition>Calibration to display the “Rack Requisition: Calibration” screen.
2. Select the sample type to be analyzed from the drop-down list of “Type”.
A list of registered calibration items is displayed.
3. In case of item selection from a profile, perform one of the following operations.
• Touch Profile to open the profile window and select a profile.
• Use the keyboard to enter into the space on the side of Profile, and press Enter.
The calibration items registered in each profile are displayed additionally.
4. For automatic judgment of calibration item selection by the system, touch Auto
Cal/QC Requisition (F3).
The system judges automatically from the reagent check results. The display color of the
item in the list of calibration items changes.
If this setting is OK, go to step 6.
5. To change a calibration item, touch the column “CAL” or “RB” in the item list and
add or change as required.
• Touching the column “RB”, only “Reagent Blank” is performed.
• Touching the column “CAL”, “Calibration” and “Reagent Blank” are both performed.

6. When QC for the selected calibration item is to be performed at the same time,
touch Same Requisition (F4).
7. Touch Exit (F2) to cancel or the Entry (F1) to register the set contents.
The display returns to the reference screen.
Perform requisition for advance calibration.

Perform setting for batch calibration for the items to be subject to advance calibration.
For details on advance calibration setting, refer to “4.7.2 Set the Specific Calibration
Parameters” on page 4-51.
This function cannot be executed when no items for advance calibration have been set.
TIP Use only with the specific reagent that Olympus provide. For detailed information,
contact your local technical support organization.

Requisition>Calibration to display the “Rack Requisition: Calibration” screen.

3. Touch Individual Requisition(F3).
The “Individual Requisition” window opens and the items subject to advance calibration
and the reagent bottle information are displayed.

5. Look at the order for “Seq.”, “Onboard Expiration”, etc. to judge the bottle for
which calibration should be made, and select by touching the column “CAL” for
items for which Calibration and Reagent Blank should be performed or the
column “RB” for items for which only Reagent Blank is to be performed.
The display color of a touched part changes. The selection can be cancelled by touching
again.
6. Touch Cancel to cancel the input.

7. Touch Close.
The window is closed and a list of set values is displayed.
8. Touch Entry (F1) to register the settings.

Requisition for Calibration Analysis with STAT table
1. Touch Menu>Routine>STAT Requisition>STAT Status to display the “STAT
Requisition: STAT Status” screen.
2. Touch Calibration.
This brings up the “Calibration” screen.
3. Perform operation according to the operation instructions for requisition for

calibration analysis at the time of rack requisition.

5.6 Performing Quality Control (QC)
Quality control (QC) samples are used to verify system performance and are an integral
part of any diagnostic device.
You should check the performance of the AU680 regularly by analyzing QC samples.
Each laboratory should establish its own control frequency. Good laboratory practice,
however, suggests QC samples be tested each time patient samples are tested and
each time calibration is performed. If any trends or sudden shifts in values are detected,
Each laboratory should also establish guidelines to ensure corrective action if controls
do not recover within the specified limits.
Requesting QC Analysis
To perform QC analysis, follow these steps:
1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>Routine>Rack Requisition>QC to
display the “Rack Requisition: QC” screen.
2. Select the sample type to be analyzed from the drop-down list of “Type”.
A list of registered QC items is displayed.

The QC items registered for each profile are displayed additionally.
4. Touch the items for which QC is to be executed and perform addition or change.
5. Touch Start Entry (F1) and register the set contents.
Next, confirm the QC sample setting position.
6. Touch Display QC Set (F6).

The “Controls Set Position” window opens.
7. Confirm the rack No. of green racks, the setting position, and the set QC sample.
In case of barcode ID analysis, setting can be done at any position. Confirm the ID.
8. Touch Close.
The window is closed.
Perform requisition for QC analysis for advance calibration

items
Set the items for which QC analysis is to be performed simultaneously with advance
calibration.
For details on advance calibration setting, refer to “Calibration editing for advanced
calibration” on page 6-20 of ”6.4.3 Checking Calibration and Reagent Blank”.
This function cannot be executed when no items for advance calibration have been set.
TIP Use only with the specific reagent that Olympus provide. For detailed information,
1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>Routine>Rack Requisition>QC to

display the “Rack Requisition: QC” screen.
3. Touch Individual Requisition (F3).
The “Individual Requisition” window opens and the items subject to advance calibration
and the reagent bottle information are displayed.

5. For selection of all items, touch Select All.
The display color changes for all items. All the reagent will be applied to all the items.
Touching All for one test will apply all the reagent for the items, which are selected in
selecting item list.
TIP
6. For item selection, judge after looking at the “Seq.” order, the “Onboard Stability”,
etc., and select by touching the test name.
The display color of a touched part changes. The selection can be cancelled by touching
again.
7. Touch Cancel to cancel the setting.

8. Touch Close.
The window is closed and a list of setting is displayed.

9. Touch Entry (F1).
The set values are registered and the display returns to the reference screen.
Running QC Analysis with Barcodes

You can perform QC analysis using barcodes on the QC sample tubes. These are
placed in the green rack in any order.
Setting the control ID (barcode) for QC samples

In order to perform QC analysis by barcode, the control ID of the QC sample must be
set on the “QC Parameters: Controls” screen.
From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>Parameters>QC Parameters>Controls to
display the “QC Parameters: Controls” screen.
For details on setting contents, refer to “4.8.1 Requesting QC Analysis” on page 4-60.
QC control sample setting

Set the QC samples to a green rack.
From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>Routine>Rack Requisition>QC to display
the “Rack Requisition: QC” screen. Set the racks by following “Controls Set Position”
dialog displayed by touching “Display QC Set(F6)” on the “Rack Requisition: QC”
screen.
For details on sample setting order, refer to “5.1.6 Placing the Sample Cups/Tubes in the
Rack” on page 5-11.

Performing Requisition for QC analysis with STAT table
1. Touch Menu>Routine>STAT Requisition>STAT Status to display the “STAT
Requisition: STAT Status” screen.
2. Touch QC.
This brings up the “QC” screen.
3. Perform operation according to the operation instructions for requisition for QC

analysis at the time of rack requisition.
For details on requisition for QC analysis, refer to “Requesting QC Analysis” on page 5-36
of “5.6 Performing Quality Control (QC)” on page 5-36.

5.7 Sample Requisitions: Entering Data
and Choosing Tests
Each time you perform an analysis, you must enter information about the patient
samples and choose which tests to perform on them. This information is called a
requisition.
The system uses these requisitions to process each sample. It is important to
understand how the system recognizes each sample.
When performing analysis using the ISE unit (optional), the ISE tests (Na, K, Cl) should
be selected in the normal test requisition operation described here.
If the calibration sample or QC sample are to be analyzed together with the normal
patient sample (sample in the white rack), it is necessary to perform the requisition
TIP
operation for calibration or QC in addition to that for normal tests described here.
5.7.1 Group Setting. See page 5-41.

5.7.2 Entering Manual Requisitions. See page 5-43.
5.7.3 Entering Batch Requisitions. See page 5-45.
5.7.4 Downloading Requisitions from a Host Computer. See page 5-46.
5.7.5 Entering Requisitions for Emergency Samples. See page 5-47.

5.7.1 Group Setting
When a group is set in advance, multiple test items can be set together by specifying a
group for a sample. Switching to different test items is possible by changing the group.
A maximum of three groups can be set for this system.
“Group of Tests” screen

Set a group name and test items for each group.
Parameters>Group of Tests to display the “Common Test Parameters: Group of
Tests” screen.
2. Specify the group to be set.
Select from the drop-down list of Test Name or with and .
3. Touch Edit (F1).

The column “Group” of “Output Order” becomes editable. If the group name is to be
changed, enter a new group name.

4. Touch Test Item Setting (F5).
This brings up the “Test Item Setting” dialog.
5. Touch the item No. of the test item to be set.

“Selected status” and “Deselected status” are switched alternately.
6. Touch Close.
The test item with the entered item No. is set as the test item of the group and is added to
the list. The printing order is set in order of selection.
To change the printing order, touch the test item to be changed and move it by touching
Forward (F2) or Backward (F3).
TIP

The set test item is registered to the respective group.
For test items set as calculated test items, specification as a group test item is not
possible.
TIP

5.7.2 Entering Manual Requisitions
Perform this type of requisition if the tests are different for each individual sample. You
must enter settings for the sample type, patient information and tests for each of the
samples:
Requisition>Sample>Test Requisition to display the “Sample: Test Requisition tab”
screen.
The test items registered to the group displayed in the “Group” dialog are displayed as a
list.
“Dispensing Quantity” does not include the dead volume. Approximate values are
shown.
CAUTION

The system goes to entry mode.
3. When an item not in the present group is to be selected, select “Change Group
Display” check box.
The test items for all groups are displayed on the item list.
4. Select sample kind, sample No., and type.

5. Enter sample ID, sample dilution rate, etc. as required.

6. Touch the test item in the item list and select the test item.
The display color of a touched test item changes. The selection can be cancelled by
touching again.
8. Touch Demographics to open the “Demographics tab” screen and enter the
patient information.
9. Confirm the entered information and touch Entry (F1).
The entered item selection information is registered.
10. Repeat steps 3 to 9 for each sample.

11. Touch Exit (F2).

5.7.3 Entering Batch Requisitions
If you want to perform the same tests on a number of samples, you can enter the
requisitions in a single batch. Patient information is entered for one sample and then
reused for every other sample in the batch.
To enter batch requisitions:
screen.

3. Perform setting for one sample of the test items for batch requisition.
For details on setting method, refer to “5.7.2 Entering Manual Requisitions” on page 5-43.
4. Touch Batch Entry (F3).

This brings up the “Batch Entry” dialog.
5. Enter “Number of Samples” or “Last Sample No.”.

6. Touch OK.
When batch requisition has been performed with “Samples”, the test items for the number
of samples specified by “Samples” are registered as a batch from the presently displayed
sample number on.
When batch requisition has been performed with “Last Sample No.”, the test items for the
samples from the presently displayed sample number to the “Last Sample No.” are
registered as a batch.
7. Touch Exit (F2).
5.7.4 Downloading Requisitions from a Host Computer

Instead of entering requisitions into the system manually, you can download them from
a host computer. Downloading can be:
• Realtime: the system downloads and executes requisitions automatically.
• Batch: the system waits for a user to instruct it to download and execute requisitions.
For information on how to configure these modes, refer to “4.3 Entering Online Settings” on
page 4-10 and “Specification of Host Online“.
To download batch requisitions from a host computer:

screen.

2. Touch Batch Req. from Host (F7).
This brings up the “Batch Req. from Host” dialog.
3. Select the “Sample kind” from the drop-down list.

4. Enter the start “Sample No.” and end “Sample No.” becoming the object for
downloading of sample requisition information.
5. Touch OK.
The download starts. A message is displayed while downloading.
6. Press Exit (F2) when the download has been completed.

The display returns to the main screen.
5.7.5 Entering Requisitions for Emergency Samples

You can interrupt normal system processing in order to process an emergency sample
rapidly. If your system is not connected to a host system, you must enter test
requisitions for emergency samples manually.

6
Performing Analysis
This chapter describes how to perform the

different elements of analysis:
6.1 Starting Analysis. See page 6-2.

6.2 Monitoring Analysis. See page 6-3.
6.3 Disable a Tests. See page 6-10.
6.4 Checking Results. See page 6-12.
6.5 Processing Emergency Samples. See page 6-30.
6.6 Printing Results. See page 6-41.
6.7 Performing a Repeat Run. See page 6-44.
6.8 Forwarding the Data to Other PC. See page 6-50.
6.9 Pausing Analysis Operation. See page 6-51.
6.10 Rack Supply Stop. See page 6-52.
6.11 System Shutdown. See page 6-53.
6.12 Analysis Stop (emergency stop). See page 6-54.
6.13 Editing Quality Control Data. See page 6-55.
6.14 Editing Analysis Data. See page 6-58.
6.15 Confirming the ISE (option) status. See page 6-65.
6.16 Managing Regent Condition. See page 6-68.
AU680 User Guide Version4.0 6. Performing Analysis 6-1

6.1 Starting Analysis
You must ensure that the system is prepared for analysis.
It takes about 8 minutes and 30 seconds for the first results to be calculated after
analysis has begun. Analysis results can be arranged on a report template that you can
print out when the process is complete. You can also program the system to print results
as they are produced or in batches afterwards. If you do not have a printer, you can
view the results on the screen as they are completed.
For details on preparation for test, refer to “5 Preparing for Analysis” on page 5-1.
To start analysis:
1. Enter your login name and password.
When the login is successful, “New Index” dialog will be displayed.
This dialog is displayed only at a startup of the system.

TIP
The index should be modified, if necessary, on “Update Index” dialog.
For details on modifying the index, refer to “5.2.4 Creating New Index” on page 5-21.
2. Select the desired index.

Set either “New index” or “Current index”.
3. Set the group as required.
4. Touch OK.
• For details on how to set the startup condition, refer to “5.2.3 Setting the Start Condition”
on page 5-20.
• For details on setting log-in name and password, refer to “7.2.1 Setting User Name and
Password” on page 7-4.
5. Touch Start.
This brings up the “Start Test” dialog.
6. Edit the “Starting sample No.” as required.

7. Touch the Testing button in “Start Test” dialog.
The system will self-check whether the test is possible, and the analysis will
begin.
When the test is initiated, the mode display changes from “STANDBY” to “MEASURE1”.
When the test can not be initiated, “Start Test” dialog will be displayed to show a list of
errors that occur. Remedy the displayed error(s) properly and return to Step 5.
6-2 6. Performing Analysis AU680 User Guide Version4.0

6.2 Monitoring Analysis
The system status is continuously updated while the system is operating. This means
that you can constantly monitor progress.
Checking the Sample Status

With “Sample Status” screen the operator can make sure the conditions of each sample
under test.
The operator can also check whether the test is terminated, whether the test has
terminated with an error, and the time when the test is expected to end, and so on.
These conditions can be displayed as sorted by each sample number, rack position, etc.
of the samples.
To check the status, operate as follows:
1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Home>Sample Status to display the
“Sample Status” screen.
2. Touch the button of each condition to check.

Any of the following buttons can be selected:
• Status:
Displays a list of conditions of samples on the Analyzer.
• Detail:
Displays a list of test conditions or test results for each test item of each sample.
• Realtime Display:
This allows the analysis data to be displayed one by one starting with any sample on which
the test is completed.
3. Touch Home.
This restores the previous “Home” screen.

Checking the Analyzer Status
The analyzer status window provides a view of the major units of the AU680.
To monitor analyzer status:
1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Home>Analyzer Status to display
“Analyzer Status” screen.
2. After checking the analyzer status, touch Home.

This restores the previous “Home” screen.
With this “Analyzer Status” screen the operator is allowed to check the following
conditions.

Analyzer Top Unit
• Reagent refrigerator status (R1, R2): The display color shows the status of each
reagent refrigerator.
Display color Status

Blue Normal
Where the temperature is outside the normal temperature range
Yellow
(4 to 12°C).
Red Where either the main cover is open.
• Bath status: The display color shows the status of Incubator.

Blue Normal
Either the temperature is outside the normal temperature
Yellow
range (37±0.3°C).
There is any cuvette whose cuvette check result (in real
Red
time) results in a fatal error.
• Detergent-1 and Detergent-2 (Sample, R1, R2), diluent bottle: The display color
shows the remaining quantity of each bottle.

More than 50mL
More than 30mL and equal to or less than 50mL
More than 15mL and equal to or less than 30mL
Less than 15mL
No remaining reagent
When the test item that uses the detergent is not a group
item

• STAT table: The display color shows the status of STAT table.

Blue Normal
Where the temperature is outside the normal temperature
Yellow
range (4 to 12°C ).
Red Where either the STAT cover is open.
• ISE (optional): The display color shows the status of ISE (optional).

Blue Normal
Yellow Where the ISE mode is STOP.
Where either the ISE cover is open or the ISE mode is
Red
BUSY.

Rack Feeder Top Unit
Sample dispensing
position Rack buffer unit
(Right most side is for
Middle position receiving, left most side
is lame)
Reading ID
position Rack storage position
Auto rerun position
• Auto Rerun: The display color shows the status of rack feeder auto rerun.

Light blue The auto-repeat run is normal.
Red An error results from the auto-repeat run.
Use Where the auto-repeat run is set
Not Use Where the auto-repeat run is not set
Display within the
square frame Error Where the auto-repeat run unit has an error
(irrespective of the auto-repeat run
settings)
• Rack Receiver: The display color shows the status of Rack Receiver.

Blue Normal
Where the rack is full, or any mechanical error is brought up in the
Red
rack feeder unit initial run unit.
Display within the Rack full When the rack is full.
square frame - (hyphen) When the rack is not full.
• Rack position display: The display color and position will depend on the rack type.
Any rack position which is not the subject of display will be shown in gray. The rack
No. of the rack concerned will be displayed.

Analyzer Front Unit
• Deionized water tank, detergent tank, and diluted detergent tank: The display color
shows the liquid quantity in each tank.

Blue The liquid quantity is normal.
Yellow The liquid quantity is at overflow level.
Red The liquid quantity is short.
• ISE REF solution tank, ISE MID solution tank, and ISE BUF solution tank: The
display color shows the solution quantity in each tank.

Blue The solution quantity is normal.
Yellow The solution quantity is short.

Unit Status Descriptions
Display color
Unit
Blue Yellow Red
Concentrated Normal - Full
waste liquid tank
waste liquid tank Normal - Full
Cover condition All the covers of R1, - Any of the covers of
R2, and STAT (large), R1, R2, and STAT
STAT (small), and ISE (large), STAT (small),
(optional) are closed. and ISE (optional) is
opened.
Vacuum tank Normal - Full
Bath temperature Normal Outside the standard -
temperature range
Coolant Normal Outside the standard -
temperature temperature range
Printer Normal - Error
LIS Comm Under realtime Under Batch -
online communication online communication
No communication
OLYMPUS Connected Not connected -
SUPPORT
VISION

6.3 Disable a Tests
It is possible to perform setting so that specific tests always are not analyzed during
analysis and that analysis of these tests is stopped (masking). For example, masking of
the following tests makes it possible to save analysis time and reagents.
• Tests with failed calibration
• Samples already on the feeder with abnormal tests from QC during analysis
Once masking has been set, the masked samples are not analyzed even when manual
requisition is made from the normal sample requisition menu.
Test masking requires the following operation.
For details on start condition setting, refer to “5.2.3 Setting the Start Condition” on page 5-
20.
2. Touch Disable (F7).

This brings up the “Disable” dialog.
A list of analysis items which can be masked is displayed.

3. Touch the test of the analysis item to be masked.
A masked analysis item is displayed in amber.
4. Touch OK.
The display returns to the “Start Condition” screen.
• Masking setting is also possible during analysis. Analysis of the tests will stop or restart
after masking operation.
TIP
• The masking settings are effective until power OFF.

6.4 Checking Results
After results have been generated, it is important to review them for analytical validity.
Follow these procedures:
6.4.1 Checking the Test Results. See page 6-12.
6.4.2 Displaying Reaction Monitor. See page 6-13.
6.4.3 Checking Calibration and Reagent Blank. See page 6-17.
6.4.4 Checking for Error Flags and Alarms. See page 6-24.
6.4.5 Checking QC. See page 6-25.
6.4.1 Checking the Test Results

Check the test results against “Sample Status” screen being displayed or the analysis
data being printed out.
For details on how to display the sample status screen, refer to “Checking the Sample
Status” on page 6-3.

6.4.2 Displaying Reaction Monitor
The analysis environment (sample type, reagent lot, etc.) of analysis data and its
reaction process (Reaction Monitor) can be confirmed and use for investigation of data
reliability, problems, etc. is possible. The data which can be accessed are routine
samples and ISE analysis data, as well as calibration data and QC data.
1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>Routine>Data Monitor>Reaction
Monitor>Main to display the “Reaction Monitor: Main tab” screen.

2. Enter the search parameters for the data to be displayed according to the
following table.
Setting item Contents Remarks

Index Select a case from the displayed All registered index information is
drop-down list. displayed from the newest
information down.
Test name Max. 120 test names out of the test All items become search objects
names registered in the test name when “ALL” is selected. However,
parameters can be selected from the Calculated Test Items cannot be
drop-down list. selected.
Cuvette No. The cuvette No. to be used at the Enter “*” when no cuvette is specified.
time of analysis is specified.
Value input range: 1 to 165
Preprocess
Cuvette No.
Mix bar No. The mixing bars for reagent 1 (R11), Enter “*” when no mixing bar is
sample or reagent 2 (R21) used at specified.
the time of analysis are specified.
Value input range: 1 to 3
Normal Enter the search parameters for In case of display by direct jump from
sample number and sample ID for another screen, the information from
each type. the screen where the jump is started
None: Not using sample ID as the is used as initial values for type
search criteria. selection and sample number
Repeat Partial Match: Retrieve the sample
Calibration/ whose sample ID has the same In case of display by direct jump from
Quality control characters of the setting from the another screen, the information from
head. the screen where the jump is started
Complete match: Retrieve the is used as initial values for type
sample whose sample ID is match to selection and sample number
the setting completely.
Counts Select the check box of “Counts” of
search objects.
Sequence Select the check box of the When all boxes are not selected, the
“Sequence”. data matching the specified sample
number and the Counts parameter
are displayed.
3. Depending on the data to be searched, touch General tab.

Search starts and the touched tab screen is displayed.
When there are no data, the No Data message dialog is displayed. When “OK” is touched,
return is made to the “Reaction Monitor: Main tab” screen.

4. When the “General tab” screen is displayed, confirm the contents.
Sample number
• Left column:
The sample number of the presently displayed reaction data is displayed.
• Right column:
When the presently displayed reaction data are repeat run data, the sample number of the
first run is displayed. Nothing is displayed in this column when the reaction data are from first
run.
A list of the displayed symbols is shown below.
Type Normal Run Repeat Run

Routine Serum (None) H
Urine U HU
Other-1 X HX
Other-2 Y HY
Whole blood W HW
Emergency Serum E HE
sample Urine UE HUE
Other-1 XE HXE
Other-2 YE HYE
Whole blood WE HWE
STAT sample Serum P HP
Urine UP HUP
Other-1 XP HXP
Other-2 YP HYP
Whole blood WP HWP
QC Q
Cal A
RB R

5. Touch Graph Display (F5).
This brings up the “Graph Display” dialog.
6. Touch Scale Change (F6).

This brings up the “Scale Change” dialog.
7. Touch the display condition Auto or Manual.

Set a lower limit value and an upper limit value for the Y-axis and touch manual to adjust
the scale of the y-axis. The set range is -2.000 to 3.000 (in units of 0.001).

6.4.3 Checking Calibration and Reagent Blank
With the following procedure make sure the calibration result.
Reference to present calibration and reagent blanks

1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>Calibration>Calibration
Monitor>Status to display the “Calibration Monitor: Status tab” screen.

The present reagent blanks and calibration status are displayed as a list.
Items with display of “*” are items with an advanced calibration setting.
• Test list
List of analysis tests registered for each group
Display Display color Status

No data Bottles without calibration data exist.
Updating failure Yellow Bottles with failed calibration updating exist.
Expired Bottles with expired calibration exist.
No display Sky Blue All bottles are normal.
There are bottles for which reagent check has not yet been
No display White
performed and judgment is not possible.
• List by sample types

Yellow In case of no calibration data, failure or expired
White Reagent check has not yet been performed and judgment is not possible.
Gray Not display object
Sky Blue Normal
3. When the column Reagent Blank or Calibration is touched, the display shifts to
the “RB History tab” screen or the “Calibration History tab” screen, and the
reagent blank or calibration graph is displayed.
When there are multiple bottles, the most recent data are displayed.
4. When the “RB Detail” tab or the “Calibration Detail” tab is touched, the “RB Detail”
screen or the “Calibration Detail” screen is displayed.
The detailed data of the history screen are displayed.
5. Touch the tab Status Display.

The screen returns to the “Status Display tab” screen.
6. For reference to the individual status when multiple bottles have been set, touch
RB/CAL Selection (F2) to display the “RB/CAL Status” dialog.
The status is displayed by bottles.

7. Touch “Reagent Blank” or “Calibration” for reference.
The display changes to the respective “RB History tab” screen or “Calibration History
tab” screen and the detailed information is displayed.
The display range for the list of tests to be displayed can be changed with the drop-
down list “Display Method” of the “Status tab” screen.
TIP
• All: Display of all test data registered for the group
• Error: Display of data with an error for calibration or reagent blanks
Changing the graph scale

The graph display size can be changed by touching the “RB History tab” screen or the
“Calibration History tab” screen.
1. Touch Graph Scale (F7).
This brings up the “Graph Scale” dialog.
2. Touch any one from the Number of Data Points “10”, “20”, and “30”.
The number of data selected is displayed in “Number of Data Points”.
3. Set the lower limit value for the Y Axis to “Lower” and the upper limit value for the
Y Axis to “Upper”.
When “Auto Scale” is touched, the upper limit value and the lower limit value calculated
by automatic scale calculation are displayed.
TIP
4. Touch OK.
The graph is redrawn with the set scale.

Calibration editing for advanced calibration
The calibration data for tests where the advanced calibration interval has been set to
“Lot/Lot” can be created from other data or the data being used can be made invalid.
1. Touch LOT Calibration (F1) on the “Calibration Details tab” screen.
This brings up the “Lot to Lot Calibration” dialog.
Set base calibration data by which new calibration data of reagent bottle is created. “Base”
calibration means when new bottle is added the calibration for the bottle is copied from
base calibration.
2. Select the Lot No. to be displayed from the drop-down list of “Lot No.”.
A list of calibration data for the same reagent lot as the selected test is displayed.
The check box for the presently used data is selected and the calibration data status is
displayed in the Comment column.
Comment Meaning
Base Calibration data for the first bottle of the respective lot
Analysis Calibration data for the second bottle of the respective lot and
following bottles
Base (Copy) Calibration data duplicated from “Base”
Unuse (Copy) Calibration data once deleted from the base (Copy), selection is
not possible
3. Touch the data and select the calibration data to be used or delete them.
4. Touch OK.
The “Lot to Lot Calibration” dialog is closed and the settings are registered.

Reference to past reagent blank data or calibration data

3. Touch the column “Reagent Blank” or “Calibration”.
The display changes to the “RB History tab” screen or the “Calibration History tab” screen.
4. Touch Data Select (F3).

This brings up the “Data Select” dialog.
The past reagent blank data or calibration data for the presently selected test are
displayed by index date and time.
5. Select the data to be referenced by touching and touch OK.

The “Data Select” dialog is closed and details of the selected past reagent blank data or
calibration data are displayed.

Reference to Factor

3. Touch Factor List (F4).
This brings up the “Factor List” dialog.
Factor A for tests where the approximation formula for the calibration curve is the type Y =
AX + B is displayed.
4. After confirmation of the factor, touch Close.

The “Factor List” dialog closes.

Adding a comment
Comments registered in the comment master can be selected and added to calibration
data or reagent blank data.
This operation is common for the screen tabs
1) RB History
2) RB Details
3) Calibration History
4) Calibration Details
Comments created with 1) or 2) are displayed for 1) and 2) both, and comments created
with 3) or 4) are displayed for 3) and 4) both.
1. Touch Comment (F5).
This brings up the “Comment” dialog.
2. Touch “Comment” to select.

3. Touch OK.
The dialog is closed and the selected comment is displayed in the column “Comment” of
the above screen.
For details on comment entry, refer to “7.6 Using Comment Master” on page 7-22.

6.4.4 Checking for Error Flags and Alarms
If a problem occurred during analysis, the system appends a flag to the analysis results.
Check all generated results carefully for error flags and take the appropriate action.
For details on error flags, refer to “9 Error Flag” on page 9-1.
Check also, to see if an alarm occurred during analysis. To do so:

1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>Maintenance>Alarm log to display
“Alarm log” screen.
From this screen the following confirmation or operation can be performed.

• Referring to any alarm during the time other than the current period or date.
• Printing the alarm log.
2. Touch Home.
This restores the “Home” screen.

6.4.5 Checking QC
When you have analyzed a QC sample, check its result:
1. Checking the daily variation chart.
2. Checking the day-to-day variation chart.
3. Checking the twin-plot chart.
Checking the Daily Variation Chart

You can compare QC analysis results by plotting the individual QC points from one
index on a single chart. Always review the daily variation chart after performing daily QC
analysis.
To check the daily variation chart, follow the procedure below to use “Daily chart”.
1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>QC>QC Monitor>Daily
Chart>Monitor List to display the “Daily Chart: Monitor List tab” screen.
2. Touch Change Index(F1).

This brings up the “Change Index” dialog.
3. Select the range of “Index” and “Sample Type” as the objectives of confirmation.
4. Touch the item to be displayed.

5. Touch Chart View.
This brings up the selected daily variation chart.
6. Select the test name to display the data as the QC daily varidation chart with
using or .
This will bring up the QC daily variation chart of the selected test name preceding or
following the current test name.
7. Touch Print (F8).

This brings up the “Print” dialog.
8. Select, as required, to specify the “Statistics”, “Detail Data”, “Graph” or “with

Comments” and “Current Test” or “All Test”.
9. Touch OK.
The print operation will commence.
When any abnormal condition occurs, refer to “11 Troubleshooting” on page 11-1.

Checking the Day-to-Day Variation Chart
You can monitor how QC results vary over several days. The day-to-day variation chart
compares QC analysis results by plotting a number of days’ analyses or a combination
of indexes on a chart that displays the variation. All points for a specific control, within
an index, are combined into a single point for the day-to-day chart.
You can select the indexes that you want to use, such as a few days, weeks or months.
To check the day-to-day variation chart: The following operation is required. The
following procedure applies to where “Day to Day chart” screen is used.
1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>QC>QC Monitor>Day to Day
Chart>Test Select to display the “Day to Day Chart: Test Select tab” screen.
2. Select the range of “Index” and “Sample Type” as the objectives of confirmation.
3. Touch the item to be displayed.

4. Touch Chart View.
This brings up the selected day-to-day variation chart.
5. Select the test name to display the data as the QC daily varidation chart with
using or .
This will bring up the QC daily variation chart of the selected test name preceding or
following the current test name.

7. Touch, as required, to specify the “STAT”, “Data”, “Chart” or “Comment” and

“Current Test” or “All Test” information.
8. Touch OK.
Checking QC Results Using Twin Plot

You can use Twin Plot analysis to determine whether a QC variation is caused by the
system or is a result of a random error. QC analysis is usually performed using two QC
samples:
• A sample in the reference range.
• A sample in the pathological range.
The twin plot function displays the first QC sample on the x-axis of a 2-dimensional plot
and the second QC sample on the y-axis. All points should fall within the 2SD range in
the centre of the twin plot.
To view the Twin Plot display:
1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>QC>QC Monitor>Twin Plot
Chart>Test Select to display the “Twin Plot Chart: Test Select tab” screen.
2. Select the range of “Index” and “Type” as the objectives of confirmation.

3. Selectively touch the test names to be displayed in the list of “Test Name”.
This will change the display color of the selected test names. Touching any again will
cancel the selection.
• When you touch Select All Tests (F5), all the test names being displayed will be
selected accordingly.
TIP
• When you touch Deselect All Tests (F6), all the test names being displayed will be
deselected accordingly.
4. Touch Test.
This brings up the chart of day-to-day variation results.
To display the daily statistical results, touch Daily Data (F6).

TIP
5. Touch Sample.
This makes the QC data displayed for each QC sample number within the index.
To switch the QC sample number to be displayed, touch either or .

TIP

6.5 Processing Emergency Samples
6.5.1 Performing STAT Table Analysis. See page 6-32.
6.5.2 Simple STAT Mode. See page 6-38.
6.5.3 Using a red rack. See page 6-39.
Outline of analyzing emergency samples

Emergency samples can be processed by using the STAT table or red racks. If only few
samples are to be analyzed, they can be quickly processed through the use of the STAT
table. If a lot of samples are to be analyzed, it is advised to put them in the red racks.
Processing emergency samples with the STAT table: Simple STAT

Mode
It is not possible to analyze more than five samples at a time on the STAT table.
Moreover, once the analysis is started, it is not permitted to add extra emergency
TIP
samples until the current analysis operation ends.
This is a STAT-specific mode that uses the STAT assuming that any operator is absent
during night time or holidays. This mode is more advantageous than that for normal
STAT analysis because the requisition procedure is rather simple. Set the sample cup of
the objective sample to be analyzed in position on the STAT table for the simple STAT
mode. In this mode it is not possible to perform analysis using racks.
Processing emergency samples with the STAT table: STAT Order

screen
Perform requisition operation in the same way as normal testing to advance to the
analysis. Use “STAT Order: STAT status” screen for the requisition of the sample and
instruction to initiate the analysis.
Processing emergency samples in red racks

Set the emergency samples in a red rack for analysis.
When a centrifuged sample cup needs be set still on this Analyzer for another test,
make sure there is an enough quantity of serum required for detecting and analyzing
CAUTION the sample contained in it. The minimum sample quantity (dead volume) possible to be
detected is measured for 4mm down from the sample’s surface within the sample cup.
If an ample quantity of serum can not be secured, move it in such a sample cup that is
thinner than ever (for increasing the depth of the serum part) before advancing to the
analysis. If the serum’s depth is less than 4mm, blood cells accumulated under the
serum may be aspirated instead. This may cause a trouble such as dispense failure.

About the adaptor for STAT table
If you use a specific adaptor, you can set a different diameter of sample cup in the STAT
table.
Two kinds of adaptors are provided depending on the outside diameter of the respective
sample cup. Install, in advance, any adaptor suitable for the sample cup in use on the
STAT table. Those sample cups whose outside diameter does not fall within the
following range can not be used.
Diameter of sample cup possible to set Available adaptor

Greater than φ13.5 and less than φ16 Adaptor B
φ14 (ACA cup)
Greater than φ11.5 and less than φ14 Adaptor A
HITACHI cup
Do not use mixed outside diameters of sample cups at a time. Attempting to perform
analysis with the mixed outside diameters of sample cups set at a time may cause any
CAUTION Analyzer trouble including damage of sample probes, etc.

6.5.1 Performing STAT Table Analysis
Analysis with the STAT table differs according to use or no use of barcodes (ID) and
according to automatic analysis mode or sample recognition identification mode.
For details on barcode (ID) use, refer to “4.1.1 Set the common conditions for rack analysis
and STAT analysis” on page 4-2.
In case of automatic analysis mode

1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>Routine>STAT Requisition>STAT
Status to display the “STAT Requisition: STAT Status” screen.
2. Set the cups with STAT samples in ascending order of Sample Nos.
Automatic mode is only possible with barcode mode.
In case of ID analysis, the setting order is not restricted.
3. Touch STAT Start (F1).

This brings up the “STAT Start” window.
4. Confirm the “Start Sample No.”.

5. To change the Start Sample number touch Verify Next Sample No.
This brings up the “Edit Start Sample No.” window. Enter the “Start Sample No.” requiring
editing.

6. Touch Start.
The system confirms the presence or absence of cups on the STAT table, barcode ID, etc.
and starts analysis. A message is displayed when analysis cannot be started. Take the
specified measures and touch STAT Start (F1) again.
In case of sample confirmation mode

2. Set samples on STAT table.

3. Touch STAT Check (F3).
The system confirms the presence or absence of cups on the STAT table, barcode ID, etc.
In case of problems with the setting status, a message is displayed.
Take the specified measures and touch STAT Check (F3) again.
In case of ID analysis, go to step 6.

4. Touch Sample Assignment (F4). Select the position on the STAT table where
the cup is to be set from the drop-down list “Cup Pos.” on the list of requisitioned
samples.
The cup setting position is displayed in the sample assignment window.
When assigning repeat sample, select “Repeat” at “Kind”. Since repeat sample is
displayed, select repeat sample to analyze.
TIP
5. Touch OK.
This brings up the “STAT Start” window.
7. To change the “Start Sample No.”, touch Edit Start Sample No.
This brings up the “Edit Start Sample No.” window. Enter the Start Sample No. requiring
editing.
8. Touch Start.
Analysis is started.

STAT analysis pause
Dispensing operation can be paused to add STAT samples during STAT analysis
operation etc. Pausing is done between tests, and dispensing operation for new
analysis is stopped.
• After pausing, do not move away from the system and always restart analysis operation.
Incorrect analysis results are to be feared because of sample evaporation, increased
CAUTION concentration, etc.
• When operation has been paused, do not remove racks from the system and do not add
samples at an intermediate position of racks. This will cause a mismatch between the
sample number in the requisition information and the actual sample cup, making correct
analysis impossible.
• STAT Check (F4) operation cannot be paused. STAT check requires approximately 70
seconds.
TIP
• Approximately 50 seconds are required until pausing of dispensing operation. However
STAT analysis is not paused during dispensing RB/ACAL/QC.

2. Touch STAT Pause (F2).

This brings up the “Pause Confirmation Message” window.
3. Touch OK.
The confirmation message window is closed and dispensing operation stops.
4. Perform STAT samples addition or other required operation.

This brings up the “STAT Start” dialog.
6. Touch OK.
Analysis is restarted.

ID editing
In case of an ID read error etc. at the time of STAT check, the ID information of the
sample with an abnormal ID can be edited.
Editing is possible only for not analyzed samples. Editing can be performed only when
the STAT table is stopped.
2. Select the sample with the ID error.

3. Touch Sample ID Edit (F8).
This brings up the “Sample ID Edit” window.
The position of the sample with an abnormal ID on the STAT table and its type are
displayed.
4. Enter the correct barcode ID into the “Sample ID”.

5. Touch OK.
The input value is registered and the “Sample ID Edit” window is closed.

Case where the emergency sample is to be processed on the
STAT table using sample cups with a barcode label
How to paste a barcode label on each sample cup

Paste the barcode label on the target sample cup so as to meet the requirements
shown below.
Angle should be within 5° degrees
Sample cup
The label should not stick out
Barcode
Label STAT table
How to set sample cups with each barcode label

Sample cups should be always set with each barcode label facing outward in the hole
provided at the outer circumference of the STAT table.
The barcode is not read for

cups placed in the inner holes.
The sample cup should be placed
in an outer hole on the STAT table
with the barcode facing outward.
STAT table

6.5.2 Simple STAT Mode
This is a special STAT analysis mode permitting analysis simply by following the system
instructions. When the system is set to simple STAT mode at night and on holidays,
even persons not familiar with the system can perform analysis with few steps.
Start and stop of simple STAT mode

1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Simple STAT Mode on the “Home”
screen to display the “Simple STAT Mode” screen.
The system enters simple STAT mode.
2. Touch Exit.
Simple STAT mode ends and return is made to the Home screen.
Analysis in simple STAT mode

1. Select the check box of “Pos.” on the “Simple STAT Mode” screen and select
“Type” and “Profile” from the drop-down list.
2. Open the STAT cover, and set all samples according to “Pos.”, and close the
STAT cover.
3. Touch Next.
4. The system starts automatically.
5. Touch Data Display tab.
The analysis results are displayed. When a simple analysis screen report has been set,
the analysis results are put out to the printer (option).
6. Touch Main tab.

When analysis has ended a message prompting for sample removal is displayed.
7. Remove all samples, close the cover, and touch Next.

The system checks for not removed samples and simple analysis operation is ended.

6.5.3 Using a red rack
In order to analyze the emergency sample as carried in a red rack, perform the same
sample requisition as for normal test prior to analysis.
Test procedure using a red rack

Requisition>Sample>Test Requisition to display “Sample: Test Requisition tab”
screen.
Sample dispense amount shown in the “Sample Volume” field is an approximate

value excluding the dead volume.
CAUTION
2. Select “Emergency” from the drop-down list of “Sample Kind”. And enter the
sample number into the “Sample No.”. Select the “Sample Type” from the drop-
down list of “Type”.
This allows the operator to edit the “Test Requisition tab” screen items.

4. Enter to set the following items properly:
• Sample ID
• Sex
• Age (Years and Months)
• Analyte

6. Repeat Step 3 for every emergency sample.
7. Touch Exit (F2).
8. Touch Feeder Stop.
This makes the feeder stop.
9. Set the rack in position on the feeder.
When racks other than red rack have already been on the feeder and the red rack
should be prioritized, dislocate the racks backward on the feeder with hand to place the
TIP
red rack in a position to cut in.
10. Touch Start.

6.6 Printing Results
With this Analyzer it is possible to print test results in a form of report (Test Ledger) or
data log list. To do this, it is necessary to specify the required report format in advance.
For details on how to set the print format, refer to “4.11.1 Set the Basic Condition for Print”
on page 4-76.
Printing Reports
To print patient data as a report:
1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>Routine>Sample
Manager>Sample>Main to display “Sample: Main tab” screen.
2. Touch Data Search (F3).

This brings up the “Data Search” dialog.
3. Enter an appropriate search key such as index, sample No., sample information,
etc. of the data to be printed.
4. Touch OK.
6. Select “Data List No.”.

7. Touch OK.
• It is necessary to set the print format beforehand.
TIP • The operator can choose any kind of print form such as Report or Test Ledger, etc.
according to the format selected in step 6.
Printing Data other than Normal Sample

Analyzed RB samples, calibration samples, and quality control samples are printed.
1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>Routine>Sample Manager>RB/CAL/
QC to display the “Sample Manager: RB/CAL/QC” screen.
2. Select the index to be the object of RB/CAL/QC data search from the drop-down
list “Index”.
3. Select the check box of the samples corresponding to “Sample Kind”.

4. Enter the sample number range to be searched into “Search Sample No.”.
All are searched when “*” is entered.

TIP In case of no input (space), this is taken as no specification of search conditions.
5. Enter the Cal No. (1 to 200) and the QC No. (1 to 100) for “QC/Cal No.”. Input of
“*” means specification of all.
6. Enter the sample ID for “Control/Calibrator ID”.
7. In case of search for samples with tests with pending transfer to online, select the
check box “Pending Transfers”, and in case of search for samples with test with
pending printing, select the check box “Pending List”.
8. Execute “Work List Printing” or “Online Transfer” explained below.
Work List Printing

Specify the data range and print the work list.
1. Set the search range for the sample numbers on the “Sample Manager: RB/CAL/
QC” screen.
2. Touch Print (F8) and display the dialog for specification of the print format No.
3. Select the format for the work list to be printed from the drop-down list “Print
Format”.
4. Touch OK.
The work list is printed.
Online transfer
When this system is connected online to a host computer, sample information, patient
information, etc. can be transferred online.
Before transfer, confirm that this system is connected online to a host computer.
CAUTION
1. Set the search range for the sample numbers on the “Sample Manager: RB/CAL/
QC” screen.
2. Touch Online Transfer (F7) and display the online transfer dialog.
3. Touch OK.
Online transfer is performed.
Touch Online Transfer Stop (F7) to stop the transfer.

TIP

6.7 Performing a Repeat Run
6.7.1 Preparation for standard (manual) repeat test. See page 6-45.
6.7.2 Performing a repeat test on the STAT table. See page 6-47.
6.7.3 Performing repeat test using an orange rack. See page 6-47.
6.7.4 Checking the repeat-test result data. See page 6-48.
There are two ways to repeat a run:

• Manual (Standard): Analysis is repeated manually by the user from a print out of the
repeat run data file called the repeat run work list. Samples must be rerun on an
orange rack.
• Automatic: Analysis is repeated with parameters automatically read from the repeat
run data file, and run automatically from the white rack or red rack. A sample on the
STAT table is also automatically re-analyzed excluding simple STAT mode.
This section describes how to perform a standard (manual) repeat test to be executed
manually.
The operator is also allowed to set whether or not to automatically rewrite the original
data with the result data of the repeat test.
TIP
For details on how to set the repeat test, refer to “4.6 Programming Repeat Tests” on
page 4-42.

6.7.1 Preparation for standard (manual) repeat test
In order to extract only the samples that require the repeat run, once print out the repeat
run work list to make sure them. While checking against the printed repeat run work list,
perform the requisition of repeat run.
Entering a Requisition for Repeat Run Analysis

1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>Routine>Repeat Run>Repeat Order
to display the “Repeat Run: Repeat Order” screen.
Sample dispense amount shown in the “Sample Volume” field is an approximate value
excluding the dead volume.
CAUTION
2. For using racks, select “Routine” or “Emergency” from the “Sample Kind” drop-
down list. For such samples that are on the STAT table, select “STAT”.
3. Enter the “Sample No.” of the sample to perform the repeat test.
4. When the system configuration is set as that more than one type of samples can
be set in one rack, select the type concerned from the “Type” drop-down list.
6. Set the “Sample Dilution Rate”. Set the “Test diluent” and “Select Test” options on
the “Test Dilution” dialog displayed by touching Test Dilution (F8).

Once the settings have been entered, the current screen will display the information
regarding the next sample number.
8. Repeat the above steps 3 through 7 for the number of samples to perform the
repeat test for.
9. After the requisition is completed, touch Exit (F2).
• Repeat run list

The sample which is considered to need a repeat run as a result of an analysis, will be
TIP extracted as a sample may need a repeat run. It is possible to display the list of the
samples which need repeat run. The samples which need a repeat run mean samples
whose repeat run sample No. has not determined yet.
• Assigning repeat run sample No.
If the information of a repeat run sample, sample No. of repeat run will not be sequential. In
this case, an empty sample cup which is corresponded to the number of the sample
deleted, is needed to be set to an orange rack. To avoid this troublesome process, it is
possible to change sample No. to be sequential.
• Batch extraction of repeat run
Samples which have data flag set at parameter will be automatically requested for a repeat
run.
• Initializing repeat run data
All the repeat run data will be deleted.
• List of untested samples
It displays the samples which are not analyzed. However, samples which are not assigned
a sample No. will not be shown.
If 5 or less than 5 samples, proceed to 6.7.2 to perform the repeat run. If more than 5
samples, proceed to 6.7.3.
Printing and Checking the Repeat Run Work List

The system produces a repeat run work list. You can print this and use it to prepare the
repeat samples.
1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>Routine>Repeat Run>Repeat Order
to display the “Repeat Run: Repeat Order” screen.
2. For samples carried on each rack, select “Routine” or “Emergency” from the
“Sample Kind” drop-down list. For such samples that are on the STAT table,
select “STAT”.
4. Select any work list from the “Print Type” drop-down list.
This selection is possible when the corresponding item is included in the “Format”. If it is
impossible, proceed to Step 6.
5. Select any print format from the “Print Type” drop-down list.
6. Set the “Type” and “Search Sample ID” options.
7. Touch Print.
This will start printing the repeat run work list.
8. Check the contents of the printed repeat run work list. Perform the requisition of
repeat run according to the work list contents.

6.7.2 Performing a repeat test on the STAT table
When you want to make equal to or less than 5 samples subjected to repeat test
pressingly, use the STAT table. Observe the following procedure:
1. Extract the objective samples of repeat run (e.g. Serum, Urine, Other-1, or Other
-2) according to the contents of the repeat run work list.
2. Dispense the objective sample into the sample cup to be set on the STAT table.
3. Open the STAT table cover (S).
4. Set the sample cup of the objective sample on the STAT table according to the
contents of repeat run requisition.
5. Close the STAT table cover to its original position.
6. Operate in the same way as “6.5.1 Performing STAT Table Analysis” on page 6-32.
Do not set the objective sample cup of repeat test in the Calibration or QC position on
the STAT table that has been determined in advance as the factory default of this
CAUTION Analyzer.
6.7.3 Performing repeat test using an orange rack

You can reload samples using the orange rack:
1. Extract the objective samples of repeat run (e.g. Serum, Urine, Other-1, or Other-
2) according to the contents of the repeat run work list.
2. Set the sample cup of the objective sample on the orange rack according to the
contents of repeat run requisition.
3. Start the analysis operation.
This will start the analysis of the repeat sample.

6.7.4 Checking the repeat-test result data
Check the validity of the repeat-test result data. After checking the data before and after
the repeat test, overwrite the data before the repeat run with that after the repeat run.
Now the overwritten data can be printed out.
It is also possible to make up for automatically overwriting with the repeat run data.
TIP
For details on how to set for overwriting with the repeat test data, refer to “4.6.1 Repeat
run Parameter Setting” on page 4-43.
Overwriting the data

1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>Routine>Repeat Run>Repeat Data
Verification to display “Repeat Data Verification: Main tab” screen.
2. Touch Search (F3).

This brings up “Search” dialog.
3. Set the desired search condition.

4. Touch OK.
The list of “Repeat Data Verification: Main tab” screen will be updated.

5. Touch Sample tab or Test tab, and then select the repeat-test result to be
overwritten from the list.
6. Compare carefully between the displayed data before and after the repeat run.
7. Touch Overwritten by Repeat (F5).
The data before the repeat run will be overwritten with that after the repeat run.
If the data is overwritten, the previous data is no longer available.
CAUTION
Printing the overwritten data

Verification>Main to display the “Repeat Data Verification: Main tab” screen.

3. Select any print format from the “Print Format” drop-down list.
4. Touch OK.
Online Transfer of Overwritten Data

Verification>Mein to display the “Repeat Data Verification: Main tab” screen.
2. Touch Transfer to Host (F7).

This brings up the “Transfer to Host” dialog.

6.8 Forwarding the Data to Other PC
To send result data to another computer, operate as follows:
Manager>Sample>Main to display the “Sample: Main tab” screen.
2. Touch Data Search (F3).

This brings up the “Data Search” dialog.
3. Set the desired search key for online output.

4. After this setting, touch OK.
5. Touch Online Transfer (F7).
This brings up the “Online Transfer” dialog.
6. Touch OK.
This makes the data forwarded at a batch.

6.9 Pausing Analysis Operation
When reagent has to be added during analysis operation, it is possible to analyze the
test item presently being analyzed and then to pause analysis operation for the
remaining test items.
• Do not leave the system for a long time with stopped analysis operation. When the
system is left for a long time in paused condition, the concentration of the samples in the
CAUTION sample cups increases because of evaporation and the data are influenced.
• When the system is paused, do not remove racks from the system and do not add racks
at an intermediate position. This will cause a mismatch between the sample number in
the requisition information and the actual sample cup, making correct analysis
impossible.
Pausing Analysis Operation

1. Touch Pause on the “Home” screen during analysis operation.
This brings up the “Pause Execution” dialog.
2. Touch OK.
The system pause message is displayed.
Analysis operation continues when there are samples being analyzed. Pause is performed
when analysis of the samples being analyzed has been completed.
Do not touch the system immediately after execution of pause to replenish reagents etc.
as there is the possibility that reagent probes etc. may operate. Wait until it has been
CAUTION confirmed that analysis operation has ended and that the system has stopped.
Cancellation of pause status

At the time of analysis restart, analysis starts from the sample after the one being
analyzed at the time of pause.
1. Touch Analysis Start on the “Home” screen while analysis operation is paused.
The start dialog is displayed.
2. Touch start.
Analysis is restarted.

6.10 Rack Supply Stop
When an Emergency rack etc. is to be inserted during analysis operation, the rack feed
operation of the rack feeder on the feed side can be stopped.
Even when the operation is stopped, analysis operation continues for the racks already
fed by the rack feeder on the feed side.
Do not leave the system for a long time with stopped rack supply.
When the system is left for a long time in paused condition, the concentration of the
CAUTION
samples in the sample cups increases because of evaporation and the data are
influenced.
Stop the rack feeder

1. Touch Feeder Stop on the “Home” screen during analysis operation.
This brings up the “Feeder Stop Execution” dialog.
2. Touch OK.
The rack feed operation stop message is displayed. Analysis of the racks already
discharged from the rack feeder continues.
Analysis restart after feeder stop

At the time of analysis restart, analysis is started from the rack which was at the leading
position of the rack feeder on the feed side at the time of stop. Restart analysis after
requisition of added or inserted racks.
1. With the rack feeder on the feed side in stopped condition, perform the same
operation as for requisition for normal analysis.
For details on requisition for normal analysis, refer to “5.7 Sample Requisitions: Entering
Data and Choosing Tests” on page 5-40.
2. Perform starting analysis operation.

For details on starting analysis operation, refer to “6.1 Starting Analysis” on page 6-2.

6.11 System Shutdown
When the analysis of all the required samples is completed, shutdown the system
properly.
After this shutdown the temperatures of the reagent compartment, STAT table, and
reaction bath (incubator) of this Analyzer will be still maintained. Where the ISE (option)
has been installed, auto-wash will automatically take place periodically on the ISE.
This shutdown operation can also be attempted even while executing W2 or Photocal.
When the shutdown operation is executed during W2 or Photocal operation, the system
will be automatically shut down after the W2 or Photocal operation is completed.
To shut down the system:
1. Make sure that all the sample analyses are completed.
2. Touch Home.
The display returns to the “Home” screen.
3. Touch End or the END button on the keyboard.

This brings up the “End” dialog.
4. When “Auto Power On” setting of “System Condition” has been activated, select
“Set up Next on-time”, touch Setting, and then touch Confirm.
5. Touch Yes.
This starts the shutdown process to terminate the operation of the system as the standby
power of the Analyzer is turned to OFF.
6. Firmly tighten the main valve of the deionized water.
On this Analyzer it is not possible to control the main valve of the deionized
water. If you leave this Analyzer unmanned with the main valve of the deionized
WARNING water left open during night time or holiday for automatic execution of test, make
sure at the responsibility of the operator that the water supply piping has no
leaks in advance.
It is possible for the operator to set in such a way that the system will be automatically
started up at the specified date and time to automatically execute a desired operation
TIP
such as W1, etc.
For details on using the auto power on function, refer to “7.1 Using the Automatic Startup
Function” on page 7-2.

6.12 Analysis Stop (emergency stop)
When analysis operation is to be stopped immediately, this can be done with
emergency stop of analysis operation. When emergency stop is performed, all analysis
operations stop within 9 seconds.
• When emergency stop is performed, the data being analyzed cannot be used.
Analysis has to be repeated.
CAUTION • Do not perform end operation soon after emergency stop.
Reagent remains in the cuvettes after emergency stop that can cause system damage or
deterioration, unsuitable analysis results, etc.
Before performing end operation, perform analysis or W1.
Emergency stop of analysis operation

1. Touch Stop/Standby on the “Home” screen during analysis operation.
This brings up the “Emergency Stop Execution” dialog.
2. Touch OK.
The emergency stop execution message is displayed, all analysis operations are stopped,
and the system goes to stop mode.
3. Remove the racks on the rack feed path.
Reset operation after emergency stop

1. Touch Stop/Standby on the screen “Home” again in emergency stop condition
(Stop Mode).
The reset operation start dialog is displayed.
2. Touch OK.
System reset operation is performed. After completion of reset operation, the system goes
to standby mode or warm up mode.
3. Execute W1.
For details on W1 execution procedure, refer to “8.8.12 Executing W1 (auto-washing of the
sample probe and cuvettes)” on page 8-97.

6.13 Editing Quality Control Data
Search and editing can be performed for analyzed QC data. Search can be performed
in sample units or item units.
Editing of quality control data means forced change of results analyzed under constant
accuracy by operator. In order to prevent erroneous diagnosis because of large
CAUTION changes of the quality control data, editing shall be done carefully by a physician or the
person in charge of inspection.
When the result data of QC analysis have been edited, confirm that the edited data are
data within the cumulative period. If they are within the cumulative period, the editing
TIP
contents must be reflected in the cumulative values. To reflect the editing contents in
the cumulative values, update the cumulative values.
Searching for object data

Search for the data to be edited.
1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>QC>QC Data Review>Main to
display the “QC Data Review: Main tab” screen.
2. Select “Index” from the drop-down list.

3. Set “Search Sample No.”.
Enter in the range from 000 to 999.
4. After setting, touch Sample tab or Test tab.

Search starts at the time of touching. When there are display data, the search results are
displayed on the touched “Sample tab” screen or “Test tab” screen.
When there are no display data, a warning message is displayed. When “OK” is touched,
return is made to the “Main tab” screen.
5. Touch Edit (F1).

6. Edit the QC data.
7. Touch Index Comment (F3) if you want to add a comment to the QC data.
This brings up the “Index Comment” dialog.
8. Enter the comment.

When “Comment Master” is touched, selection can be made from the already registered
comments.
9. Touch OK.
The entered comment is registered. When “Cancel” is touched, the comment is not
registered and the dialog is closed.

10. If you want to add a comment by item, touch Comment by Item (F4).
This brings up the “Test Comment” dialog.
11. Enter the comment.

When “Comment Master” is touched, selection can be made from the already registered
comments.
12. Touch OK.

The entered comment is registered. When “Cancel” is touched, the comment is not
registered and the dialog is closed.
13. If excluding the analyze data from calculation object of statistic, touch Delete(F2).
When Delete (F2) function is performed, all analyze data of the sample number
selected in step 3 are excluded.
TIP
14. Touch OK.


6.14 Editing Analysis Data
6.14.1 Rewriting of Patient Sample Data. See page 6-59.
6.14.2 Correction of Patient Sample Data. See page 6-61.
6.14.3 Recalculation of Analysis Data Using a Changed Calibration Curve. See page 6-
63.
6.14.4 The edited data are transferred online. See page 6-64.
Patient sample analysis data and alarm flags can be edited. There are the following
three methods for editing of analysis data.
• Direct rewriting of analysis data
• Editing of analysis data using a correction formula
• Recalculation of analysis data using a changed calibration curve
When the analysis data have been corrected, the corrected data are displayed with the
data flag “e” indicating manual data correction.
Editing of result data means forced change of results analyzed under constant accuracy
by operator operation. In order to prevent erroneous diagnosis because of large
CAUTION changes of the result data, editing shall be done carefully by a physician or the person
in charge of inspection.

6.14.1 Rewriting of Patient Sample Data
A list of samples of the present index is displayed.
2. Touch the “sample No.” and select the sample to be edited.

To select all samples of the index, touch Select All.
3. To select other data, touch Data Search (F3).

This brings up the “Data Search” window.
4. Set the index of the patient data to be displayed and other search conditions from
the drop-down list.
5. Touch OK.
The window is closed and the analyzed data in the selected index are displayed in a
patient list.
6. Select the samples to be edited.

7. Touch Sample tab or Test tab.
Search starts at the time of touching.
When there are display data, the search results are displayed on the touched “Sample tab”
screen or “Test tab” screen.
8. Touch Edit (F1).

This screen is changed to editable.
9. Touch the sample to be edited to select it. For reference to the used reagent lot
etc., touch Detail Information (F5).
10. Edit “Result” or “Data Flags”.
The edited data are registered and the display returns to the reference screen.

6.14.2 Correction of Patient Sample Data
The correction formula Y = AX + B is used to correct the data of all samples in test units.
Y: Data after correction
X: Data before correction
A, B: An optional correction coefficient (9 digits, including sign and decimal point)

2. A list of samples of the present index is displayed.

3. To select other data, touch Data Search (F3).
This brings up the “Data Search” window.
4. Set the index of the patient data to be displayed and other search conditions from
the drop-down list.

5. Touch OK.
The window is closed and the analyzed data in the selected index are displayed in a
patient list.
6. Touch Data Correction (F6).

This brings up the “Data Correction” dialog.
7. Select the tests to be corrected or “ALL” from the drop-down list of “Test Name”
and touch Correction.
When a specific test has been selected, the window for setting a pair of coefficients A and
B opens.
When “ALL” has been selected, the window for setting the coefficients A and B for all tests
opens.
8. Enter the coefficients A and B, and touch OK.

The window is closed and return is made to the reference screen.

6.14.3 Recalculation of Analysis Data Using a Changed
Calibration Curve
Edit the calibration curve in advance according to “Calibration curve correction”.
2. Touch Recalculate Data(F5).

This brings up the “Recalculating” dialog.
3. Select the test to be recalculated from the drop-down list of “Test Name”.
4. Touch OK.
The analysis data are recalculated and rewritten.

6.14.4 The edited data are transferred online
To output online, it is only in the case of selecting “Batch Online” for “Result Transfer” on
“Online: Set Up” screen.
For details on editing online conditions, refer to “4.3.1 Editing online conditions” on page 4-
10.

2. Touch Online Transfer (F7).

This brings up the “Online Transfer” dialog.
3. Select the transfer range.

4. Touch OK.
Online transfer is performed.
Touch Online Transfer Stop (F7) to stop the transfer.

TIP

6.15 Confirming the ISE (option) status
In order to start an analysis with the ISE (option), an ISE calibration or cleaning should
be practiced in advance.
The operator is allowed to display the ISE calibration results as a list, display a slope
chart, check possibility of ISE selection, or execute its CRS calibration.
Checking calibration result

1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>Maintenance>User Maintenance>ISE
Maintenance>Calibration to display the “ISE Maintenance: Calibration tab” screen.
2. Select the sample type (Serum, Urine) from the drop-down list of “Type“.

Confirm the screen
• ISE status
The ISE operation mode is displayed.
Message Background color Meaning

READY Blue Ready to start analysis.
BUSY Red Analysis is in progress (ISE).
MEASURE Red Analysis is in progress (Except for ISE).
STOP Yellow The ISE is isolated.
INITIAL Yellow The ISE is initializing.
• Electrode status
Indicates whether the most recent slope value is within the normal value range.
Background color Meaning

Blue All electrodes have a slope value within the normal range.
Yellow Plural electrodes have a slope value out of the normal range, or have
no data.
• Reagent status
Indicates whether the amount of the buffer solution, MID solution, and REF solution
used for the ISE is sufficient.
Background color Meaning

Blue All reagents have sufficient remaining amount.
Yellow Plural reagents are short of remaining amount.
• Operated date
This is the date and time the calibration was executed.
• Slopes
Indicates the slopes of calibration regarding each of Na, K, and Cl. A larger slope
value indicates a steeper slope, i.e. a larger potential.
• MID Solution Factor
This is a value which is obtained based on the concentration of the MID liquid to
establish a reference for measuring Na, K, and Cl ion concentrations.
Checking slope chart

Records of slope values obtained from calibration can be referred to in the form of
polylines for each Na, K, and Cl.
1. Touch Slope Chart tab.
This brings up the “ISE: Slope Chart tab” screen.
The most recent 30 slope values will be displayed in a chart. At this time, slope charts of
Na, K, and Cl are identified by their specific color. Also, the display range lies in the slope
values from minimum to maximum.
In the left of the chart the maximum and minimum slope values of Na, K, and Cl are
displayed.
2. Select the sample type (Serum, Urine) from the drop-down list of “Type”.

Performing or checking selectivity check
1. Touch Selectivity Check tab.
This brings up the “ISE: Selectivity Check tab” screen.
A list of the most recent 30 selectivity check results will be displayed.
2. Touch Check Start.

This brings up the “Selectivity Check” dialog.
3. Touch OK.
4. Confirm the check results.
Any values judged as abnormal from this check will be displayed with a yellow
background.
• Operated date
Displays dates and times when selectivity checks were performed.
• Check concentrations
Displays the check solution concentration (Na, K) which were calculated from the results of
selectivity checks for each time.
• Allowable range
Displays the allowable range of check solution concentration.
Performing or checking CRS calibration

This will allow to see operation of performing CRS calibration, date of operate and
check result.
1. Touch CRS Calibration tab.
This brings up the “ISE: CRS Calibration tab” screen.
A list of the most recent 30 CRS calibration results will be displayed.
2. Touch Start.
This brings up the “CRS Calibration“dialog.
3. Touch OK.
4. Confirm the check results.
Any values judged as abnormal from this check will be displayed with a yellow
background.
• Operated date
Displays dates and times when CRS calibration were performed.
• Factor
Displays the factor A (Na, K, CI) and factor B which were calculated from the results of each
CRS calibration.
• Normal range of factor A
Displays the normal range (Upper limit to Lower limit) of ISE factor value.
5. To confirm the details, touch Detail Information (F5).

This brings up the “Detail Information” dialog.
6. After confirmation, touch OK.

6.16 Managing Regent Condition
This menu allows referring and editing remaining volume, expiration, etc. of the
reagents on the analyzer.
6.16.1 Checking Reagent Condition. See page 6-68.
6.16.2 Editing and Managing Reagent Condition. See page 6-71.
6.16.1 Checking Reagent Condition

1. From the AU860 “Home” screen select Menu > Routine > Reagent > Reagent
Management to display “Reagent management: Main tab” screen.

2. Check the reagent condition in the column at the upper left on the screen.
(1) (2) (3)
(4) (5) (6)
Display Color Contents

(1) Accessible Light blue Displays if reagent bottles can be set. (Reagent
Inaccessible Red Check (F5) is effective in “Accessible”.)
(2) Unchecked Red Displays implementation of reagent check.
Checking Red
Checked Light blue
(3) Progress bar - Displays the status of reagent check.
Display appears only in checking.
(4) No reagent Orange Necessity reagents for the current group are
missing.
Reagent short Yellow There is reagent(s) shorted.
No display Light blue Necessity reagents are set.
(5) - Displays the error level of the reagents in the
reagent1 refrigerator.
Red Level 1
Orange Level 2
Yellow Level 3
Light blue Normal (No error)
(6) - Same as above Displays the error level of the reagents in the
reagent2 refrigerator. (Display is the same as
above.)

3. Check the reagent status of each test
(1) (2) (3)
(4)
(5)
.
Display Color Contents

(1) Test name 1 - Test name, color item name and blank
item name registered in the round (*1).
(2) Test name 2 - In case of 2-tests/1-reagent, another test
name is displayed.
(3) Number of - The number of remaining shots or
shots, remaining vol. (ml) is displayed. The
Remaining vol. display can be changed alternately.
(4) Indicator - Remaining vol. is displayed in the indicator
(*2).
R1-1, R2-1 and R1-2 from top to bottom.
(5) Colors of the A display that works with (4) of the reagent
background condition of the step 2.
Orange Necessity reagents for the current group
are missing.
Yellow There is reagent(s) that gets shorted.
Light blue Necessity reagents are set.
*1: Regarding LIH, only the dedicated reagents are displayed. ISE are not displayed.
*2: When several bottles for multi reagent switch, advanced calibration, and auto-calibration
are set on the tray, the total volume is displayed with only one indicator.
4. To change the display of the remaining volume, select “Shot” or “Volume” from
the drop-down list of “Reagent Display” at the upper right on the screen.
5. To change the sample type to be displayed, select sample type from the drop-
down list of “Type” at the upper right on the screen.

6.16.2 Editing and Managing Reagent Condition
Check detailed information of reagents

1. From the AU860 “Home” screen select Menu > Routine > Reagent > Reagent
Management > Details to display “Reagent management: Details tab” screen.
Detailed information on the reagents such as onboard stability, expirations of RB and CAL,
orders of sequenced reagent bottle, etc. are displayed by test.
Display of “RB Stability Remaining (H)” and “CAL Stability Remaining (H)”
The remaining time is displayed in H (hours) up to 72 hours and in D (days) for over 72
hours. (Ex. 4D for 75 hours)
When “RB Stability Remaining” and “CAL Stability Remaining” are set for reagents of 2-
test/1-reagent, the stability remaining are displayed as “test with small item No./test with
large item No.”.
Display of “Volume”
The “Volume” are displayed by Number of shots.
2. Select Position from the drop-down list of “Reagent Display” to display in the
order of the bottle position on the reagent tray. And select R1 or R2 form the
drop-down list of “Content”.
3. Select sample type from the drop-down list of “Type” to change the kind of
samples.

Checking Reagent
This function checks the reagent remaining volume, reagent ID, etc. This function is
enabled only when “Accessible” has been displayed at the upper left on the screen.
1. Touch Reagent Check (F5) on “Reagent Management: Details tab” screen.

This brings up “Regent Check” dialog.
2. Select the check item to perform.

3. Touch Start.
Reagent checking operation starts.
4. When “Check Specified positions” has been selected, a dialog to select the
positions is displayed.
5. Touch the tests to be checked.
6. Touch OK.
Reagent checking operation starts.
7. After the reagent check completed, check the reagent status on “Reagent
Management: Main tab” screen or “Reagent Management: Details Tab” screen.
Setting Reagent Bottle information manually

1. Touch Edit (F1) on “Reagent Management: Details tab” screen.
This brings up “Reagent Edit” dialog.
2. Change the bottle position to edit by touching or .

3. Select test name, type and bottle size from the drop-down list.
4. Touch Close.
Settings are registered.
5. Confirm the settings on “Reagent Management: Main tab” screen or “Reagent

Management: Details Tab” screen.

Editing Reagent positions
This function sets the reagent positions to either the reagent ID reading position or the
fixed reagent position at which no reagent ID is read.
1. Touch Position Setting (F2) on “Reagent Management: Details tab” screen.

This brings up “Edit ID / Fix Reagent” dialog.
2. Change the reagent position to be edited by touching or .

Test name of the selected position is displayed
3. Select either “Reagent ID” or “Fixed Reagent”.

4. Touch Close.
Setting is registered.
5. Confirm the settings on “Reagent Management: Main tab” screen or “Reagent

Management: Details Tab” screen.
Editing Reagent ID
This function edits reagent ID of the bottle that the reagent ID error occurred.
The edited reagent ID is effective until when the reagent ID is read correctly in the next
reagent check. If the reagent ID error occurred again, the reagent ID edited here
remains effective.
1. Touch ID Edit (F3) on “Reagent Management: Details tab” screen.

This brings up “Edit Barcode ID” dialog.
The reagent position that failed to read ID and its ID are displayed.
2. Enter a correct ID.

3. Touch OK.
The ID entered is registered.

Reading Master Curve
This function reads the 2D barcode of the Olympus reagent with the handy scanner
(option) to read the master curve information.
When there is no master curve information, The comment “No Master Curve” is
displayed in a comment column on “Reagent Management: Main tab” screen.
This function needs the handy scanner (option). Contact Olympus Sales Department or
Service Department for the handy scanner.
1. Touch Read Master Curve (F4) on “Reagent Management: Details tab” screen.
This brings up “Master Curve” dialog.
2. Scan the 2D barcode with the handy scanner.

The ID read, corresponding test name and reagent lot number are displayed on the dialog.
3. Touch OK.
The scanned data is registered.

Reagent History
This function displays combination of the bottles on the tray, lot no. of each bottle, etc.
When you perform advance calibration, auto-calibration and sequence with the different
condition displayed here, delete the combination information of the bottles.
1. Touch Reagent History (F6) on “Reagent Management: Details tab” screen.

This brings up “Reagent History” dialog.
2. Select test you want to display from the drop-down list of Test Name.
3. In case of the normal test, the display changes between color item and blank item
alternately by touching or .
In case of HbA1c%, the display changes in HbA1c%, HbA1c and T-Hb alternately by
touching or .
4. When you delete the combination, touch Delete or All Delete.

This brings up confirmation message.
5. Touch OK.
Selected information is deleted.
6. Touch Close to close the dialog.

Checking information before reagent check
Check the previous reagent information before renewing the information by the last
reagent check. Check the bottle setting status when the bottle setting error occurred.
1. Touch Previous Setting (F7) on “Reagent Management: Details tab” screen.

This brings up “Previous Setting” dialog.
2. Select R1 or R2 from the drop-down list.

Reagent information is displayed.
3. Check the information and touch Close to close the dialog.
Initializing onboard stability

This function initializes onboard stability of the reagent at the fixed reagent position.
Initialize onboard stability when replacing the reagent bottles.

7
Additional Tasks
The chapter describes how to perform tasks

that can arise from time to time:
7.1 Using the Automatic Startup Function. See page 7-2.

7.2 Setting User Login. See page 7-4.
7.3 Creating a User Menu. See page 7-10.
7.4 Calculating Statistics. See page 7-12.
7.5 Calibration Verification. See page 7-19.
7.6 Using Comment Master. See page 7-22.
7.7 Data Management. See page 7-24.
7.8 Print the Set Contents. See page 7-31.
AU680 User Guide Version4.0 7. Additional Tasks 7-1

7.1 Using the Automatic Startup
Function
Approximately 20 minutes are required from power ON until analysis becomes possible.
It is possible to set the system for automatic start at a specified time on specified days
of the week.
• Periodic maintenance of the system is required to ensure its full performance.

• This function cannot open and close the water outlet main cock. It is left up to the
CAUTION judgment and responsibility of the user whether the water outlet main cock is to be left
open at night or on holidays.
For details on maintenance routine, refer to “8 Maintenance” on page 8-1.

Perform maintenance which requires that the system power is OFF before the system is
started automatically.
Edit
Set the time for Auto Power On of the system.
1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>System>System Condition>Auto
Power On to display the “System Condition: Auto Power On” screen.
The auto start up time is displayed as a list.
7-2 7. Additional Tasks AU680 User Guide Version4.0

2. Touch Edit (F1).
3. Select the check box of the day on which Auto Power On is desired.
4. Set the date and the time from the drop-down list.
5. If Auto Preparation is to be performed, select the “Auto Preparation” check box.
6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 for each day to be set.

7.2 Setting User Login
7.2.1 Setting User Name and Password. See page 7-4.
7.2.2 Delete. See page 7-6.
7.2.3 Setting Menu Access Level. See page 7-7.
7.2.4 Security Settings. See page 7-8.
Only authorized users should be allowed to use this system. To prevent unauthorized
personnel from using the system, enable logging in and assign each authorized user a
login name and password. Assign a level of access to each authorized user.
A maximum of 30 user names can be set.
7.2.1 Setting User Name and Password

1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>System>System Condition>Login
Condition>User Setting to display the “Login Condition: User Setting tab” screen.
User names and levels are displayed as a list.
2. Touch Edit (F1).

3. Touch Addition of User (F2).
This brings up the “Addition of User” dialog.
4. Enter the “User Name”.

Enter with differentiation between upper and lower case within 20 characters.
5. Enter the password to be entered newly in “Password”.
Enter with differentiation between upper and lower case within 20 characters.
Password is optional.
6. For confirmation, reenter the password entered in step 5 in “Confirm”.
7. Select the “User Level”.
Select within the range from 1 to 10 from the drop-down list.
A smaller value means a higher level permitting viewing and operation of more menus.
8. Touch OK.
9. Repeat steps 3 to 8 for each user.
11. Touch OK.
The functions which cannot be viewed and operated according to the user level of the
logged-in user are not displayed.
TIP
For details on setting the level of each menu, refer to “7.2.3 Setting Menu Access Level” on
page 7-7.
Changing User Name and Password

1. Touch Edit (F1).
2. Select the user name to be changed from the list of “Register user list”.
3. Touch Modify (F3).
This bring up the “Modify” dialog.
4. Change the “User Name”.

5. Select the check box of “Change”.
Password change becomes possible.
6. Enter the “Current password”.

7. Enter the “New password”.
8. For confirmation, reenter the password entered in step 7 in “Confirm”.
9. Change the “User Level”.
Select within the range from 1 to 10 from the drop-down list.
A smaller value means a higher level permitting viewing and operation of more menus.
10. Touch OK.

12. Touch OK.
When only the password for the presently logged-in user is to be changed, this can be
done from “System Condition: Password tab” screen.
TIP
7.2.2 Delete
1. Touch Edit (F1).
2. Select the user name to be deleted and touch Delete (F4).
The delete message is displayed.
3. Touch OK.
The user name is deleted.

5. Touch OK.
The registered contents are deleted.

7.2.3 Setting Menu Access Level
Only one user should have access to the parameters menus. This is menu level one.
You can add a maximum of 30 login names and 10 levels of access.
There are 10 menu levels from 1 to 10. 1 is the highest level and 10 is the lowest level.
The higher a menu level is, the more user can be restricted.
Use the following procedures for menu access level setting.
Condition>Access Level to display the “Login Condition: Access Level tab”
screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).

3. Select the menu item to be edited.
4. Set the menu level within the range from 1 to 10 from the drop-down list.
5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 until menu level setting has been completed.

7. Touch OK.
The setting contents are registered and the menu is closed. When there is any conflict
such that a superordinate menu has a higher access level than a subordinate menu, an
alarm window is displayed and the screen returns to the edit screen.
When setting menu levels, always set lower access levels for superordinate menus
than the menu levels of subordinate menus.
CAUTION
When a higher access level is set for a superordinate menu than that of a subordinate
menu, selection of the subordinate menu may not be possible.
7.2.4 Security Settings

Perform security settings such as an expiration date for a password and an automatic
screen lock function after a specified time to prevent an operation by unauthorized
persons, etc.
Security Settings
Condition>Security to display the “Login Condition: Security tab” screen.

2. Touch Edit (F1).
3. To set an expiration date for a password, select the check box of “Password
Expiration Date”.
4. Enter the effective number of days for the password.
5. For screen auto lock, select the check box of “Enable” of “Auto Lock”.
6. Select the waiting time until the auto lock function gets active from the drop-down
list.
Selection is possible from 5 to 60 minutes.
7. To enable the auto login function without input of a user name at the time of
system start, select the check box of “Auto Login”.
8. Select the user name for auto login from the drop-down list of “Auto Login User”.
10. Touch OK.
• The password expiration date is effective for all user names.
TIP • Auto login cannot be used when auto lock is enabled.

7.3 Creating a User Menu
The User menu function allows you to select up to 16 windows that you most frequently
use and create a shortcut to them in one menu, called the user menu. This enables you
to save time when using the system.
Edit
1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>System>User Menu to display the
“System: User Menu” screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).

This brings up the “User Menu Entry” dialog.
3. Select the screen to be registered on the user menu list from the drop-down list of
“Select Screen”.

4. Touch Decide.
The screen selection contents are decided.
5. Enter the customizing window name into the “Display Data”.

6. Touch Entry.
Delete in a Shortcut from the User Menu

You can remove a shortcut from a user menu:
1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>System>User Menu.
2. Touch Edit (F1).
This brings up the “User Menu Entry” dialog.
Select the screen to be deleted from the drop-down list of “Select Screen”.
3. Touch Delete.
The specified contents are deleted.

7.4 Calculating Statistics
You can access statistics in the following way:
7.4.1 Viewing Data Statistics. See page 7-12.
7.4.2 Creating a Correlation Chart. See page 7-16.
7.4.3 Selecting Histogram Data. See page 7-18.
7.4.1 Viewing Data Statistics

The Data Statistics function allows you to review key statistics of patient sample results
over a specified time period.
To select samples to be used to generate sample statistics:
1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>Routine>Data Monitor>Data
Statistics>Main to display the “Data Statistics: Main tab” screen.
2. Select the index range from the Index drop-down lists.

3. Select “Search all samples” or “Search the designated sample”.
4. Enter the search parameters such as type, sample No., sample ID, patient
information (sex, age range, Patient Information 1 to 6), etc.

5. Touch Statistics to display the “Data Statistics: Statistics tab” screen.
The data corresponding to the search range are displayed in the display format.
6. To sort the displayed data, touch Sorting List (F1).

This brings up the “Display Options” dialog.
7. Touch the item for which sorting is desired and touch OK.
The order of the displayed data changes.
8. Select the item to be displayed as a chart.

9. Touch Chart View to display the “Data Statistics: Chart View tab” screen.
The search result is displayed as a graph.
10. To change the graph display parameters, touch Graph Scale (F5).
This brings up the “Graph Scale” dialog.
11. Select “Number of Display” and “X Scale” and touch OK.

The graph display changes.

12. To see extracted data, touch Data View to display the “Data View tab” screen.
13. Touch Switch Display Item (F6).

The “Data Display Object” changes.

7.4.2 Creating a Correlation Chart
The Correlation Chart allows you to compare two tests on the same samples within a
specified time period.
To create a correlation chart:
1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>Routine>Data Monitor>Correlation
Chart>Main to display the “Correlation Chart: Main tab” screen.
2. Select the index range from the Index drop-down lists.

3. Set the respective Test Name for “X Axis Test Name” and “Y Axis Test Name”.
4. Select “Search all samples” or “Search the designated sample”.
5. Enter the search parameters such as sample kind, sample No., sample ID,
patient information (sex, age range, Patient Information 1 to 6), etc.
6. Touch Search (F5).
The chart display object samples are searched on the basis of the parameters specified in
steps 2 to 4.

7. If the correlation chart has data to be excluded, touch Data View to display the
“Data View tab” screen.
8. Move the cursor to the item to be excluded and select the item.
9. Touch Delete/Revival (F5).
The color of the item column changes and the item is deleted from the chart. If “Delete/
Revival (F5)” key is touched again, the item is restored.
10. Touch Chart View to display the “Correlation Chart: Chart View tab” screen.
The correlation chart is displayed.

11. To change the display size of the correlation chart, touch Display Parameter
Change (F5).
This brings up the “Change Axis” dialog.
• When “Auto” is selected, the correlation chart is displayed so that the range for display of all
data becomes a maximum.
• When “Manual” is selected, set a lower limit value and an upper limit value for the X axis and
the Y axis. Only the specified part of the correlation chart is displayed enlarged.
7.4.3 Selecting Histogram Data

Histograms allow you to display the results of a test within one index as bar charts. The
system calculates a mean, the standard deviation, the coefficient of variation and a
range and uses this information to generate the bar charts.
To select histogram data:
1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>Routine>Data Monitor>Data
Statistics>Histgram to display the “Data Statistics: Histgram tab” screen.
2. Select the index from the “Index” drop-down list and select a test name from the
“Test Name” drop-down list.
3. Select the sample type by selecting one of the check boxes on the left side of the
window.
4. Enter the range of sample numbers or the range of sample IDs (barcodes).
Enter an “*” to select all samples.
5. Touch Chart Display (F5) to view the chart. Data within the range of mean +/- 1
SD are displayed as a blue bar. Data outside of the mean +/- 1 SD are displayed
as a yellow bar.
6. If you want to change the size of the axis, touch Edit Axis (F5).
• If you want to change the axis manually, then you must decide the number of class intervals
to be displayed by selecting a number between 5 and 10, and then touch Manual.
• If you want the axis to be set automatically, touch Auto.
7. Touch Data Display (F6) to view the following list of information:

• Upper and lower limit, number of samples and a percentage for each class interval.
• Number of samples lower than the smallest class interval and this as a percentage of the
whole.
• Number of samples exceeding the largest class interval and this as a percentage of the
whole.
8. To print a histogram, touch Print (F3), then select Display Test (Only prints the
data you can see) or All Tests and touch OK.
9. Touch Exit (F2) twice to return to the main window.

7.5 Calibration Verification
A calibration verification graph displays the variance from true values calculated when
standard material is run on the system. You can plot up to three replicates of each test
level (maximum of six levels).
To perform a calibration verification, follow these steps:
7.5.1 Entering Material Parameters. See page 7-19.
7.5.2 Displaying the Verification Chart. See page 7-20.
7.5.1 Entering Material Parameters

You can enter information concerning the standard material:
Verification>Material Parameter to display the “Calibration Verification: Material
Parameter” screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).

The screen is changed to editable.
3. Select the test name from the drop-down list of the “Test Name”.
4. Select the type from the drop-down list of the “Type”.
5. Enter material name for the “Material Name” of the Level 1.

6. When the sample barcode is used, enter Material ID.
Enter up to three kinds within 20 characters.
7. Select the “Evaluate” check box to include the material for calibration verification.
Uncheck to exclude the registered material.
8. Enter the “Expected Value” and “Tolerance Value” (refer to the materials leaflet
for specifications).
9. Repeat from the step 5 to the step 8 for from level 2 to level 6 to register the
materials.
7.5.2 Displaying the Verification Chart

Once you have entered the data required, display the verification chart:
Verification>Calibration Verification>Select Sample to display the “Calibration
Verification: Select Sample tab” screen.
2. Select the index from the drop-down list of the “Index”.

3. Select the type from the drop-down list of the “Type”.
4. Select the test name from the drop-down list of the “Test Name”.
5. Enter Sample No. for the “S.No.”, enter registered Sample ID for the “S.ID”, or
touch ID Set (F6) which reads sample ID of the registered materials for
verification.

6. Touch Chart Display to display a graph of the observed versus the expected
values.
All specified levels are on this graph:
7. Change the “Material No.” on the upper right corner of the screen to refer to the
values of the other materials.
8. Verify the correlatively and reagent lots, and enter the information to “Analyst”
and “Note” as needed.
Enter within 20 characters to the “Analyst” and 60 characters to the “Note”.
9. Touch Confirm (F1) to register the settings and the screen returns to the
reference screen.
In the step 6, a warning dialog box appears when the objective verification materials are not
found. Touch OK to return to the step 5, and enter the correct verification materials.
TIP

7.6 Using Comment Master
You can enter a list of standard comments in the comment master. This provides you
with a list of standard comments that you can easily add where necessary, rather than
have to re-enter them manually each time they are needed.
If each menu item is executed, comments that have been registered in the Comment
Master are added to the target data.
To add a comment
1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>System>Comment Masters to
display the “System: Comment Masters” screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).

3. Select the comment attribute from the drop-down list “Attribute”.

4. Enter the “Comment”.
• If the “Attribute” is one of “Information 1” to “Information 6”, enter it as a string of max. 20
characters.
• If the “Attribute” is “other”, enter it as a string of max. 50 characters.
• When the “Attribute” is “not used”, the already entered comment information is kept, but new
entry is not possible.
The comments set as “Information-1” to “Infromation-6” in “Attribute” drop-down list will

be displayed in the “STAT Requisition: Sample” screen and “Format: Requisition
TIP
Format” screen. The attribute of the comments displayed in the “Sample” screen can be
selected in “Format: Requisition Format” drop-down list.
The comment set as “Others” in “Attribute” drop-down list will be displayed in screen
other than the “Sample” screen.


7.7 Data Management
7.7.1 External Data Management. See page 7-25.
7.7.2 Backup of Analysis Condition File. See page 7-27.
7.7.3 Off line conditions. See page 7-29.
Data can be stored in external storage devices as a backup in case recovery of analysis
data or analysis condition from the hard disk of the system should not be possible.
From this screen, analysis results can be transferred to an external storage device in
index units.
For details on setting conditions to save or output the analysis results, refer to “7.7.3 Off
line conditions” on page 7-29.

Transfer is possible to the following types of external storage devices.
• Floppy disk
• CD-R
• External storage devices connected by USB: Hard disk (option)
• Use only 2HD floppy disk. 2DD floppy disk cannot be used.
• Use only CD-R for the CD drive. CD-RW and DVD cannot be used.
CAUTION
Data which can be managed

The following sample types can be transferred.
• Patient samples (normal samples, emergency samples, STAT samples)
• Repeat Run samples
• RB samples, calibration samples, quality control samples
• Assorted analysis conditions

7.7.1 External Data Management
The following operations are in common for the “External Data Management: Patient
tab” screen, the “External Data Management: Repeat run tab” screen, and the “External
Data Management: QC/Cal. tab” screen.
Storage of patient samples (normal samples, emergency

samples, STAT samples)
1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>System>External Data
Management>External Data Management>Patient to display the “External Data
Management: Patient tab” screen.
2. Select the index from the “Index” drop-down list.

3. Select the check box of a sample to save data.
To display the emergency samples or STAT samples, touch .

TIP

4. Touch Execute (F7).
The “Data Output” dialog indicating data is now being searched appears.
After searching, the “Data Output” dialog appears to select External Memory Unit for
output.
5. Select media to output.

If selecting FD, a check box for format can be selected.
If formatting the FD, select the check box of “Format”.

TIP
6. Touch OK.
The “Data Output” dialog showing a confirmation message appears.
7. Touch OK.
Output starts.
A comment is displayed on the “Data Output” dialog to notify transaction progress.
A confirmation or warning message appears depending on transaction progress.

TIP A comment indicating output transaction is successfully complete appears on the “Data
Output” dialog.
8. Touch OK.
Go back to the “External Data Management: Patient tab” screen.
9. Touch OK.
For media connected by USB, go to the next step.
For other media, remove the media from data processor.
10. Touch Remove (F4).

This brings up the “Remove” dialog.
After transaction, the message showing complete of transaction appears on the dialog.
11. Touch OK.

Remove the media connected by USB.

7.7.2 Backup of Analysis Condition File
The system can input/output assorted condition setting files to an internal back up folder
or an external storage device.
Method of managing files

Management>File Management to display the “External Data Management: File
Management tab” screen.
2. Select file operation from “Operation”.

3. Touch File Select (F6).
This brings up the “File Select” dialog.
4. Select files for output.

5. Touch OK.
The contents selected on the step 4 and 5 are displayed on the “External Data
Management: File Management tab” screen.
6. Touch Execute (F7).

The “Execute” dialog appears to select media.

7. Select media for output.
If selecting media other than FD, go to the step 10.
If selecting FD, a check box for format can be selected.
If formatting the FD, select the check box of “Format”.

TIP
8. Touch OK.
The message showing complete of transaction appears on the “Execute” dialog.
9. Touch OK.
The transaction selected on the step 2 starts.
After transaction is complete, a complete message appears.
10. Touch OK.

This brings up the “External Data Management: File Management tab” screen.
11. Touch Remove (F4).

This brings up the “Remove” dialog.
After transaction, the message showing complete of transaction appears on the dialog.
12. Touch OK.

Remove the media connected by USB.

7.7.3 Off line conditions
The Offline Output function enables sample and patient information to be saved on
floppy disc for use on other computers. You can save data from normal, repeat or QC
and calibration analyses. Follow these procedures:
• Setting Common Conditions. See page 7-30.
• Data Output Conditions. See page 7-30.
Management>Offline Format>Common Condition to display the “Offline Format:
Common Condition” screen.

Setting Common Conditions
1. Touch Edit (F1).
The screen is changed to editable.
2. Set a Volume label of a device for data storage.

3. Select a name of analysis data storage folder and an analysis data storage
method from each drop-down list.
4. Select a name of a parameter storage folder from the drop-down list.
5. Select a field delimiter from the drop-down list.
6. Select the Format Type for FD and External Memory Unit from the drop-down list.
Set values are registered, and the screen goes back to the previous screen.
Data Output Conditions

Management>Offline Format>Data Output Condition to display the “Offline Format:
Data Output Condition” screen.
2. Touch Edit (F1).
The screen changes to editable.
3. Select output conditions from each drop-down list.

4. Touch Item Order (F5).
This brings up the “Item Order” dialog.
5. Select the tests for offline output.

6. Touch OK to return to the previous window.
Setting values are registered, and the screen changes to the previous.

7.8 Print the Set Contents
When Print(F8) is displayed on the screen, the set contents can be printed by a printer
(option).
1. Set paper to the printer (option) when the printer power indicator is not lit, turn on
the power to the printer.
2. Touch Print(F8).
This brings up the “Print Start” dialog. When “Start” dialog is displayed, go to step 4.
3. Set print option on the dialog.

4. Touch OK.
Printing starts.
To cancel printing, touch CANCEL during printing.

TIP

8
Maintenance
The maintenance frequency described in this

chapter is based on the analysis of
approximately less then 4,000 tests per day.
Laboratories might have to increase the
amount of maintenance required depending
upon number of tests and local environmental
conditions.
This chapter shows you how to keep your
system in good condition:
8.1 Using the Routine Maintenance Schedule. See page 8-2.

8.2 Maintenance Log. See page 8-3.
8.3 Daily Maintenance. See page 8-7.
8.4 Weekly Maintenance. See page 8-18.
8.5 Monthly Maintenance. See page 8-29.
8.6 Maintenance Every Three Months. See page 8-49.
8.7 Maintenance Performed Every Six Months. See page 8-61.
8.8 Maintenance Performed Yearly or As Necessary. See page 8-70.
8.9 Resetting the system when switched to the stop mode while
performing maintenance. See page 8-106.
8.10 Using the OSV (Option). See page 8-107.
8.11 AU680 Maintenance Schedule. See page 8-110.
Failure to perform user maintenance according to the instructions within this User
Guide can adversely affect system performance and might invalidate your service
CAUTION agreement.
AU680 User Guide Version4.0 8. Maintenance 8-1

8.1 Using the Routine Maintenance
Schedule
To ensure optimal performance, you should perform planned maintenance on the
system.
On “8.11 AU680 Maintenance Schedule” it is highly recommended that you place a tick
after each task when that task is completed.
8-2 8. Maintenance AU680 User Guide Version4.0

8.2 Maintenance Log
The Maintenance Log allows you to create a planned maintenance schedule by:
8.2.1 Adding a Maintenance Task. See page 8-3.
8.2.2 Updating the Maintenance Register. See page 8-4.
8.2.3 Viewing Maintenance History. See page 8-6.
8.2.1 Adding a Maintenance Task

You can add an additional user-defined task to the list of system mandated activities. To
add a maintenance task:
1. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Menu>Maintenance>User
Maintenance>Analyzer Maintenance>Maintenance to display the “Analyzer
Maintenance: Maintenance tab” screen.
“Single Operation” buttons
2. Select the next free position from the maintenance activity list.

3. Touch Maintenance Edit (F1).
This brings up the “Item Edit” dialog.
4. Enter the work name in the “Maintenance” column.

5. Select the unit of execution interval from the “Frequency” drop-down list and
enter the interval value (1 to 180) with the keyboard in the field.
The upper limit of the operation interval for each maintenance is displayed in “Limit”.
TIP Specify a value of “Period” within the range based on “Limit”.
6. Touch OK.
This registers the settings entered.
8.2.2 Updating the Maintenance Register

After performing maintenance tasks, you should update the corresponding maintenance
records.
2. Select the maintenance task you performed from the displayed list.
3. Touch Update.
This brings up a dialog to prompt the operator to confirm the update result of execution
date.

4. Touch OK.
This automatically enters the current date on the maintenance task and sets the next due
date.
If the update in step 3 and 4 is not performed after performing maintenance, moving on
to other operation or screen may be impossible.
TIP

8.2.3 Viewing Maintenance History
The system keeps track of the previous ten completed maintenance tasks.
To view maintenance history for an item:
2. Touch to select the maintenance task to be checked in the work list.

3. Touch Maintenance History (F2).
As the “Maintenance History” dialog is displayed, the last ten maintenance dates and the
next due date and the User Name are displayed.
4. Touch OK.
This restores the previous “Analyzer Maintenance: Maintenance tab” screen.

8.3 Daily Maintenance
To obtain the highest performance from your system and to use it safely, be sure to
perform the following maintenance work daily.
Record
• Record the maintenance you have done in the “Maintenance Schedule”.
• After performing maintenance tasks, select the performed maintenance task from list
displayed on “Analyzer Maintenance: Maintenance” screen and update performed
date. For details on updating the maintenance record, refer to “8.2.2 Updating the
Maintenance Register” on page 8-4.
Maintenance routines
To obtain the highest performance from your system and to use it safely, be sure to
perform the following maintenance tasks daily.
If ON (sub-power) is off, we recommend these maintenances are performed before
power is on.
8.3.1 Checking for any leak from sample dispenser, reagent dispenser, and wash
water dispenser. See page 8-7.
8.3.2 Checking for any leak from detergent rolling pump unit. See page 8-10.
8.3.3 Checking the quantity of master detergent and supplying it. See page 8-12.
After the power is on

8.3.4 Checking and cleaning the sample probe, reagent probe, and mixing bar. See
page 8-14.
8.3.5 Checking the Printer and Paper. See page 8-17.
Always wear personal protective equipment when performing any maintenance

procedure. For considerations other than infection, observe the respective “WARNING”
CAUTION and “CAUTION” described in the main text.
8.3.1 Checking for any leak from sample dispenser,

reagent dispenser, and wash water dispenser
The sample dispenser and the reagent dispenser serve to dispense a small amount of
sample or reagent accurately. If any leak exists on the dispenser, the dispense amount
of sample or reagent may become incorrect or any other trouble may occur on the
dispenser concerned. To prevent this trouble, be sure to check the sample dispenser
and regent dispenser for any leaks before starting your daily analysis operation.
The wash water dispenser pushes out the wash water inside the probe. If any liquid
leaks from the wash syringe, the washing operation may not be sufficient or the syringe
drive unit may cause a malfunction. Therefore, always check the wash syringe for any
leaks before starting your daily analysis operation.

Procedure for checking for any leak from sample dispenser,
reagent dispenser, and wash water dispenser
Use an identical way for checking the sample dispenser, reagent dispenser, and wash
water dispenser.
Materials Needed:
• Clean dry cloth
• Absorbent paper
1. Check that the system is in the Warm up mode or Standby mode.

Reagent dispenser
Fixing nut
Fixing screw
Case head Reagent dispenser
Syringe case of ISE
Piston fixing screw
Sample
dispenser
Wash
water
syringe
Possible leakage locations

3. Visually check the case head for any crack.
Replace the case head, if any crack is found on it. After the replacement proceed to step 8.
Exercise care so that the syringe case is not contaminated with any strong alkali such
as AU detergent alkali, etc. If the syringe case is contaminated with a strong alkali, it
CAUTION may be, for example, broken.
Should it contact with a strong alkali, remove the syringe case and flush off the
contamination.
For details on replacing the syringe, refer to “8.8.7 Replacing syringes” on page 8-85.
4. Feel the bottom part of the syringe case, the contact part of the case head and
syringe case, and the fixing screw part with a dry cloth or absorbent paper to
check for any leaks from them.
If any leak is found, wipe around the syringe case with a clean dry cloth.
If your finger comes in contact with any wetness, immediately and thoroughly wash it
with water.
CAUTION
5. Determine whether or not the case head is loose by turning the syringe case with
your fingers.
• If loosen, turn the syringe case clockwise against the case head to tighten them.
• If a leak previously happened, make sure the bottom part of the syringe, etc. to see if any
more leaks happen after 5 minutes are passed since tightened the items.
6. Determine whether or not two fixing screws, a fixing nut, and a piston fixing screw
on a dispenser are loose.
If loosen, turn those items to firmly tighten them. If a leak previously happened, make sure
the bottom part of the syringe, etc. to see if any more leaks happen after 5 minutes are
passed since tightened the items.
7. Visually check the inside of the syringe case for any leak.
If there is a leak, replace the syringe. Then, advance to step 8.
If any leak persists even after the loosened portion has been re-tightened, replace the
syringe with a new one.
CAUTION
For details on replacement of syringe, refer to “8.8.7 Replacing syringes” on page 8-85.
After turning the system power on by pressing the ON button, update the performed
date by touching Inspect sample syringe for leaks, Inspect reagent syringe for
TIP
leaks, and Inspect wash syringe for leaks on the “Analyzer Maintenance:
Maintenance tab” screen.
For details on updating the maintenance date, refer to “8.2.2 Updating the Maintenance
Register” on page 8-4.

8.3.2 Checking for any leak from detergent rolling pump
unit
The detergent rolling pump is a pump for feeding the required amount of master
detergent to the diluted detergent solution. If any leak exists on the detergent rolling
pump, the dilution rate of detergent solution may become incorrect or any trouble
occurs in the detergent rolling pump itself. Therefore, always check the detergent rolling
pump for any leaks before starting your daily analysis operation.
Procedure for checking for any leak from detergent rolling

pump unit
Materials Needed:
Clean dry cloth

2. Open the left front door of the analyzer.
Rolling tube
Detergent
rolling pump
Connectors
If your finger is contaminated with the liquid, immediately wash with water thoroughly.
The detergent rolling pump serves to dispense the master solution of alkaline
CAUTION detergent.
3. Visually check the detergent rolling tube for any crack, etc.
If any crack is found on it replace the detergent rolling tube. After the replacement proceed
to step 6.
4. Feel the peripheral part of the detergent rolling pump and the detergent rolling
tube with a clean dry cloth to check for any leaks from them.
If any leak is found, wipe off the liquid with a clean dry cloth.
5. Try to turn the connector of the detergent rolling tube with your fingers to check if
it is loose.
If it is found to be loose, turn the connector of the detergent rolling tube clockwise to
tighten the connector. In five minutes after tightening it to remedy a leak, if any, check the
detergent rolling tube again for any more leaks.

6. Close the left front door of the analyzer.
If any leak persists even after the loosened portion has been re-tightened, replace the
detergent rolling tube with a new one.
CAUTION
For details on replacement of detergent rolling tube, refer to “8.6.5 Replacing the Detergent
Rolling Tube” on page 8-58.
date by touching Inspect Pump Roller for leaks on the “Analyzer Maintenance:
TIP

8.3.3 Checking the quantity of master detergent and
supplying it
If the master detergent level is low, then the analysis operation may be interrupted.
Therefore, always check whether the quantity of the master detergent tank is sufficient
before starting your daily analysis operation. If it is low, supply the master detergent.
Procedure for checking the master detergent level

Materials Needed:
• Master detergent: Wash solution
• Clean dry cloth

Master detergent tank
3. Visually check the master detergent level in the master detergent tank.
Make sure that the master detergent quantity is approximately 1 L in the master detergent
tank.
A reference consumption of master detergent is generally 0.5 L/day for the case of 4,000
tests per day.
Consulting the above described consumption rate and the measure line mark inscribed on
the tank, judge the necessity of further supplying the master detergent. Make sure that the
detergent is used properly.

Supplying the master detergent
If the master detergent is insufficient, supply it properly.
• When you are going to remove the master detergent cap, wear rubber gloves in advance
to prevent your hand from being contaminated with the master detergent. If your hands or
WARNING clothes are contaminated with the detergent, immediately wash with water. If the
detergent comes into contact with your eyes or mouth, immediately flush with water and
consult a doctor.
• If the master detergent splashed or accidentally spilt over the outside, wipe the stained
area with a dry cloth or paper after absolutely wearing rubber gloves. If any contamination
is left untreated, it may cause a toxic gas to generate or any part of the Analyzer to
corrode.
1. Shut down the system touching End that the sub-power of the system is off.
2. Disconnect the connector of the level sensor (869).
In this operation do not apply excess tension to the level sensor cable.
3. Disconnect the connector of the supply tube and the rolling tube.
4. Using the handle of the master detergent tank with keeping the cap tighten, pull
out the tank.
Do not drop it from analyzer main unit.
5. Loosen the cap of the master detergent tank, then pull out the level sensor and
the cap.
Dripping may occur when the level sensor is removed from the tank. If it does, wipe the
stained area with a dry cloth, etc. after absolutely wearing rubber gloves.
CAUTION
Connector
Connector
of the rolling tube
of the level
sensor
Master
detergent
tank
6. Supply the master detergent in the master detergent tank.

The master detergent tank capacity is 2 L. Add an appropriate quantity of master detergent
assuming that the graduation (2 L) inscribed at the uppermost on the front side of the tank
surface is the upper limit.
7. Tighten the cap.

8. Insert the level sensor again and replace the master detergent tank in the original
position.
9. Re-connect the connector of the level sensor to the original position (869).
10. Re-connect the connector of the supply tube to the rolling tube.
After turning the system power to on by pressing the ON button, update the performed
date by touching Inspect concentrated wash solution level on the “Analyzer
TIP
8.3.4 Checking and cleaning the sample probe, reagent

probe, and mixing bar
If there is any of the sample probe, reagent probe, and mixing bar is subject to
abnormal conditions, a proper analysis operation may not be successfully achieved.
Every day before starting your analysis work always check whether the sample probe
and reagent probe are clogged with anything or whether the sample probe, reagent
probe or mixing bar can operate normally. In addition, check the outside surface of each
unit for any contaminants or crystallization and undertake cleaning as necessary.
Cleaning the sample probe, reagent probe, and mixing bar


4. Touch to select the item to check or clean from the list of maintenance items, then
touch the related button from the “Single Operation” buttons.
The items to be The list of Single Operation button

checked or cleaned maintenance items
Sample probe Inspect & clean sample probe Replacing Sample Probe
Reagent probe Inspect & clean reagent probe Replacing Reagent Probe/
Syringe
Mixing bar Inspect & clean mix bars Replacing Mixing Bar
5. Set number of performing and touch OK.
The items to be The items to be set

checked or cleaned
Sample probe The number of times the wash water is drained: 3 or more
Reagent probe • The kind of the reagent probe: R1 or R2
• The number of times the wash water is drained: 3 or more
Mixing bar • The kind of the mixing bar: The First Mixer and The Second Mixer
• The number of operation: 3 or more
6. Press the TABLE ROTATION/DIAG button.
The items to be Operation

checked or cleaned
Sample probe The water will be ejected from each probe tip. Check that the water is
Reagent probe ejected straight and like a string. If the water is sprayed or is not ejected
straight from any probe tip, wash the probe.
Mixing bar The mixing unit rotates and moves up and down, and they will be
cleaned with diluted detergent and water.
OK NG
After probe been wash, if water stream still spread or is not straight, replace the probe
concerned.
CAUTION
For details on replacing sample probe and reagent probes, refer to “8.8.4 Replacing
Sample Probe and Reagent Probes” on page 8-76.
7. After checking and cleaning has completed, touch Update.

date.
8. Touch OK.
9. Close the main cover.

Checking for damage, deterioration, and operation of the
sample probe, reagent probe, and mixing bar
1. Visually check if the sample probe, reagent probe or mixing bar is bent or
damaged.
If any of the sample probe, reagent probe and mixing bar is bent or damaged, replace it
with new one.
• For details on replacement of sample probe and reagent probe, refer to “8.8.4 Replacing
Sample Probe and Reagent Probes” on page 8-76.
• For details on replacement of mixing bar, refer to “8.8.5 Replacing Mixing Bars” on page 8-
79.
2. Press the ON button to turn the system power to on.

This makes the initialization process begin.
When the Analyzer has already started up, touch Stop/Standby in the “Home” screen.
This enters the Stop mode.
TIP
Next touch Stop/Standby in the “Home” screen again.
This makes the initialization process begin.
3. Make sure that the sample probe, regent probe and mixing bar do not touch the
hole of the wash station during the initialization.
When any of the sample probe, reagent probe or mixing bar does not fit correctly in the
hole of the wash station, a system trouble can be suspected. If this is the case, contact an
Olympus service department.
Cleaning the sample probe, reagent probe, and mixing bar.

Clean any contaminants or crystallization adhered on the sample probe, reagent probe,
and mixing bar properly.
Materials Needed:
• Ethyl alcohol (Ethanol)
• Clean cloth or absorbent paper
Exercise care so that the sample probe, reagent probe or mixing bar is not bent during
cleaning.
CAUTION
Wipe the outside surface of the sample probe, reagent probe or mixing bar with a clean
cloth or absorbent paper soaked in ethyl alcohol (ethanol).

8.3.5 Checking the Printer and Paper
Before starting daily analysis, be sure to check that a sufficient amount of printer paper
is loaded, and that the printer power indicator and “Print-enable” LED are lit.
For information about how to use the printer, refer to “Printer Operation Manual”
supplied with the printer.
date by touching Inspect printer & paper on the “Analyzer Maintenance:
TIP

8.4 Weekly Maintenance
Record
• Record the maintenance actions you have done in the “Maintenance Schedule”.
Perform the following tasks every week:
8.4.1 Manual cleaning the sample probe and mixing bars. See page 8-19.
8.4.2 Execution of W2 (Automatic washing of each probe, mixing bar, and cuvette,
etc.). See page 8-22.
8.4.3 Execution of Photocal measurement. See page 8-25.
8.4.4 Cleaning the sample pre-diluent bottle. See page 8-28.

procedure. For consideration of other than infection, observe the respective
CAUTION “WARNING” and “CAUTION” described in the main text.

8.4.1 Manual cleaning the sample probe and mixing bars
If the sample probes and mixing bars are stained, contamination between samples and
contamination between reagents may occur, and thus correct analysis results will not
CAUTION be obtained.
To prevent contamination between samples or contamination between reagents, wash
the sample probes and mixing bars every week.
Procedure for Washing Sample Probe

To wash the sample observe the following procedure.
Materials Needed:
• Mandolin string (Standard accessory)

Maintenancer>Analyzer Maintenance>Maintenance to display the “Analyzer
4. Touch to select Manual Washing Sample Probe from the list of maintenance
items.
5. Touch Replacing Sample Probe from the “Single Operation” buttons.
This brings up the “Start” dialog.
6. Enter 3 or more as the number of times the wash water is drained and touch OK.

Liquid will be drained from the sample probe, and the sample probe will be washed.
8. Disconnect the probe connector.
If handling the sample probe, do not bend or damage the probe tip.
CAUTION
9. While holding the connecting part with the probe connector by hand, pull the
probe upward.
Discard the water of the probe into the wash station well.
Probe connector
Reagent2
probe
Reagent1 probe
Sample probe
10. Wipe off the contamination on whole probe with a clean cloth or absorbent paper
damped with ethyl alcohol (ethanol).
11. Insert the supplied mandolin string into the nozzles from the probe tip to clean the
nozzles.
12. Plug the probe into its original place from the top.
13. Tighten the probe connectors to secure each probe. Tighten the connectors firmly
to ensure that no liquid leaks from the joints.
The water will be ejected from the probe tip. Check that the water is ejected straight and
like a string.
If the water is sprayed widely or is not ejecting straight from the probe tip, replace the
probe.
15. Touch Update.

date.
16. Touch OK.

For information about how to replace the sample probe and reagent probes, refer to “8.8.4
Replacing Sample Probe and Reagent Probes” on page 8-76.

Procedure for Washing the Mixing Bars
Materials Needed:
1. Pull nine mixing bars upward from the two mixing units.
Mixing unit
Mixing bar
Mixing unit
2. Gently wipe off the stains on the nine mixing bars with a clean cloth or absorbent
paper damped with ethyl alcohol (ethanol).
When inserting the mixing bars into the mixing unit, exercise care so as not to
scratch the bars.
CAUTION
3. Insert the nine mixing bars into their original places from the top. Rotate each
inserted mixing bar slightly, then engage the notch on the mixing bar with the
gear in the hole on the mixing unit.
5. Touch to select Clean mix bar from the list of maintenance items.
6. Touch Replacing Mixing Bar from the “Single Operation” buttons.
7. Select the mixing unit to be washed, enter 3 or more as the number of times the
wash water is drained and touch OK.
9. Touch Update.
date.

10. Touch OK.
Insert the three L-shaped mixing bars into the front-side mixing unit, and the six spiral
shaped mixing bars in the rear-side mixing unit.
TIP
8.4.2 Execution of W2 (Automatic washing of each

probe, mixing bar, and cuvette, etc.)
As the sample probe, reagent probe, mixing bar and cuvette are contaminated after
frequent operation, appropriate analysis results will not be obtained.
To rectify this problem first execute W2 that is used to automatically wash cuvettes, etc.
with detergent, and then execute photocal measurement to check if there is any cuvette
still contaminated. Such cuvettes that show an abnormal value in the photocal
measurement shall be washed more or replaced with new ones.
For details on execution of photocal measurement, refer to “8.4.3 Execution of Photocal
measurement” on page 8-25.
Procedure for executing W2 (Automatic washing of each

probe, mixing bar, and cuvette, etc.)
It takes about 30 minutes from start to finish of W2.
For W2 use an acidic detergent or alkaline detergent every other week. Kind of
contamination to be removed will vary depending on the type of detergent. Acid
detergent removes a very small quantity of inorganic substance such as metallic ions or
organic substance in the reagent or remaining reagent being used. Alkaline detergent
removes stains that are formed by proteins contained in the serum to be tested.
• For W2 an acidic detergent and alkaline detergent should be used alternately every other
weeks. When you execute W2, do not confuse the detergent to be used.
WARNING In addition, do not mix the acidic detergent with the alkaline detergent. Doing so has a risk
of generating a toxic gas. To avoid such a risk, exercise care so that the acidic detergent
may not be mixed with the alkaline detergent, for example, by preparing the specific
container for each of them and clearly describing each name on the corresponding
container.
• For W2, prepare a 1 N concentration of hydrochloric acid as the acidic detergent and a
sodium hypochlorite solution with a 0.5% effective concentration of chlorine as the
alkaline detergent. Do not keep the old Sodium hypochlorite solution with a 0.5% effective
concentration of chlorine. Make a new Sodium hypochlorite solution for each washing
procedure.
Exercise care for the following points:
• Exercise great care so your hands or clothing do not come into contact with the detergent.
If your hands or clothing come into contact with the detergent, immediately wash it off with
water. If the detergent comes into contact with your eyes or mouth, immediately rinse with
water and consult a doctor.
• Do not spill the detergent on the system.
If the detergent is accidentally spilt on the system, wipe the stained area with a cloth or
paper dampened with a sufficient amount of water, and then wipe two to three times with
a dry cloth or paper.

Materials Needed:
• Detergent bottle:
60 mL reagent bottle, 3 bottles
• Detergent solution:
Approx. 180 mL of hydrochloric acid with a concentration of 1 N or approx. 180 mL of
sodium hypochlorite solution with a 0.5% effective concentration of chlorine.
1. Fill one reagent bottle for detergent with either solution of hydrochloric acid or
sodium hypochlorite.
• On last time, if hydrochloric acid has been used, put sodium hypochlorite in another alkaline
detergent bottle.
• On last time, if sodium hypochlorite has been used, put hydrochloric acid in another acidic
detergent bottle.
2. Lift up the main cover and set the reagent bottle filled with approx. 60 mL or more
of the prepared detergent in the W2 bottle setting position.
W2 bottle setting position

W2 bottles setting position
Do not spill the detergent over the surroundings when handing the reagent bottle. If the
detergent is accidentally split on the system, wipe the stained area with a cloth or paper
CAUTION dampened with a sufficient amount of water. Then, wipe the area two to three times with
a dry cloth or paper.

W2
5. Touch W2 (F6).
This brings up the “W2 Start” dialog.
6. When performing the photocal after W2 ends, select the check box of “After W2
ends, perform the photocal”. When ISE (option) is installed and performing ISE
cleaning, select the check box of “ISE Cleaning”. Place neat Cleaning Solution in
the CLEAN position of the STAT table if an ISE Cleaning is combined with W2.

7. Touch Start.
The W2 operation will start. It will be completed in about 30 minutes. In case of performing
the photocal after W2 ends, it will be completed in about 60 minutes.
A gas may be generated from a reagent bottle for detergent. After the W2 is completed,
remove the reagent bottle for detergent from this system immediately.
CAUTION
8. After the W2 is completed, immediately take the reagent bottle for detergent out
of the system. The maintenance list will be updated automatically.
Next, execute the photocal measurement.
For information on execution of Photocal, refer to “8.4.3 Execution of Photocal
8.4.3 Execution of Photocal measurement

After you have washed or replaced a cuvette, always check the cuvette for any
abnormal condition by executing the photocal measurement.
It is also necessary to execute photocal measurement when defective photometry is
generated.
After the photocal measurement has been executed, always check the measurements
on the screen. Such cuvettes that show an abnormal value in the photocal
measurement shall be washed more or replaced with new ones.
Procedure for executing Photocal measurement
To obtain optimal analysis results always perform photocal measurement only when the
photometer lamp has been stabilized after the system startup. The photometer lamp
CAUTION needs about 20 minutes to be stabilized after the system started up.

Photocal
2. Touch Photocal (F7).

This brings up the “Photocal Start” dialog.
3. To measure all cuvettes, select “ALL Cuvettes”. To measure specific cuvettes,

select “Cuvettes No.” and enter cuvette No. that is going to be measured.
4. Touch OK.
The photocal measurement will start. It will be completed in about 30 minutes.
The system will automatically move to the Standby mode after the photocal measurement
has been completed. The maintenance list will be updated automatically.

Procedure for checking the Photocal measurement
Materials Needed:
Lens cleaning paper

Maintenance>Analyzer Maintenance>Photocal Monitor to display the “Analyzer
Maintenance: Photocal Monitor tab” screen.
Cuvettes numbers will be listed on the screen.
2. Check the objective cuvettes for any error by the display color of each cuvette
number.
• Green: Cuvette check
This is to check on the scratch and the fingerprint of each cuvette. The absorbance of each
cuvette is measured by all wavelength.
Instruments checks whether difference of the absorbance mean value between the first half
part and the latter half part is within 0.01 Abs.
• Red: Mean Check
Instrument checks whether the difference between the value of each cuvette and the mean
value of all cuvettes at the Photocal is 0.03 Abs or less.
Remove the cuvettes with error indication, and wipe their photometric surfaces carefully with
lens cleaning paper. If the same error occurs even after the surface is wiped, replace the
cuvette with a new one.
• Amber: Lamp Check
This is to check a condition of the lamp the passing time.
• First of all, the mean value of the absorbance of each wavelength of all cuvettes is
measured.
Instrument checks whether the mean value of the each wavelength is 1.7 Abs or
less.
• The mean value of the Photocal value of all cuvettes immediately after the
replacement of the lamp is memorized as a reference value.
Instrument checks whether the difference between the mean value and the
reference value at the Photocal is 0.1 Abs or less.

Replace the lamp when the lamp check error occurs for all cuvettes.
When the lamp check error and the cuvette check error occur at the same time, or when
the lamp check error and the mean check error occur at the same time, remove the
cuvettes with error indication, and then wipe their photometric surfaces carefully with a
lens cleaning paper. If the same error still occurs even after the surface is wiped, replace
the cuvette with a new one.
For details on removal and replacement of cuvette, refer to “8.8.2 Replacing cuvettes” on
page 8-73.
8.4.4 Cleaning the sample pre-diluent bottle

If the sample diluent (for example, physiological saline solution or deionized water, etc.)
is continuously used without the sample pre-diluent bottle being washed appropriately,
germs and bacteria will grow in the sample pre-diluent bottle, resulting in defective data.
To also maintain the reliability of analysis data, wash the sample pre-diluent bottle every
week.
Procedure for cleaning the sample pre-diluent bottle

Materials Needed:
• Sample diluent (e.g. physiological saline solution or deionized water)
• Sodium hypochlorite solution with an effective chlorine concentration of 0.5%
Procedure before testing

Before starting the analysis, it is recommended to rinse the sample pre-diluent bottle
with the sample diluent (for example, physiological saline solution or deionized water,
etc.) and to wash the whole in the diluent, and then to fill the bottle with new sample pre-
diluent solution.
Weekly washing
Wash the sample pre-diluent bottle in a sodium hypochlorite solution with an effective
chlorine concentration of 0.5% every week.
date by touching Clean sample Pre-diluent bottle on the “Analyzer Maintenance:
TIP

8.5 Monthly Maintenance
Record
Perform the following tasks every month:
8.5.1 Cleaning the Sample Probe and Reagent Probe Wash Stations. See page 8-30.
8.5.2 Cleaning the HbA1c probe wash station. See page 8-32.
8.5.3 Cleaning the Mixing Bar Wash Station. See page 8-35.
8.5.4 Cleaning the wash nozzle unit and checking the tube mounting joints. See
page 8-37.
8.5.5 Cleaning the Deionized Water Filter. See page 8-43.
8.5.6 Cleaning the Sample Probe Filter. See page 8-46.


8.5.1 Cleaning the Sample Probe and Reagent Probe
Wash Stations
If the sample probe wash station and reagent probe wash stations have not been
cleaned for an extended period of time, probes will be clogged with foreign matter,
resulting in a loss of cleaning capability. This may contaminate the probes and therefore
degrade the reliability of analysis data. In addition, samples also have the potential of
being contaminated by the stained sample probe. To maintain the reliability of analysis
data and prevent samples from being contaminated, clean the wash stations every
month.
Procedures for Cleaning the Sample Probe and Reagent Probe

Wash Stations
Materials Needed:
• Sodium hypochlorite solution with an effective chlorine of approx. 0.5%
• Cotton swab
• Pipette or injector


4. Touch to select the item to be washed from the list of maintenance items. And
The items The list of Single Operation button

to be washed maintenance items
Sample probe wash Clean sample probe wash well Cleaning Wash Tank
station
Reagent probe wash Clean reagent probe wash well
station
With the following operation the sample probe and reagent probes will move. Do not
touch the moving sample probe and reagent probes.
CAUTION
This makes the sample probe and reagent probes move to the position of the cuvette.
• Do not spill the sodium hypochlorite solution outside the wash station. If it has been
spilled, immediately wipe it off.
CAUTION • While cleaning the inside of the wash station using a cotton swab, do not touch the tip of
the sample probe or reagent probes. If you accidentally touch any probe tip, you may get
hurt on your fingers or the probe may be bent or damaged.
6. While pouring 1 or 2 mL sodium hypochlorite solution into the sample probe wash
station and reagent probe wash station using a pipette or a injector, clean the
inside of each wash station with a cotton swab.
Reagent probe
Sample probe
Reagent probe
wash station
TABLE ROTATION/DIAG button Sample probe wash station
7. Touch the related button from the “Single Operation” buttons.
The item to be washed Single Operation buttons

Sample probe wash station Replacing Sample Probe
Reagent probe wash station Replacing Reagent Probe/Syringe

8. Enter 3 or more as the number of times the wash water is drained for each probe
and touch OK.
The wash water will be sprayed in the sample probe wash station and reagent probe wash
stations. If the detergent is not properly drained from the drain hole or if a stain still remains
in the wash stations, repeat steps 4 to 9.
10. Touch Update.

date.
11. Touch OK.

8.5.2 Cleaning the HbA1c probe wash station

If the HbA1c probe wash station has not been cleaned for an extended period of time,
probe will be clogged with foreign matter, resulting in a loss of cleaning capability. This
may contaminate the probe and therefore degrade the reliability of analysis data. In
addition, samples also have the potential of being contaminated by the stained sample
probe. To maintain the reliability of analysis data and prevent samples from being
contaminated, clean wash stations every month.
Procedures for Cleaning the HbA1c Probe Wash Station

Materials Needed:
• Sodium hypochlorite with an effective chlorine of approx. 0.5%
• Cotton swab
• Pipette or injector


4. Touch to select Cleaning Wash Well for HbA1c Probe from the list of
maintenance items.
5. Touch Cleaning Wash Tank from the “Single Operation” buttons.
With the following operation the sample probe and the reagent probes will move. Do not
touch the moving sample probe and reagent probe.
CAUTION
This makes the sample probe and the reagent probes move to the position of the cuvette.
• Do not spill the sodium hypochlorite solution outside the wash station. If it has been spilt,
immediately wipe it off.
CAUTION • While cleaning the inside of the wash station using a cotton swab, do not touch the tip of
the HbA1c probe. If you accidentally touch the probe tip, you may get hurt on your fingers
or the probe may be bent or damaged.

7. While pouring 1 or 2 mL sodium hypochlorite solution into the HbA1c probe wash
station using a pipette or a injector, clean the inside of the wash station with a
cotton swab.
If the nozzle of the wash station have any contaminants, wipe the nozzle with a
clean cloth or absorbent paper soaked in ethyl alcohol (ethanol).
HbA1c probe
wash station
8. Touch Cleaning Sample Probe from the “Single Operation” buttons.

The water will be sprayed in the HbA1c probe wash station from the nozzles. If the water is
not properly drained from the drain hole or if a stain still remains in the well, repeat steps 4
to 10.
11. Touch Update.

date.
12. Touch OK.


8.5.3 Cleaning the Mixing Bar Wash Station
If the mixing bar wash stations are not cleaned regularly, residual foreign matter in the
well lowers washing performance. This causes contamination and reduces the reliability
of analysis data. The stained mixing bars may contaminate samples. To maintain the
reliability of analysis data, and to prevent samples from being contaminated, clean the
mixing bar wash stations every month.
Procedure for Cleaning the Mixing Bar Wash Station

Materials Needed:
• Sodium hypochlorite solution with approx. 0.5% effective concentration of chlorine
• Cotton swab

4. Touch to select Clean mix bar wash wells from the list of maintenance items.
This makes the “ANL Single Operation Request” buttons appear to the right of the screen.

6. Select the mixing unit 1, enter 3 or more as the number of times the wash water is
drained and touch OK.
The wash water will be sprayed in the mixing bar wash stations from the nozzles.

8. Pull the mixing bars upward from the mixing unit.
Mixing unit
Mixing Mixing bar

bar wash station
Mixing unit
Mixing bar wash station

Do not spill the sodium hypochlorite solution outside the mixing bar wash station. If it is
spilled, immediately wipe it up.
CAUTION
9. Clean the inside of the mixing bar wash stations using a cotton swab dampened
with sodium hypochlorite solution.
The wash water will be sprayed in the mixing bar wash stations. If the detergent is not
properly drained from the drain hole or if a stain still remains in the wells, repeat steps 9 to
10.
11. Repeat step 4 to 10 for the mixing unit 2.

12. After the washing has been completed, insert the nine mixing bars from the top
into the holes provided on the mixing unit.
After inserting each mixing bar, turn it a little to make the notch on the mixing bar engaged
with the gear in the hole of the mixing unit.
13. Touch Update.

date.
14. Touch OK.


8.5.4 Cleaning the wash nozzle unit and checking the
tube mounting joints
The wash nozzle unit consists of a total of nine nozzles; six of them are three-piece
nozzles each of which serves to aspirate mixture in the cuvette, dispense wash water
(nozzle 1 and 2) or water (nozzle 3 to six), and aspirate the overflows, and the
remaining three are one aspiration nozzle and two drying nozzles. If any wash nozzle is
clogged, the functionality of that wash nozzle is degraded so that it can not wash the
target cuvette satisfactorily, causing the analysis result data to be unreliable. To
maintain the reliability of analysis data, wash the wash nozzle station every month.
Also check the tube mounting joints for the wash nozzle unit for any crack.
If any tube mounting joint is damaged or has any crack, some of the liquid may remain
in the cuvette or any liquid dripping may occur, causing the analysis result data to be
unreliable.
If any tube mounting joint is damaged, immediately replace it with a new one to prevent
the analysis data quality from being degraded.
Procedure for cleaning the wash nozzle unit and checking the
Materials Needed:
• Dry, clean cloth or absorbent paper
• Ultrasonic cleaner
Removing the wash nozzle station and checking the tube mounting
joints

4. Touch to select Clean and inspect wash nozzle from the list of maintenance
items.
5. Touch Replacing Wash Nozzle from the “Single Operation” buttons and press
OK.
The liquids in the tubes of the wash nozzle unit are aspirated so that they are empty.
7. Repeat step 6 two or three times until the liquid in the tube of the wash nozzle
unit has been completely removed.
Always drain the water remaining in the wash nozzles before cleaning or replacing the
tube mounting joints. If you loose any tube mounting joint without draining the
CAUTION remaining water, the water spills out of the nozzle.
8. Open the rear cover.

9. Loosen the four tube mounting joints to remove them from the wash nozzle
station.
• A total of six pieces of O-ring are used inside the water supply tube mounting joint of the
wash nozzle station. When you have removed the tubes, make sure that there are six
CAUTION pieces of O-rings in places inside the joint. If any O-ring is missing, check if it sticks on the
back of the tube which has been removed, or if it is in an area around the tube mounting
joint. If you can not find it, install a new O-ring (MU9638) in the place concerned.
• When loosening the knob on the wash nozzle station, do not loosen the positioning
screws on both sides of the knob. These screws are used for positioning the wash nozzle
station.
For detailed information about cleaning or replacing an O-ring of the tube mounting
joint, refer to “8.8.1 Replacing O-rings in the wash nozzle supply tube mounting joints” on
page 8-71.
Wash nozzle station
Knob
Positioning screws
Rear cover
Water supply tube mounting joint of the wash nozzle station
(A total of six pieces of O-rings are used inside the tubes)
10. Turn to loosen the knob of the wash nozzle station and remove it together with
the tubing.

11. Visually check the wash nozzle joints of the wash nozzle station for any crack.
If any crack is found, replace the wash nozzle joint with a new one.
wash nozzle joint
Tube
wash nozzle joint
Wash nozzle station
For details on replacement of wash nozzle joint, refer to “8.8.6 Replacing the wash
nozzle joint” on page 8-81.
Cleaning and remounting the wash nozzle unit
• When cleaning the wash nozzle station using an ultrasonic cleaner, do not damage the
wash nozzles.
CAUTION • When handling a wash nozzle do not damage the nozzle.
• When mounting the wash nozzle station do not bring the nozzle tips into contact with the
cuvette wheel cover.
1. Clean the wash nozzle station along with the tubing for 15 minutes, using an
ultrasonic cleaner.
No detergent is required.
2. Take out the wash nozzle station from the ultrasonic cleaner, then wipe up the
water drops using absorbent paper, etc.
The ultrasonic cleaner is recommended for cleaning the wash nozzles. If an ultrasonic
cleaner is not available, use tap water. While pouring water into the wash nozzles, clean
TIP
each nozzle hole using the supplied mandolin string.
After washing in water, wipe up water drops using a absorbent paper, etc.

3. Check the O-rings of the tube mounting joints for the following items.
• All of the six O-rings are properly inserted in individual grooves.
• Any foreign matters such as dust or detergent crystals should not be observed on and
around each O-ring.
If any O-ring comes off from the groove, properly fit it in the original position again. Also, if
any foreign matter is observed on an O-ring, clean it.
For detailed on cleaning or replacing an O-ring of the tube mounting joint, refer to “8.8.1
Replacing O-rings in the wash nozzle supply tube mounting joints” on page 8-71.
If you do not observe the following precautions, the test operation would not be
performed properly or the system may be unexpectedly damaged.
CAUTION • Make sure that the O-ring is correctly seated in the respective groove of the tube
mounting joint. Without the O-ring the joint unit may cause leaks.
• When you install the tube mounting joints, do not confuse the position to install them.
• When attaching a wash nozzle to the tube mounting joint tighten the wash nozzle station
firmly. If the wash nozzle station is not tightened sufficiently, water leaks will result.
• Make sure any tubes that must run from the nozzles or tube mounting joint are not
missing.
• Neither hurt any of the joints and tubes nor tear any of them. The damaged part might
cause leaks to contaminate the cuvette.
• At the time of attaching tube mounting joints, be careful not to cross the tubes. If they are
crossing, a nozzle gets pulled diagonally and it might become unable to wash properly.
4. Attach all the tube mounting joints to their original places and tighten them
correctly.
After attaching those joints, tighten them firmly. Attach the joints in the correct places.
Confirm that the cap of a mounting joint is tightened to the positioning mark.
For information about the attaching positions of those joints, refer to “Tubing Diagram of
the Wash Nozzles and Tube Mounting Joints” on next page.
5. Mate two positioning holes on the wash nozzle station with the positioning
screws, then fix the station by tightening the knob.
6. Close the rear cover.
7. Touch Prime Wash Nozzle from the “Single Operation” buttons.
The air in the tubing is purged as the wash nozzle unit moves up and down.
During priming operation make sure that the joint unit does not cause leaks. If it does,
open the cover of the joint unit again and check every O-ring for any abnormal setting
CAUTION conditions. Replace the unserviceable O-ring, if any, with a new one.
10. Touch Update.

date.
11. Touch OK.

12. Touch W1(F5).
13. Touch Start.

Tubing Diagram of the Wash Nozzles and Tube Mounting Joints

For easy understanding the tubing diagram below is separated into two tubing groups.
Wash
nozzles

8.5.5 Cleaning the Deionized Water Filter
The deionized water filter can become blocked over time with various materials from the
external water system and plumbing. This can lead to deterioration in system
performance, and sub-optimal assay performance. To prevent this perform the following
procedure at least monthly.
Procedure for Cleaning the Deionized Water Filter

Materials Needed:
• Dry, clean cloth
• Vessel
Removing the deionized water filter
Turn off the ON (sub-power) button to the system before starting this job. If this job is
performed with the ON (sub-power) button to the system turned on, deionized water will
CAUTION be supplied through the supply tube as the float switch in the deionized water tank will
activate.
1. Shut down the system touching End.

3. Position a vessel so as not to spill liquid from the deionized water drainage hose
on the floor.
4. Remove both joints on the two deionized water drainage hoses and disconnect
the connector (868) of the float switch.
5. Pull out the deionized water tank from the system just far enough so that it will not
fall.
6. Take out the water supply tube.
Loosen the filter case over the vessel. The deionized water in the filter case will drain
from the joint. If the deionized water is spilt on the system, connector, etc., immediately
CAUTION wipe it off with a dry, clean cloth.
7. Remove the cap of the filter case on the water supply tube tip by turning it.

8. Remove the deionized water filter from the filter case.
Water supply
tube
Filter case
Deionized
water filter
Joint
Vessel
Cap of filter case
Cleaning and mounting the deionized water filter

1. Wash the deionized water filter and filter case cap in the ultrasonic cleaner for
approximately 10 minutes. Use water for washing.
If an ultrasonic cleaner is not available, use tap water. While pouring water into the filter,
clean the scale and dust stuck to the filter using a toothbrush.
2. Wash the deionized water filter and filter case cap in deionized water.
3. Insert the deionized water filter into the filter case.
4. Replace the filter case cap and tighten it firmly.
5. Insert the water supply tube in the deionized water tank.
6. Replace the deionized water tank in the system.
7. Connect the joint on the deionized water drainage hose.
Press these joints in until a click sound is heard.
8. Connect the float swith connector (868) to its original position.

9. Remove the vessel.
Dispose of the drained water in the vessel.

The Warm up mode is entered after the initialization.

12. Touch to select Clean deionized-water filter from the list of maintenance items.
13. Touch Prime Washing-line from the “Single Operation” buttons.
14. Enter 3 or more as the number of prime cycles and touch OK.
16. Repeat step 14 two or three times until the air in the sample probe, reagent
probe, and wash nozzle is completely removed.
17. Touch Update.
date.
18. Touch OK.

19. Touch W1(F5).
20. Touch Start.


8.5.6 Cleaning the Sample Probe Filter
If dust or scale soils the sample probe filter, the system may indicate abnormal analysis
data. To obtain appropriate analysis results, clean the sample probe filter every month.
Procedure for Cleaning the Sample Probe Filter

Materials Needed:
• Vessel
• Deionized water
Removing the sample probe filter
activate.

3. Place the vessel under the unit so that the liquid from the deionized water
drainage hose does not spill onto the floor.
4. Pull the filter case toward the front and remove it from the holder.
Loosen each joint from the filter case over the vessel. The deionized water in the filter
case will drain from the joint. If deionized water is spilt on the system, connector, etc.,
CAUTION immediately wipe it up with a dry, clean cloth.

5. Remove the joints on each of the two connecting hoses from the filter case while
holding down the button.
Connecting Hose
Joint
Holder
Filter case
Button Vessel
If loosening to remove the filter case and taking out the sample probe filter, do not lose
the O-ring.
CAUTION
6. Open the filter case by loosening it.
7. Remove the sample probe filter from the filter case.
O-ring
Sample probe filter
Filter case
Cleaning and attaching the sample probe filter

1. Wash the sample probe filter and filter case in the ultrasonic cleaner for
approximately 10 minutes. Use water for washing.
If an ultrasonic cleaner is not available, use tap water. While pouring water into the filter,
clean the scale and dust stuck to the filter using a toothbrush.
2. Wash the sample probe filter and filter case in deionized water.
3. Insert the sample probe filter into the filter case.
4. Tighten the filter case firmly.
Do not connect the filter case to the joints upside down.

If the filter case is connected upside down, dust, etc., in the case will enter the system
CAUTION
and will cause a data error.

Press these joints in until a click sound is heard.

6. Fit the filter case in the filter case holder.


10. Touch to select Clean sample probe filter from the list of maintenance items.
12. Enter 5 as the number of prime cycles and touch OK.

14. Repeat step 13 two or three times until the air in the sample probe is completely
removed.
15. Touch Update.
date.
16. Touch OK.

17. Touch W1(F5).
18. Touch Start.


8.6 Maintenance Every Three Months
Record
Perform the following tasks every three months:
8.6.1 Cleaning Air Filters. See page 8-50.
8.6.2 Replacing the Deionized Water Filter. See page 8-51.
8.6.3 Replacing the Sample Probe Filter. See page 8-53.
8.6.4 Cleaning the Deionized Water Tank. See page 8-55.
8.6.5 Replacing the Detergent Rolling Tube. See page 8-58.


8.6.1 Cleaning Air Filters
The air filters must be kept clean to ensure that adequate clean air can enter the system
for cooling. Any dust or dirt should be removed promptly.
Procedure for Cleaning the Air Filter
Always mount the air filters to the system. In the state without the filers, the heaters and
the power supplies get dusty to cause fire or short circuit.
CAUTION
1. Shut down the system touching End. And press the EM STOP button to turn off
the main power.
2. Remove the two air filters.
Air filter Air filter

(MU9593) (MU9593)
3. Wash the air filters with water, then dry them in the air.
4. Replace air filters if they are broken.
5. Mount the air filters in place.
6. Press RESET button and ON button to turn on the system power.
• The air filters can be cleaned with a vacuum cleaner, without being removed. If any air filter
is deformed after cleaning, reform it to the original flat condition and position.
TIP
• Update the performed date by touching Clean air filters on the “Analyzer Maintenance:

8.6.2 Replacing the Deionized Water Filter
To obtain correct analysis data by keeping the filter function, the deionized water filter
should be replaced every three months, using this procedure.
Procedure for Replacing the Deionized Water Filter

Materials Needed:
• New deionized water filter ZM3079
• Vessel
activate.

2. Close the water outlet valves.
4. Remove the deionized water filter.
For details on removing the deionized water filter, refer to “8.5.5 Cleaning the Deionized
Water Filter” on page 8-43.
5. Insert a new deionized water filter into the filter case.

6. Replace the filter case cap and tighten it firmly.
7. Insert the water supply tube into the deionized water tank.


12. Touch to select Replace Deionized W.Filter from the list of maintenance items.
16. Repeat step 15 until the air in the sample probe, reagent probe, and wash nozzle
is completely removed.
17. Touch Update.
date.
18. Touch OK.

19. Touch W1(F5).
20. Touch Start.


8.6.3 Replacing the Sample Probe Filter
To maintain the filter function and to obtain appropriate analysis results, replace the
sample probe filter every three months.
Procedure for Replacing the Sample Probe Filter

Materials Needed:
• New sample probe filter ZM3079
• Vessel
Perform this procedure while the system ON (sub-power) button is off. If you operate
with the ON (sub-power) button to the system turned on, the float switch in the
CAUTION deionized water tank will be activated, and deionized water is discharged from the
supply tube.

3. Remove the sample probe filter. Check that the O-ring has a scratch. If it is, go to
the next step, or go to the step 6.
For details on removing the sample probe filter, refer to “8.5.6 Cleaning the Sample Probe
Filter” on page 8-46.
4. Remove the O-ring from the filter case.

5. Insert the New O-ring into the filter case.
6. Insert a new sample probe filter into the filter case.
Do not connect the filter case to the joints upside down. If the filter case is connected
upside down, dust, etc., in the case will enter the system and will cause a data error.
CAUTION
Push the joint all the way until a click is heard.
9. Mount the filter case on the holder.



13. Touch to select Replace sample probe filter from the list of maintenance items.
As the deionized water flows through the tube, the air in the tube will be purged.

17. Repeat step 16 until the air in the sample probe is completely removed.
18. Touch Update.
date.
19. Touch OK.

20. Touch W1(F5).
21. Touch Start.

Procedure for Replacing the O-ring of Sample Probe Filter

If O-ring is found broken when replacing the filter, replace the O-ring with a new one.
Materials Needed:
• New O-ring MU9637
• Clean dry cloth
performed with the main power and ON (sub-power) button to the system turned on,
CAUTION deionized water will be supplied through the supply tube as the float switch in the
deionized water tank will activate.
1. Confirm that the ON (sub-power) button to the system is turned off.

3. Pull the filter case forward and remove it from the holder.
When loosening each joint from the filter case, if deionized water is spilt on the system,
connector, etc., immediately wipe it up with a dry clean cloth.
CAUTION
4. Remove the joints on each of the two connecting hoses from the filter case while
holding down the button.
5. Remove the filter case by loosen it.
Do not connect the filter case to the joints upside down.

If the filter case is connected upside down, dust, etc., in the case will enter the system
CAUTION
and will cause a data error.
7. Connect the joint on the deionized water drainage hose. Push the joint all the way
until a click is heard.
8. Mount the filter case on the holder.

8.6.4 Cleaning the Deionized Water Tank
If scale or other deposits have accumulated on the deionized water tank, contaminated
deionized water will be supplied, and therefore correct analysis will not be performed.
Clean the deionized water tank every three months.
If quality deionized water cannot be obtained from the deionizer, the diluted detergent
tank may need to be cleaned in addition to the deionized water tank.
TIP
For detailed information, consult an Olympus service engineer.
Procedure for Cleaning the Deionized Water Tank

Materials Needed:
• Vessel
• Deionized water
Procedure for pulling out the deionized water filter
activate.

3. Position a vessel not to spill liquid from the deionized water drainage hose on the
floor.

4. Remove both joints on the two deionized water drainage hoses and disconnect
the connector (868) of the float switch.
Connector
Joint
Deionized water drainage hose Vessel
5. Loosen the cap, then take out the float switch.

6. Take out the tube inserted into the deionized water tank.
Dripping may occur when the float switch and tubes are removed from the tank. If it
does, immediately wipe the stained area with a dry cloth or paper, etc.
TIP
Cap
Float switch
Tube

7. Drain the deionized water in the tank.
Discard the pumped-out deionized water.
8. Draw the deionized water tank out of the system.
Cleaning and replacing the deionized water tank

1. Flush the inside of the tank, tube, and the outside of float switch with water, and
then wipe off the moisture with a clean dry cloth.
Be sure to fill the deionized water tank with deionized water before turning the system
power to on. If the pump is idled with the deionized water tank being empty, a
CAUTION malfunction may result.
2. Fill the deionized water tank with approximately 5L of deionized water.

3. Insert the water supply tube and the float switch into the deionized water tank.
5. Reconnect the joints on the two deionized water drainage hoses.
Push each joint all the way until a click is heard.
6. Connect the float switch connector (868) to its original position.


9. Touch to select Clean deionized-water tank from the list of maintenance items.

13. Repeat step 12 until the air in the sample probe, reagent probe, and wash nozzle
is completely removed.
14. Touch Update.
date.
15. Touch OK.

16. Touch W1(F5).
17. Touch Start.

8.6.5 Replacing the Detergent Rolling Tube

The rolling tube will deteriorate gradually due to abrasion and vibration by the rolling
pump. If the rolling tube is used for an extended period, it will be broken. Replace the
rolling tube with a new one every three months.
When you are going to attach/detach the detergent rolling tube, wear rubber gloves in
advance to prevent your hand from being contaminated with the master detergent. Also
CAUTION do not splash the liquid in the tube over the peripheral area. If your hands or clothing
come in contact with the liquid, immediately wash with water. If the master detergent
comes into contact with your eyes or mouth, immediately wash with water and consult a
doctor.
Procedure for Replacing the Detergent Rolling Tube

Materials Needed:
New rolling tubes MU9623

Be sure to operate in the above described conditions. Otherwise, the detergent may be
discharged from the connection tube when the rolling tube is disconnected.
TIP

4. Touch to select Replacing Pump Roller Tubes from the list of maintenance
items.
5. Touch Replacing Roller Pump tubing from the “Single Operation” buttons and
touch OK.
The rolling pump rotates in the reverse direction, making the master detergent in the tube
returned into the master detergent tank.
7. After making sure that no master detergent remains in the tube, disconnect the
rolling tube for detergent from the rolling pump unit.
Rounding direction of rolling pump
(Normal)
Rolling tube
Detergent rolling pump

8. Remove the rolling tube from the relay tubes by rotating the connectors.
Detergent rolling pump
Rolling tube
ID No.
Rolling tube connectors Relay tubes

9. Connect the connectors of new rolling tube to each relay tubes.

Rotate the connectors to tighten them.
10. Roll the rolling tube around the rolling pump, and then hung the connectors at the
tube ends in the grooves on the rolling pump side.
The numbers indicated on the relay tube ends must be the same as those indicated near
the grooves on the pump side.

The rolling pumps rotate in the normal direction, filling each tube with master detergent.
12. Touch Update.

13. Touch OK.

8.7 Maintenance Performed Every Six
Months
Record
date.
For details on updating the maintenance record, refer to “8.2.2 Updating the
To obtain the best possible performance of this analyzer and use it safely, be sure to
perform the following tasks every six months:
8.7.1 Replacing the Photometer Lamp. See page 8-61.
8.7.2 Washing Cuvettes and the Cuvette Wheel. See page 8-65.

8.7.1 Replacing the Photometer Lamp

If the light intensity of the photometer lamp decreased, an appropriate analysis result
will not be obtained.
Replace the photometer lamp every 1,000 hours as a guide. However, if the alarm
message “Photometer lamp deteriorated” or “Photometer lamp broken” is displayed,
replace the light source lamp even before 1,000 hours.
After replacing the lamp be sure to perform photocal measurement to check that the
lamp has no defective.
• To prevent electric hazards, be sure to turn off the ON (sub-power) button to the system
before replacing the photometer lamp.
WARNING • Wait 5 minutes or more after the system shutdown process has been completed. Do not
touch the lamp with bare hands until the photometer lamp has cooled down completely.
The lamp is very hot and can cause burns.
• Never touch the glass of the photometer lamp with bare hands. If oil from the skin or
fingerprints are left on the glass, they will burn. This changes the light intensity of the lamp
CAUTION and decreases the measuring accuracy.
• If the photometer lamp is stained, shut down the system and wait at least 5 minutes.
Check that the photometer lamp has cooled down completely, then wipe off the stain with
a soft cloth dampened with ethyl alcohol (Ethanol).

Procedure for Replacing the Photometer Lamp
Materials Needed:
New photometer lamp MU9888
1. Shut down the system touching End and more than five minutes have passed
since the system termination process was executed.
When the system is currently active, execute the termination process and allow at least
five minutes.
When removing the lamp unit cover, do not bump the cover against the reagent probe.
CAUTION 3. Remove the lamp unit cover.

4. Loosen the two knobs on the terminals, then disconnect the two lamp cords from
the terminals.
Knobs
Lamp holder
Lamp cords
5. Loosen the lamp holder by turning it counterclockwise, then pull the photometer
lamp out.
Photometer lamp
Lamp holder

6. While matching the notch on the guide key and the collar notch of a new
photometer lamp unit with the protrusion on the lamp receptacle, insert the lamp
into the receptacle.
Protrusion
Lamp receptacle
Notch
Guide key
Collar notch
Fix the lamp holder securely. If the lamp holder is loose, accurate analysis data cannot
be obtained.
CAUTION
7. Turn the lamp holder clockwise to secure the photometer lamp.
8. Connect the two lamp cords to each terminal, then tighten the two knobs.
9. Remount the lamp unit cover.
After replacing the photometer lamp, be sure to perform the photocal measurement to
check for any defects.
CAUTION
To obtain optimal analysis data, do not start a photocal measurement until the
photometer lamp has stabilized after starting the system. The photometer lamp will
CAUTION stabilize approximately 20 minutes after system startup.

Maintenancer>Analyzer Maintenance>Consumption to display the “Analyzer
13. Touch to select Replacing photometer lamp from the list of maintenance items.
14. Touch Update.
date.
15. Touch OK to reset the used period.

16. Start a photocal measurement approximately 20 minutes after system startup.
For details on a photocal measurement, refer to “8.4.3 Execution of Photocal
Errors may be encountered as a result of the photocal measurement. If so, they may be
caused by the following. By the number of the cuvette having error take appropriate
TIP
action as follows.
• Numerous errors have occurred.
The photometer lamp may not be set correctly or the new photometer lamp may be
defective.
Set the photometer lamp again.
• A few errors have occurred.
The photometer lamp has been replaced correctly, but some cuvettes may be stained.
Clean the cuvettes that caused the error. If the error is not corrected even after cleaning the
cuvettes, replace them.

8.7.2 Washing Cuvettes and the Cuvette Wheel
If the cuvettes and cuvette wheel are not washed for an extended period of time, the
contaminants, such as the serum or the scale will be difficult to clean. The contaminants
on a cuvette result in a photometric error. Be sure to wash the cuvettes and cuvette
wheel every six months.
Procedure for Washing Cuvettes and the Cuvette Wheel

Materials Needed:
• Wash solution
• L wrench
• Absorbent paper
Removing the cuvette wheel and cuvettes

the main power.
• When handling a wash nozzle take care not to damage the nozzle.
• When removing the wash nozzle station be careful not to bring the nozzle tips into contact
CAUTION with the cuvette wheel cover.
• When loosening the knob on the wash nozzle station, don’t loosen the positioning screws
on both sides of the knob. These screws are used for positioning the wash nozzle station.
4. Loosen the knob on the wash nozzle station. Remove the wash nozzle station
and hang it on the hook.
Hook
Knob
Positioning pins Wash nozzle station
Rear cover

5. Turn the mixing unit approximately 60° by hand to move the mixing bars from
over the cuvette wheel.
Mixing unit
Cuvette wheel
cover
Positioning pin of
cuvette wheel cover
Mixing unit
Mixing bar
Mixing bar wash station
When removing the cuvette wheel cover, do not damage the sample probe, reagent
probes, and mixing bars.
CAUTION
6. Lift the cuvette wheel cover slowly to remove it.
The cuvette wheel is secured with two fixing screws as shown in the figure below.
7. Remove the two screws in the center of the cuvette wheel, then temporarily
screw them into the two holes on the cuvette wheel, as shown in the figure below.
Cuvette wheel cover
Holes
Screws
When removing the cuvette wheel, do not bring it into contact with peripheral devices.
CAUTION 8. Hold the two screws on the opposite ends of the wheel by hand, then remove the
cuvette wheel by lifting it.

9. Lift the cuvette wheel to remove it.
• When removing cuvettes, do not scratch them.

• Never touch the photometric face of a cuvette. If the photometric face is stained by
CAUTION fingerprints, etc., the photometric data will be inaccurate.
10. Insert a L wrench into each cuvette hole from the bottom of the cuvette wheel,
then push out each cuvette. Remove all of the 165 cuvettes from the wheel.
Cuvette
L wrench
Cuvette
Photometric
face
Frosted
glass face
11. Close the cuvette wheel cover, rear cover, and main cover.
Washing and mounting cuvettes and the cuvette wheel
When washing cuvettes do not scratch them. If a cuvette is scratched, the photometric
data will be inaccurate.
CAUTION
1. Soak the cuvette in the 50-time diluent of wash solution for 8 hours.
Wash the cuvette wheel completely with tap water.
To wash the cuvette wheels, do not use any detergent. Otherwise, the metallic plating
on the cuvette wheel may be removed.
CAUTION
2. After thoroughly washing the cuvette wheel with tap water, further wash it in the
deionized water.

3. Either dry the cuvettes and cuvette wheel in the dryer or completely wipe off the
moisture remaining on the outside surface of the cuvette using such as absorbent
paper that will not leave any residue. Then, mount the cuvettes on the cuvette
wheel.
Properly mount all of the 165 cuvettes on the cuvette wheel. If even a single cuvette is
not mounted on the cuvette wheel, the mixture, reagent, detergent, etc., will be spilt on
CAUTION the cuvette wheel. This will disable analysis.
When mounting cuvettes, do not scratch them.
Never touch the photometric face of a cuvette. If the photometric face is stained by
fingerprints, etc., the photometric data will be inaccurate.
4. Push each cuvette all the way to the bottom of the cuvette wheel by hand.
5. Replace the cuvette wheel in the original position and secure it with fixing screws
(align the numbers).
6. Mount the cuvette wheel cover in place.
7. Remove the wash nozzle station from the hook and install it in the original
position.
Tighten the knob to secure the wash nozzle station.
8. Close the rear and main cover.

9. Press the RESET button. After 10 seconds, press the ON button to turn on the
system power.

11. Touch to select Washing Cuvettes & Cuvette Wheel from the list of
maintenance items.

12. Touch Update.
date.
13. Touch OK.

After washing the cuvettes, be sure to perform a photocal measurement to check if the
cuvettes are washed correctly.
CAUTION
To obtain appropriate analysis data, do not start a photocal measurement until the
photometer lamp has stabilized after starting the system. The photometer lamp will
stabilize approximately 20 minutes after system startup.
15. Perform a photocal measurement.

For details on how to execute a photocal measurement, refer to “8.4.3 Execution of
Photocal measurement” on page 8-25.

8.8 Maintenance Performed Yearly or As
Necessary
This section describes the procedures used to perform yearly or irregular maintenance,
such as those for replacing damaged parts.
Record
Yearly Maintenance
8.8.1 Replacing O-rings in the wash nozzle supply tube mounting joints. See page 8-
71.
Maintenance performed as necessary

8.8.2 Replacing cuvettes. See page 8-73.
8.8.3 Manual Wash the reagent probe. See page 8-75.
8.8.4 Replacing Sample Probe and Reagent Probes. See page 8-76.
8.8.5 Replacing Mixing Bars. See page 8-79.
8.8.6 Replacing the wash nozzle joint. See page 8-81.
8.8.7 Replacing syringes. See page 8-85.
8.8.8 Cleaning the inside of the STAT table unit and reagent refrigeration unit. See
page 8-91.
8.8.9 Replacing the antistatic brush. See page 8-93.
8.8.10 Replacing rack ID labels. See page 8-94.
8.8.11 Replacing the Sample Probe and Reagent Probes Tubes. See page 8-95.
8.8.12 Executing W1 (auto-washing of the sample probe and cuvettes). See page 8-97.
8.8.13 Replacing Air Filters. See page 8-98.
8.8.14 Replacing syringe cases and syringe heads. See page 8-99.
8.8.15 Replacing packing in the wash nozzle tube mounting joints. See page 8-105.

procedure. For precautions against other than infection, observe the descriptions of
CAUTION “WARNING” and “CAUTION” given in this user guide.

8.8.1 Replacing O-rings in the wash nozzle supply tube
mounting joints
Replace each O-ring in the wash nozzle mounting joints with a new one every year.
When installing the tube mounting joints of the wash nozzle station, check the following
items.
• All the six O-rings (see the figure below) should be seated in each groove.
• Any foreign matters such as dust or detergent crystals should not be observed on
and around each O-ring.
If any O-ring comes off from the groove, properly fit it in the original position again. Also,
if any foreign matter is found on an O-ring, clean it.
O-ring
Procedure for replacing O-rings

To replace the O-rings, observe the following procedure.
Materials Needed:
• Dry, clean cloth or absorbent paper
• A pair of tweezers
• O-rings, MU9638
1. Touch to select Replacing O Ring of the Wash Nozzle from the list of
maintenance items.
2. Touch Replacing Wash Nozzle from the “Single Operation” buttons and touch
OK.
4. Repeat step 3 two or three times until the liquid in the tube of the wash nozzle
unit has been completely removed.

6. Remove the supply mounting joint (behind the wash nozzle station).
Wash nozzle station
Rear cover
Water supply tube mounting joint of the wash nozzle station
(A total of six pieces of O-rings are used inside the tubes)
7. Wipe off the stain around each O-ring with a dry clean cloth or absorbent paper.
8. Remove the O-rings with tweezers and set new O-rings (MU9638) in place.
9. Mount the supply mounting joint in the original position.
If the O-rings are used for an extended period of time without being cleaned or if the
joint cover has been closed without the O-rings set properly in each groove, detergent
CAUTION crystals will generate, causing scratches on cuvettes. Be sure to check the O-rings
along with the monthly maintenance of the wash nozzle station.
11. Enter 5 or more as the number of times the diluted detergent and water are
drained and touch OK.
13. Finally make sure that each joint unit does not cause leaks.
If any joint unit causes leaks, open the joint unit cover again and check every O-ring for
any abnormal condition.
14. Touch Update.

date.
15. Touch OK.

16. Touch W1(F5).
17. Touch Start.


8.8.2 Replacing cuvettes
Stained or scratched cuvettes cause a photometric error. To obtain the optimal analysis
results from the Analyzer, replace the cuvette from which the stain on the photometric
surface will not be removed even after cleaning or that has been scratched. Also
replace the cuvette for which an error has been displayed as the result of Photocal
measurement.
Procedure for replacing cuvettes

Materials Needed:
• New cuvette, ZM0634
• L-wrench
Make sure that all the removed cuvettes are remounted in place without any omission.
Even if one of the cuvettes is missing, the mixture, reagent, or detergent will spill into
CAUTION the cuvette wheel, hampering the analysis to be successfully performed.
When mounting cuvettes on the cuvette wheel, exercise care so as not to scratch them.
Never touch the photometric surface on a cuvette. If the photometric surface is stained
by fingerprints, etc., the photometric data will be incorrect. When handling a cuvette,
pinch its frosted glass surfaces.
1. Operate the following step depending on causes of errors occurred.

• In the case of replacing the cuvettes an error occurred by the photocal error:
a. Check that the system is in the Warm up mode or Standby mode.
b. Open the main cover and replace the cuvettes.
• In the case of replacing the cuvettes an error occurred by a cause other than the photocal
error:
a. Shut down the system touching End. And press the EM STOP button to turn off the
main power.
b. Open the main cover and replace the cuvettes.
Press the RESET button. After 10 seconds, press the ON button to turn on the sys-
tem power.
After the initialization, it is changed to the Warm up mode.

3. Touch to select Replacing Cuvettes from the list of maintenance items.

4. Touch Update.
date.
5. Touch OK.
After you have replaced a cuvette, always check that the cleaning of the cuvette has
been properly performed by executing a Photocal measurement. To obtain optimal
CAUTION analysis results, always perform Photocal measurement only when the photometer
lamp has been stabilized since the startup of the Analyzer. The photometer lamp will be
stabilized in about 20 minutes after system startup.
6. Execute the Photocal measurement.

For details on execution of Photocal measurement, refer to “8.4.3 Execution of Photocal

8.8.3 Manual Wash the reagent probe
If the reagent probes are stained, contamination between samples and contamination
between reagents may occur, and thus correct analysis results will not be obtained.
CAUTION
To prevent contamination between samples or contamination between reagents, wash
the reagent probes.
Procedure for Washing Reagent Probe

To wash the reagent probes, observe the following procedure.
Materials Needed:
• Mandolin string (Standard accessory)

4. Touch to select Manual Washing R1 Probes or Manual Washing R2 Probes
from the list of maintenance items.
5. Touch Replacing Reagent Probe/Syringe from the “Single Operation” buttons.
6. Select “R1” or “R2” from the drop-down list of “Unit”, enter 3 or more as the
number of prime cycle and touch OK.
Liquid will be drained from the reagent probe, and the probe will be washed.
8. Disconnect the probe connector.
If replacing the reagent probe, do not bend or damage the probe tip.
CAUTION
9. While holding connecting part of the probe connector by hand, pull the reagent
probe upward.
Discard the detergent in the reagent probe into the wash station well.
10. Wipe off the contamination on the probe tip with a clean cloth or absorbent paper
damped with ethyl alcohol (ethanol).
11. Insert the supplied mandolin string into the nozzles from the probe tip to clean the
nozzles.
12. Plug the reagent probe into its original place from the top.
13. Tighten the probe connectors to secure each probe.
Tighten the connectors firmly to ensure that no liquid leaks from the joints.

The water will be ejected from the probe tip. Check that the water ejects like one straight
line.
If the water is sprayed widely or is not ejecting straight from each probe tip, replace the
probe.
15. Touch Update.

date.
16. Touch OK.
8.8.4 Replacing Sample Probe and Reagent Probes

Replace the sample probe or the reagent probes if they become damaged, or if the
stream of liquid during priming is consistently not straight or coherent.
Procedure for replacing the sample probe and reagent probes

Replace the sample probe and reagent probe in the same procedure. The replacing
procedure common to the sample probe and reagent probe is described below.
Materials Needed:
• New sample probe, MU9934
• New reagent probe, MU9958
• Check that the sample probe is just above the wash station and then replace it with a new
one. Liquid dripping will occur during displacement of the probe.
CAUTION • When handling the sample probe or reagent probe, exercise care so as not to bend or
damage the probe tip.
1. Check that the system has entered the Warm up mode or Standby mode.
3. Loosen to disconnect the probe connector.

4. Pull out the sample probe upward while holding the portion to be connected with
the probe connector with your fingers.
Discharge the water in the sample probe or reagent probe to the wash station.
Reagent probe connectors
Reagent probes
Probe connector
Sample probe
Sample probe wash station
5. Insert a new sample probe or reagent probe into the probe connector from above.
6. Tighten the probe connector to attach it to the sample probe or reagent probe.
Be sure to tighten the connector firmly so that no liquid will leak from the joint.

8. Touch to select the maintenance item from the list of maintenance items, then
The items to The list of Single Operation button

be replaced maintenance items
Sample probe Replacing Sample Probe Replacing Sample Probe
R1 probe Replacing R1 Probe Replacing Reagent Probe/Syringe
R2 probe Replacing R2 Probe

9. Set the number of operation, etc., and touch OK.
The items to be replaced The items to be set

R1 probe • The kind of the reagent probe: R1

This makes the sample probe or reagent probe eject water from its tip. At this time check
that the water is ejected straight downward and like a single string from the probe tip.
Check also that the water is ejected correctly into the hole of the wash station. If it is not,
loosen the probe connector once and rotate the probe so that the probe tip is directed to
the wash station hole, then retighten the probe connector. Then, recheck the probe for the
dispense state and dispense position of the water.
11. Touch Update.

date.
12. Touch OK.

Analyze quality control material, and check the data.

TIP

8.8.5 Replacing Mixing Bars
If any of the mixing bars is damaged or remains stained even after washing, replace it
with a new one.
Procedure for replacing mixing bars

Materials Needed:
New mixing bar, MU9599 (Spiral shaped), MU8267 (L shaped)
Replace a mixing bar absolutely while the mixing unit drive is not operating. Personal
injury may result if you attempt to replace a mixing bar during the operation.
CAUTION
3. Pull out the mixing bar to be replaced.
Mixing unit
Mixing bar
Mixing unit
Exercise care so as not to scratch the mixing bar when inserting it into the mixing unit.
CAUTION
4. Insert a new mixing bar into the mixing unit from above.
After inserting the mixing bar, rotate it slightly to engage the notch on the mixing bar with
the gear in the hole of the mixing unit.
Be sure to Insert three mixing bars into the mixing unit on the front side of the Analyzer and
six mixing bars into the mixing unit on the rear side.
TIP

6. Touch to select Replacing Mixing Bars from the list of maintenance items.

8. Select the unit to be selected and enter 3 or more as the number of times the
diluted detergent and water is drained, and touch OK.
10. Touch Update.
date.
11. Touch OK.


8.8.6 Replacing the wash nozzle joint
If any wash nozzle joint of the wash nozzle joint station is damaged or cracked, liquid
will remain in the cuvettes and detergent will drip from the wash nozzle joint. This may
result in an analysis data error. To prevent analysis data errors, immediately replace the
damaged wash nozzle joint.
Replacing the wash nozzle joint

Materials Needed:
New wash nozzle joint, ZM1131 (3 pieces per set)

4. Touch to select Replacing Wash Nozzle Joint Tubes from the list of
maintenance items.
5. Touch Replacing Wash Nozzle from the “Single Operation” buttons and touch
OK.
The liquid in the tubing on the wash nozzle station is drained.
7. Repeat step 6 two or three times until the liquid in the wash nozzle is completely
removed.

9. Loosen to remove the four tube mounting joints from the wash nozzle station.
Tubes
Wash nozzle station
Knob
Tube mounting joint Positioning pin

Rear cover
• When handling the wash nozzles, do not damage the nozzles.

• When removing the wash nozzle station, be careful not to bring the nozzle tips into
CAUTION contact with the cuvette wheel cover.
• When loosening the knob on the wash nozzle station, do not loosen the positioning
screws on both sides of the knob. These screws are used to position the wash nozzle
station.
10. Loosen the knob on the wash nozzle station, then remove the wash nozzle
station along with the tubing. Put it on an appropriate surface such as a table.
Remove old wash nozzle joint and mount new wash nozzle joint one by one. If a wrong
nozzle and tube are connected at both ends of a wash nozzle joint, correct analysis
CAUTION cannot be performed.

11. Remove the wash nozzle joint to be replaced.
Always drain the water remaining in the wash nozzles before cleaning or replacing the
tube mounting joints. If you loose any tube mounting joint without draining the
CAUTION remaining water, the water spills out of the nozzle.
wash nozzle joint
Tube
wash nozzle joint
Wash nozzle station

12. Insert the tube into one end of a new wash nozzle joint, and then insert the nozzle
into the other end of the wash nozzle joint.
Position both ends of the tube and nozzle in the center of the wash nozzle joint. Allow
approximately 1 mm between the ends of the tube and nozzle.
Cross-sectional View
Tube
wash nozzle
Position both joint
ends of the tube
and nozzle in the Approx. 1mm
center of the wash
Wash nozzle station nozzle joint
Nozzle
• When handling the wash nozzles, do not damage the nozzles.

• When mounting the wash nozzle station, be careful not to bring the nozzle tips into
CAUTION contact with the cuvette wheel cover.
• At the time of attaching tube mounting joints, be careful not to cross the tubes. If they are
crossing, a nozzle gets pulled diagonally and it might become unable to wash properly
13. Remount the wash nozzle station in place.

The diluted detergent and the deionized water will flow through the tube and the air in the
tube will be purged.
17. Touch Update.

date.
18. Touch OK.

19. Touch W1 (F5).
20. Touch Start.


8.8.7 Replacing syringes
This section explains replacing the following syringes:
• Sample dispenser syringe
• Reagent dispenser syringe
• Wash water dispenser syringe
Replace syringes when:

• Movement of the syringe is either very stiff, or very loose, or not as smooth and
resistant as it should be.
• The syringe head is chipped, worn or damaged in any way.
• Leaks occur even after maintenance and correct installation.
• The S-syringe and R-syringe are identified with the piston shaft diameter.
Piston shaft diameter: D
CAUTION
D = 5mm: R syringe
D = 2mm: S syringe
• Do not remove the piston from a new syringe. If the piston is removed the performance of
the syringe can be unreliable.
Procedure for replacing the syringes

Use the same procedure to replace a sample dispenser syringe, a reagent dispenser
syringe, and a wash water syringe. Follow these procedures:
• Removing the Old Syringe.
• Installing a New Syringe.
• Priming New Syringe.
Materials Needed:
• New sample syringe, ZM0111
• New reagent syringe, ZM0112
Removing the Old Syringe

To replace a syringe, you must first remove the old syringe. To do this:
3. Loosen the piston fixing screw located at the bottom of the dispenser to be
replaced.
4. Loosen the fixing nut on top of the dispenser for which the piston fixing screw has
been loosened.

5. Pull the syringe case frontward to remove the syringe unit carefully from the
mounting grooves.
Fixing nut
Fixing screws Mounting groove
Syringe case
Piston fixing screw
Mounting groove Fixing nut

Fixing screws
Syringe case
Piston fixing screw
Fixing nut
Case head
Syringe case
Mounting groove
Fixing screw
• Do not apply excessive force to the fixing screws when removing the syringe case. If an
excessive force is applied to the fixing screws, the syringe case may be damaged.
CAUTION • When removing the syringe case, exercise care not to bend the tube.
6. Remove the syringe from its case by turning it counter-clockwise while holding
the case head and syringe case by hands.

7. Pull out the syringe from the case head.
Be careful that the O-ring does not fall out of the head and get lost. If it remains in the
syringe head, remove it carefully with tweezers.
Case head
O-ring
Syringe
Syringe
case
Installing a New Syringe

When you have removed the old syringe, you can install a new one. To do this:
1. Insert the new syringe into the case head.
Never apply a strong alkali such as the AU detergent alkali to the syringe case and
case head. The strong alkali adhering to the syringe case and case head will cause
CAUTION cracks on them.
If the strong alkali has adhered to, remove the syringe case and case head and wash
them with water.
2. Mount the syringe case on the case head. Screw the syringe case onto the
syringe, until the head comes into light contact. Then fasten it by an extra 45 to
60 degrees.

3. Insert the dispenser into the mounting groove by holding the case head. Tighten
the fixing nut while pressing the case head with fingers.
Fixing nut
Case head
Syringe case
Mounting groove
4. Tighten the piston fixing screw.
Priming New Syringe

You must prime any new syringes. To do this:

The item to be replaced The list of maintenance items Single Operation button
S syringe of the sample Replacing Sample Syringe Replacing Sample Syringe
dispenser
R1 syringe of the reagent Replacing R1 Syringe Replacing Reagent Probe/
dispenser Syringe
R2 syringe of the reagent Replacing R2 Syringe
dispenser
R syringe of the wash Replacing Sample Replacing Wash Syringe
water dispenser Dispenser Syringe
The item to be replaced The items to be set

S syringe of the sample dispenser The number of operation: 260
R1 syringe of the reagent dispenser • The syringe to be replaced: R1
R2 syringe of the reagent dispenser • The syringe to be replaced: R2
R syringe of the wash water dispenser • The number of operation: 5 or more

The deionized water will flow through the tube and the air in the tube will be purged.
• In case of the reagent dispenser, select R1 or R2 on the “Start Confirmation” dialog and
repeat step 4 until the air in the tube has been completely purged.
• It takes 12 to 44 minutes from start to finish of replacing the sample syringe. If you stop the
operation, press the TABLE ROTATION/DIAG button. At this time an abort error alarm
will generate. Perform alarm clear process without any corrective action.
• When replacing a syringe other than the R-syringe of wash water dispenser, go to step 8.
5. When replacing the R-syringe of wash water dispenser, touch Replacing

Sample Syringe from the “Single Operation” buttons.
6. Set the number of times the wash water is drained to 260, then touch OK.
Air from the wash water dispenser ends up in the sample syringe and has to be removed
using the sample syringe prime.
8. Remove the syringe case again.

Loosen the piston fixing screw and fixing nut and remove the syringe case from the
dispenser.

9. Move the piston of the syringe up and down slowly by hand, and confirm that
there are no bubbles on the syringe head.
If bubbles are still found, move the piston up and down until the bubbles are purged.
Do not move the piston by hand without mounting the syringe on the syringe case.
Doing so will not retain the accuracy due to deformation of the piston and shorten the
CAUTION service life.
Case head
Confirm that
no bubbles are
attached.
Syringe
Syringe case
10. Mount the syringe case assembly on the case head.

11. Touch Update.
date.
12. Touch OK.


TIP

8.8.8 Cleaning the inside of the STAT table unit and
reagent refrigeration unit
The inside of the STAT table unit and reagent refrigeration unit is exposed to splashes
of samples/reagents, contact with outside air, and generation of condensation. This
condition is likely to breed bacteria and fungi.
Clean the inside of those units when a reagent or sample is spilled there or as
appropriate after visual check of the inside.
Procedure for cleaning the inside of the STAT table unit or

The procedure for cleaning the inside of the STAT table unit or reagent refrigeration unit
is given below.
Materials Needed:
• Ethyl alcohol (ethanol)
Procedure for cleaning the STAT table unit inside
There is a glass inside of STAT table, which is used for reading barcode. Be careful not
to contaminate it when you clean the inside. If the glass becomes dirty, it will not be able
CAUTION to read barcode.

2. Open the main cover and dismount the STAT table cover.
3. Loosen two fixing screws near the center of the STAT table with fingers. Remove
the STAT table while lifting up the central column. Place the STAT table gently at
a safe place.
4. Wipe off the condensation and stains on the wall, bottom, and central area inside
the STAT table unit with a dry clean cloth.
Also wipe off the condensation and stains on the removed STAT table.
5. Wipe the wall, bottom, and central area inside the STAT table unit and the STAT
table with a clean cloth damped with ethyl alcohol (ethanol).
6. Set the STAT table on the STAT table unit in place.
While engaging the guide hole on the STAT table with the guide pin on the table unit,
tighten the two fixing screws near the center with fingers.
7. Remount the STAT table cover in the original position and close the main cover.
9. Select Cleaning Inside of STAT Compartment from the list of maintenance
items.
10. Touch Update.
11. Touch OK.

Procedure for cleaning the inside of the reagent refrigeration unit
There is a glass inside of STAT table, which is used for reading bar code. Be careful not
to contaminate it when you clean the inside. If the glass becomes dirty, it will not be able
CAUTION to read bar code.

2. Open the main cover and remove the reagent refrigerator lid.
3. Remove the reagents along with the reagent tray and gently place the tray in a
safe place.
4. Wipe off the condensation and stains on the wall, bottom, and central area inside
the reagent refrigeration unit with a dry clean cloth.
5. Wipe the wall, bottom, and central area inside the reagent refrigeration unit with a
clean cloth damped with ethyl alcohol (ethanol).
6. Set the reagents and reagent tray in the reagent refrigeration unit in place.
7. Remount the reagent refrigerator lid in the original position and close the main
cover.
9. Select Cleaning Inside of Reagent Refrigerator from the list of maintenance
items.
10. Touch Update.
11. Touch OK.

8.8.9 Replacing the antistatic brush
The antistatic brush reduces the effect of eliminating static electricity as it is getting
stained. This causes an error in liquid-level detection of samples. Replace the antistatic
brush with a new one.
Procedure for replacing the antistatic brush

Materials Needed:
New antistatic brush, MU8525

3. Remove the cover of rack feeder unit.
4. Loosen the fixing screw at the top of the antistatic brush to remove it.
Antistatic brush Fixing screws
5. Mount a new antistatic brush and tighten the fixing screw.

6. Replace the cover of the rack feeder and close the main cover.
8. Select Replace anti-static brush from the list of maintenance items.
9. Touch Update.
10. Touch OK.

8.8.10 Replacing rack ID labels
If a rack ID label is used with it remaining scratched, stained, or deteriorated with time,
may cause a read error will result. Replace the rack ID label with a new one.
Rack ID labels are deteriorated with time.

If a rack ID read error occurs in a label used for an extended period of time and if the
CAUTION
label shows none of the following anomalies, the label is assumed to have been
deteriorated due to discoloration, reduction in reflectivity, etc. If this is the case, replace
all the labels that have been used for the same period of time as the label concerned.
• The barcode on a label has become chipped, faint, or scratched due to abrasion,
scraping, etc.
• A label has been stained or blurred due to adhesion of foreign matters (liquid or solid).
• A label has been peeled or torn.
Procedure for replacing rack ID labels

Materials Needed:
• New rack ID label
• Paper cutter
• If it is difficult to peel off a label to be replaced, dampen the label with water and use a
maybe a razor blade or scissors.
CAUTION • Never use an organic solvent such as ethyl alcohol (ethanol) because it will alter the
quality of the plastic surface on a rack.
• When water was used, wipe it off completely so that no moisture will remain on a rack.
• When using a paper cutter for peeling off a label, do not scratch the rack surface.
1. Peel off the target rack ID label stuck on the rack.

2. Stick a new rack ID label on the rack.
When replacing rack ID labels, do not stick labels with the same rack ID on multiple
racks.
CAUTION
Doing so results in a mix-up between samples.
Update the performed date by touching Replacing Rack ID label on the “Analyzer
TIP

8.8.11 Replacing the Sample Probe and Reagent Probes
Tubes
Replace the tubing tube, when the tubing tube that connects sample probes and
reagent probes has break or when the liquid leak from the joint.
Procedure for replacing the sample probe and reagent probes

tubes
Replace the tubing of sample probe and reagent probe in the same procedure.
The common replacing procedure for replacing tubing tube of sample probe and
reagent probes are showing below.
Materials Needed:
New tubing tube: MU8519, MU8520, MU8521
Before start the replacement, check if the probes are above the wash station. Liquid
dripping will occur during displacement of the probe.
CAUTION
3. Take off by loosen the connector on the both side of the tubing tube.
4. Tighten the new tubing connectors to secure each probe and joints. Tighten the
connectors firmly to ensure that no liquid leaks from the joints.
The items to The list of Single Operation button

be replaced maintenance items
Sample probe Replacing Sample Probe Tubes Replacing Sample Probe
R1 probe Replacing R1 Probe Tubes Replacing Reagent Probe/Syringe
R2 probe Replacing R2 Probe Tubes
The items to be replaced or The items to be set

cleaned

9. Touch Update.
date.
10. Touch OK.

Reagent ProbeTubes
Sample ProbeTube

8.8.12 Executing W1 (auto-washing of the sample probe
and cuvettes)
If an analysis operation is forcibly stopped, the analysis operation will be aborted while
a sample remains in the sample probe and reagents remain in cuvettes. Eliminate the
reagents in cuvettes and the sample in the sample probe by performing W1 operation.
2. Touch W1 (F5).
3. Touch Start.
The W1 operation starts to clean the inside of cuvettes. The W1 operation requires
approximately nine minutes.
4. Touch Update.
date.
5. Touch OK.

8.8.13 Replacing Air Filters
When the air filters have been broken, replace them.
Procedure for Replacing the Air Filter

Materials needed:
New air filters
• For the front of the analyzer: MU9593
• For the back of the analyzer: MU8531
Always mount the air filters to the system. In the state without the filters, the heaters
and the power supplies get dusty to cause fire or short circuit.
CAUTION
the main power.
2. Remove the targeted air filters.
Air filter Air filter

(MU9593) (MU9593)
3. Mount the new air filters on the analyzer.
Press the RESET button. After 10 seconds, press the ON button to turn on the system
power. Update the performed date by touching Clean air filters on the “Analyzer
TIP

8.8.14 Replacing syringe cases and syringe heads
The syringe cases and case heads explained in this section are:
• For S syringe of sample dispenser
• For R syringe of reagent dispenser
• For R syringe of wash water dispenser
Replace syringe cases when:
• The syringe head is chipped, worn or damaged in any way.
• Leaks occur even after maintenance and correct installation.
The case heads for S-syringe and R-syringe are identified with their figures.
CAUTION
S-syringe case head R-syringe case head
Procedure for replacing the syringe cases

Use the same procedure to replace S-syringe case for the sample dispenser, R-syringe
case for the reagent dispenser and R-syringe case for the wash water dispenser. Follow
these procedures:
• Removing the Old Syringe case.
• Installing a New Syringe case.
• Priming Syringe.
Materials Needed:
• New syringe case and case head
For S-syringe of sample dispenser: ZM0229
For R-syringe of reagent dispenser and wash water dispenser: MU8370
Removing the Old Syringe case and Case head

To replace an old syringe case and case head, you must first remove the old syringe. To
do this:
3. Loosen the fixing screws of the two tubes connected to the case head of the
targeted dispenser and remove the tubes.
4. Loosen the piston fixing screw located at the bottom of the dispenser to be
replaced.

5. Loosen the fixing nut on top of the dispenser for which the piston fixing screw has
been loosened.
6. Pull the syringe case frontward to remove the syringe unit carefully from the
mounting grooves.
Fixing nut
Fixing screws Mounting groove
Syringe case
Piston fixing screw
Mounting groove Fixing nut

Fixing screws
Syringe case
Piston fixing screw
Fixing nut
Case head
Syringe case
Mounting groove
Fixing screw

• Do not apply excessive force to the fixing screws when removing the syringe case. If an
excessive force is applied to the fixing screws, the syringe case may be damaged.
CAUTION • When removing the syringe case, exercise care not to bend the tube.
7. While holding the case head and syringe case, turn the syringe case
counterclockwise to remove it.
8. Pull out the syringe from the case head.
Be careful that the O-ring does not fall out of the head and get lost. If it remains in the
syringe head, remove it carefully with tweezers.
Case head
O-ring
Syringe
Syringe
case
Installing a New Syringe case and Case head

When you install the new syringe case and case head, to do this:
1. Insert the syringe into the new case head.
Never apply a strong alkali such as the AU detergent alkali to the syringe case and
case head. The strong alkali adhering to the syringe case and case head will cause
CAUTION cracks on them.
If the strong alkali has adhered to, remove the syringe case and case head and wash
them with water.
2. Mount the new syringe case on the case head. Screw the syringe case onto the
syringe, until the head comes into light contact. Then fasten it by an extra 45 to
60 degrees.

3. Insert the dispenser into the mounting groove by holding the case head. Tighten
the fixing nut while pressing the case head with fingers.
Fixing nut
Case head
Syringe case
Mounting groove
4. Tighten the piston fixing screw.

5. Fix the removed two tubes to the initial positions of the case head.
Fix it securely not to leak.
Priming New Syringe

You must prime any new syringes when you replaced the syringe case and case head.
To do this:

This brings up the confirmation screen.
The item to be replaced The list of maintenance items Single Operation button
S syringe case of the Replacing Sample Syringe Replacing Sample Syringe
sample dispenser case
R1 syringe case of the Replacing R1 Syringe case Replacing Reagent Probe/
reagent dispenser Syringe
R2 syringe case of the Replacing R2 Syringe case
reagent dispenser
R syringe case of the Replacing Sample Replacing Wash Syringe
wash water dispenser Dispenser Syringe case
The item to be replaced The items to be set

S syringe case of the sample dispenser The number of operation: 260
R1 syringe case of the reagent • The syringe to be replaced: R1
dispenser • The number of operation: 5 or more
R2 syringe case of the reagent • The syringe to be replaced: R2
dispenser • The number of operation: 5 or more
R syringe case of the wash water • The number of operation: 5 or more
dispenser

The deionized water will flow through the tube and the air in the tube will be purged.
• In case of the reagent dispenser, select R1 or R2 on the “Start Confirmation” dialog and
repeat step 4 until the air in the tube has been completely purged.
• It takes 12 to 44 minutes from start to finish of replacing the sample syringe. If you stop the
operation, press the TABLE ROTATION/DIAG button. At this time an abort error alarm
will generate. Perform alarm clear process without any corrective action.
• When replacing a syringe other than the R-syringe of wash water dispenser, go to step 8.
5. When replacing the R-syringe of wash water dispenser, touch Replacing

Sample Syringe from the “Single Operation” buttons.
6. Set the number of times the wash water is drained to 260, then touch OK.
Air from the wash water dispenser ends up in the sample syringe and has to be removed
using the sample syringe prime.
8. Remove the syringe case again.

Loosen the piston fixing screw and fixing nut and remove the syringe case from the
dispenser.

9. Move the piston of the syringe up and down slowly by hand, and confirm that
there are no bubbles on the syringe head.
If bubbles are still found, move the piston up and down until the bubbles are purged.
Do not move the piston by hand without mounting the syringe on the syringe case.
Doing so will not retain the accuracy due to deformation of the piston and shorten the
CAUTION service life.
Case head
Confirm that
no bubbles are
attached.
Syringe
Syringe case
10. Mount the syringe case assembly on the case head.

11. Touch Update.
date.
12. Touch OK.


TIP

8.8.15 Replacing packing in the wash nozzle tube
mounting joints
Replace a packing if it's chipped or broken when checking.
Materials Needed:
• New packing MU8427
• A pair of tweezers
1. Remove the wash nozzle station.

For details on removing the wash nozzle station, refer to “8.5.4 Cleaning the wash nozzle
unit and checking the tube mounting joints” on page 8-37.
2. Remove the packing with tweezers from the tube mounting joints.
3. Mount a new packing on the tube mounting joints.
• When mounting the tube to the mounting joints, make sure to mount on the right position.
• When attaching a wash nozzle to the tube mounting joint tighten the cap firmly. If the cap
CAUTION is not tightened sufficiently, water leaks will result.
• Engage the packing with the groove of the tube mounting joint.
4. Mount the wash nozzle tube mounting joints back to the original position.
Groove of the tube

mounting joint

6. Touch to select Replacing the wash nozzle joint from the list of maintenance
items.
7. Touch Update.
date.
8. Touch OK.

8.9 Resetting the system when switched
to the stop mode while performing
maintenance
When switched to the stop mode while performing maintenance, reset the system with
following steps.
1. Remove the cause of the error.
2. Confirm that the “Analyzer Maintenance: Maintenance tab” screen is displayed
from the AU680 “Home” screen in following order: Menu>Maintenance>User
Maintenance>Analyzer Maintenance>Maintenance.
3. Touch Update.
4. Touch Cancel.
5. Touch the Stop/Standby.
The Warm up mode or Standby mode is entered after the initialization.

8.10 Using the OSV (Option)
Using the OSV (Olympus Support Vision) allows operators to transmit manually the
AU680’s various parameters to Olympus service center, and Olympus service center
can check the operating status and perform troubleshooting of the problems on analysis
data by using this information.
Transmittable parameters and data on OSV menu:
• Files such as analysis parameters and system settings in the parameter menu.
• Analysis data
• Log files such as operation log and alarm log.
• Other files of the program version, etc.

8.10.1 Transmitting the files. See page 8-108.
8.10.2 When the OSV connection is off. See page 8-109.
This function is an option. A separate support contract is needed to use this function.
For details, please contact your local Olympus representative.
WARNING
• The OSV connection is always on after start-up, when the contract is closed.
TIP • The OSV function does not transmit personal information such as patient information.

8.10.1 Transmitting the files
Maintenance>OSV to display the “User Maintenance: OSV” screen.
2. Check the display of F5 to confirm that the connection status of the OSV is on.
Display of F5 Connection status of the OSV

Stop Connected
Connect Not connected
3. Select the check box of the file to be transmitted in the “Output”.

4. Touch File Transfer (F8).
The confirmation message of transmission start appears.
5. Touch OK to transmit the files.

The transmission completes when the message “Please wait” disappeared.

8.10.2 When the OSV connection is off
In the step 2 above, when the OSV connection is off, connect to OSV following the
procedure below.
1. Touch Connect (F5).
The OSV connection confirmation dialog appears.
2. Touch OK to connect.
3. Confirm that F5 key changed to “Stop”.

8.11 AU680 Maintenance Schedule
Date (below)
Maintenance
Month Year:
Daily 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Checking for any leak
from sample dispenser,
reagent dispenser, and
wash water dispenser
Checking for any leak
from detergent rolling
pump unit
Checking the quantity of
master detergent and
supplying it
Checking and cleaning
the sample probe,
reagent probes, and
mixing bars
Manual checking the
Printer and Paper
Weekly 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Manual cleaning the
sample probe and mixing
bars
Execution of
W2(Automatic washing of
each probe, mixing bar,
and cuvette, etc.)
Execution of Photocal
measurement
Cleaning the sample pre-
diluent bottle
Monthly 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Cleaning the Sample
Probe and Reagent
Probe Wash Stations
Cleaning the HbA1c
probe wash stations
Cleaning the Mixing Bar
Wash Station
Cleaning the wash nozzle
unit and checking the
Cleaning the Deionized
Water Filter
Cleaning the Sample
Probe Filter
Every Three
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Months
Cleaning Air Filters
Replacing the Deionized
Water Filter
Replacing the Sample
Probe Filter
Cleaning the Deionized
Water Tank
Replacing the Detergent
Rolling Tube

Date (below)
Maintenance
Month Year:
Every Six Months 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Replacing the
Photometer Lamp
Washing Cuvettes and
the cuvette wheel
Yearly or As
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Necessary
Replacing O-rings in the
wash nozzle tube
mounting joints
Replacing cuvettes
Manual Wash the reagent
probes
Replacing Sample Probe
and Reagent Probes
Replacing Mixing Bars
Replacing the wash
nozzle joint
Replacing syringes
Cleaning the inside of the
STAT table unit and
Replacing the antistatic
brush
Replacing rack ID labels
Replacing the Sample
Probe and Reagent
Probes Tubes
Executing W1 (auto-
washing of the sample
probes and cuvettes)
Replacing Air Filters
Replacing syringe cases
and syringe heads
Replacing packing in the
wash nozzle tube
mounting joints

9
Error Flag
Error flags are generated by the system when it

encounters a condition that can affect the
result. This condition can range from minor
warnings to severe errors that require
immediate attention. It is important that the
operator reviews each flag as it is generated
and identifies the root cause, and take an
appropriate action.
No result should be reported with an
unresolved, unexpected flag. When in doubt,
always consider repeating the sample analysis,
and diluting it if necessary.
This chapter contains a list of all error flags in
order priority, suggestions of their cause, and
action to take.
9.1 Summary of Error Flags. See page 9-2.

9.2 Error Flag Details. See page 9-4.
AU680 User Guide Version4.0 9. Error Flag 9-1

9.1 Summary of Error Flags
The following table summarizes the error flags in order of priority:
Flag Cause
d Excluded from QC by user.
e Data edited by user.
( Shortage of detergent for contamination parameters.
Wa Result has been analyzed with an erroneous cuvette.
R Insufficient reagent.
# Insufficient sample.
% Clot detected.
? Unable to calculate a result.
n LIH test not performed.
l Result may be affected by lipemia.
i Result may be affected by icterus.
h Result may be affected by hemolysis.
Y Reagent blank OD at last photometric point high.
U Reagent blank OD at last photometric point low.
y Reagent blank/routine OD at first photometric point high.
u Reagent blank/routine OD at first photometric point low.
@ OD is higher than 3.0.
$ Not enough data to determine linearity of reaction.
D OD of reaction is higher than maximum OD range.
B OD of reaction is lower than minimum OD range.
* Linearity error in rate method.
& Prozone test data is abnormal.
Z Prozone error.
E Overreaction in a rate assay detected.
Fx Result (OD) is higher than the dynamic range.
Gx Result (OD) is lower than the dynamic range.
! Unable to calculate concentration.
) Reagent lot no. used at sample analysis is different from that used at calibration
analysis.
a Reagent expired.
ba Calibration expired.
bh No valid calibration used.
bn Mastercurve used.
bz Calibration curve for Prozone data used.
F Result is higher than the dynamic range.
G Result is lower than the dynamic range.
Tx Result of T-Hb or/and HbA1c is higher than the dynamic range.
ph Result is higher than the upper panic value.
pl Result is lower than the low panic value.
T Abnormality found in inter-chemistry check.
P Positive.
N Negative.
H Result is higher than reference range.
L Result is lower than reference range.
9-2 9. Error Flag AU680 User Guide Version4.0

Flag Cause
J Result is higher than the repeat decision range.
K Result is lower than the repeat decision range.
fh Result is higher than the repeat run reflex range.
fl Result is lower than the repeat run reflex range.
Va The result of multiple measurement alienation check is NG.
xQ Failure of one control used in a multirule QC.
1Q QC data exceeds the range entered in the Single Check Level field.
2Q QC data exceeds 13S control range.
4Q QC data exceeds R4S control range.
6Q A preset number of consecutive QC results fall on one side of the mean.
7Q Consecutive QC results show steadily increasing or decreasing values.
S Sample repeated and original results replaced by repeat result.
/ Test pending or not analyzed.
r Data transmitted to host.
c Data corrected by user.

9.2 Error Flag Details
d (Excluded from QC by user)
QC data has been manually excluded from calculation. This flag is applied in
Menu>QC>QC Data Review. For details on excluding QC data, refer to “7.5.1 Entering
Material Parameters” on page 7-19.
Action:
No action specifically required. However, prior to excluding any QC data, investigate
and record the cause of the anomalous value, as dictated by local procedures.
e (Data edited by user)

Data has been edited.
• For details on editing results, refer to “6.14 Editing Analysis Data” on page 6-58.
• For details on viewing analysis results, refer to “6.4.2 Displaying Reaction Monitor” on
page 6-13.
Action:
No action specifically required. However, review any changed data carefully prior to
reporting results.
( (Shortage of detergent for contamination parameters)

One or more detergents set for contamination parameters in Position 62 + 63 for R1
and 49 + 50 for R2 are empty. Contamination parameters are suspended for the
related cleaning solution. Carry-over might have occurred on tests that have this flag.
Action:
1. Fill the detergent bottles.
2. Analyze the flagged tests again.
Wa (Result has been analyzed with an erroneous cuvette)

The result has been analyzed with an erroneous cuvette.
Action:
1. Wash the erroneous cuvette and perform a photocal.
2. If the error still occurs, replace the cuvette.
3. Repeat analysis.

R (Insufficient reagent)
Level detectors cannot detect reagent.
Action:
Consider the following:
1. Review all results generated immediately prior to this flag for consistency and
validity (especially low or high results), and repeat if necessary.
2. Place new reagent onto the system and repeat analysis.
3. If the error occurs in spite of sufficient reagent, the reagent bottle may contain
bubbles. If so remove the bubbles and perform another reagent check.
4. Wipe the reagent bottle opening if it is wet and inspect the reagent probe, clean
or replace as necessary.
For details on inspecting, cleaning and priming reagent probes and wash stations, refer to
“8.3.4 Checking and cleaning the sample probe, reagent probe, and mixing bar” on
page 8-14 and “8.5.1 Cleaning the Sample Probe and Reagent Probe Wash Stations” on
page 8-30.
5. Ensure the reagent probe is correctly installed and connected.
# (Insufficient sample)
The sample probe cannot detect liquid. This is caused by one of the following:
• Insufficient sample volume.
• Malfunction of the sample level detection system.
Action:
1. Review all other results that were generated on the same sample prior to
generating the # flag to verify validity and consistency-no extremely low or high
values.
2. Add more sample to the sample cup, and repeat the test.
3. Wipe the probe with an alcohol swab and check the probe is attached correctly.
4. Replace the sample probe.
For details on replace a sample probe, refer to “8.8.4 Replacing Sample Probe and
Reagent Probes” on page 8-76.

% (Clot detected)
The sample probe has become blocked or partially blocked during sample aspiration.
Action:
Check the following:
1. Review all other results that were generated on the same sample prior to
generating the % flag to verify validity and consistency-no extremely low or high
values.
2. Verify that the sample is free of clots, and remove any present. If necessary,
centrifuge the sample and repeat analysis.
3. If the error still occurs, wash the sample probe.
For details on replace the sample probe, refer to “8.8.4 Replacing Sample Probe and
? (Unable to calculate a result)

A result cannot be calculated for this samples because:
• The absorbance of the sample is above 3.0 OD.
• In a rate reaction, fewer than three photometric readings satisfy the assay criteria
specified in the specific test parameters.
• The system has had a technical malfunction or has become isolated from the power
supply.
Action:
1. The sample can be severely lipemic, icteric, hemolytic or can contain excessively
large amounts of the analyte being tested. Dilute the sample and run the test
again.
2. Verify the reagent condition.
3. The system generates error codes or other alarms to identify the malfunction.
Once the problem is solved, repeat analysis.
If the issue persists contact your local technical support organization.
n (LIH test not preformed)

The LIH test has not been performed.
Action:
1. Examine the sample and repeat if necessary.
2. Check the LIH reagent.

l (Result may be affected by lipemia)
The result may be affected by lipemia.
Action:
Follow your laboratory procedure for lipemic samples.
i (Result may be affected by icterus)

The result may be affected by bilirubin.
Action:
Follow your laboratory procedure for icteric samples.
h (Result may be affected by hemolysis)

The result may be affected by hemolysis.
Action:
Follow your laboratory procedure for hemolytic samples.
Y (Reagent blank OD at last photometric point high)

Reagent blank OD is higher than the reagent OD limit range defined for the last
photometric point. This is set in Menu>Parameters>Specific Test Parameters>General.
This could be caused by:
• Reagent expired.
• Reagent contamination.
• Improperly prepared reagents.
Action:
1. Check the reagent expiry date.
2. Check the reagent condition.
3. Replace the reagent and repeat analysis.

U (Reagent blank OD at last photometric point low)
Reagent blank OD is lower than the reagent OD limit range defined for the last
photometric point. This is set in Menu>Parameters>Specific Test Parameters>General.
This could be caused by:
Action:
y (Reagent blank/routine OD at first photometric point high)

Reagent OD at P0 in reagent blank or normal analysis is higher than the reagent OD
limit range defined for the first photometric point. This is set in
Menu>Parameters>Specific Test Parameters>General. This could be caused by:
Action:
u (Reagent blank/routine OD at first photometric point low)

Reagent OD at P0 in reagent blank or normal analysis is lower than the reagent OD limit
range defined for the first photometric point. This is set in Menu>Parameters>Specific
Test Parameters>General. This could be caused by:
Action:

@ (OD is higher than 3.0)
Abnormally high value. A reaction OD has exceeded 3.0. In a dual wavelength
measurement, an error occurs if either of the two wavelengths exceed 3.0 OD. This is
caused by:
• Sample quality.
• Faulty photometer lamp.
Action:
large volumes of the analyte being tested. Dilute the sample and repeat analysis.
2. Perform a photometer check to assess the condition of the lamp. Replace the
lamp if the results are out of range.
3. Check the system (syringes, probes and so on).
$ (Not enough data to determine linearity of reaction)

Fewer than three read points of a rate reaction are within the acceptable optical density
range specified. In order to calculate a rate reaction properly, at least three readings
must be taken before reaching maximum or minimum optical density. If these optical
density limits are exceeded, linearity calculations are not made due to a high
concentration or a problem with the condition of the reagent.
Action:
large volumes of the analyte being tested. Dilute the sample and repeat analysis.
2. Verify the reagent.
3. Check the system (syringes, probes and so on).
D (OD of reaction is higher than the maximum OD range)

The optical density of the photometry point FST + 2 (first photometry point plus two)
exceeds the maximum optical density value range during a positive reaction (more
likely) or negative reaction rate method. The optical density of a specified read point
(first photometry point or last photometry point) has exceeded the maximum optical
density value range during a fixed method.
Action:
1. The sample may be severely lipemic, icteric, hemolytic or may contain
excessively large volumes of the analyte being tested. Dilute the sample and run
the test again.
2. Ensure the reagent has not expired.
3. If this flag is generated for several assays, the lamp might need to be replaced.
Perform a photometer check (See “8.4.3 Execution of Photocal measurement” on
page 8-25), to assess the condition of the photometer lamp.

B (OD of reaction is lower than the minimum OD range)
The optical density of the photometry point FST + 2 (first photometry point plus two)
does not reach the minimum optical density value range during a positive reaction or
negative (more likely) reaction rate method.
Action:
1. The sample may be severely lipemic, icteric, hemolytic or may contain
excessively large volumes of the analyte being tested. Dilute the sample and run
the test again.
2. Ensure the reagent has not expired.
3. If this flag is generated for several assays, the lamp might need to be replaced.
Perform a photometer check, to assess the condition of the photometer lamp.
For details on how to check perform a photometer, refer to “8.4.3 Execution of Photocal
* (Linearity error in rate methods)

This flag is generated when the rate of a reaction varies by more than the defined %
variance, as defined in Menu>Parameters>Specific Test Parameters>General and is
therefore deemed non-linear. Possible causes are:
• Contaminated reagent.
• Unusually high result.
• Defective cuvettes.
• Electrical noise.
• Dirty or defective mixing bars.
• Reagent dispenser or probe alignment problem.
• Sample probe misalignment.
• If several tests performed at 340 nm generate this flag, check the condition of the
photometer lamp.
Action:
1. Dilute the sample and run it again or perform a diluted repeat run.
2. Replace reagent if contaminated or out-of-date.
3. Clean all mixing bars and check them for damage. Replace any that have
scratches or chips to their teflon coating.
4. Run the photometer check to determine lamp condition. If OK, check cuvette
condition.
5. Replace the photometer lamp and perform photo-calibration.

& (Prozone test data abnormal)
The data for prozone judgement is abnormal.
Action:
Dilute the sample and repeat analysis.
If the issue persists contact your local support organization.
Z (Prozone error)
The data check equation for any one of logic check 1, 2 or 3 is satisfied. This is often
caused by an abnormally high concentration of analyte in a sample.
Action:
E (Overreaction in a rate assay detected)

In the rate assay, the result is judged as an error by checking an overreaction in which
the reaction was finished in an excessively short time. This is often caused by an
abnormally high concentration of analyte in a sample.
Action:
Fx (Result (OD) is higher than dynamic range)

No concentration could be calculated. The OD of the sample exceeded the OD of the
upper limit of the dynamic range.
Action:
Gx (Result (OD) is lower than dynamic range)

No concentration could be calculated. The OD of the sample is lower than the OD of the
low limit of the dynamic range.
Action:
1. Review the result in the clinical context of the patient and repeat if necessary.
2. Check the reagent probe and vials for proper position.
3. Check the reagents for bubbles.

! (Unable to calculate concentration)
The system has failed to calculate a result.
Action:
If this is a single sample issue, repeat and dilute if necessary.
If multiple samples are affected, review all operating parameters such as:
• Sample Integrity
• Calibration
• Reagent quality
• General system issues
If the issue persists contact your local technical support organization.
) (Reagent lot no. used at sample analysis is different from that

used at calibration analysis)
The reagent lot number does not match the calibrated reagent lot number.
Action:
1. Calibrate the reagent used in the test that generated the flag.
2. Calculate the results manually by selecting Menu>Routine>Sample Manager>Main
and use “Recalculating” function.
a (Reagent expired)
The reagent has either expired or has been onboard beyond the period defined in the
Specific Test parameters.
Action:
Replace the reagents as soon as possible, perform a reagent check and perform a
calibration if necessary.
ba (Calibration expired)
Lot-specific user calibration has expired. Review calibration in
Menu>Calibration>Calibration Monitor.
Action:
1. Carefully review any results generated with this flag and repeat if necessary.
2. Perform lot-specific user calibration as soon as possible.
For details on calibrating tests, refer to “6.7 Performing a Repeat Run” on page 6-44.

bh (No valid calibration used)
Lot-specific user calibration has either not been performed, or has not been successful.
Review calibration in Menu>Calibration>Calibration Monitor.
Action:
Results can be erroneous and should not be reported.
1. Perform lot-specific user calibration.
2. Repeat analysis samples using a valid calibration.
bn (Mastercurve used)
Lot-specific user calibration has either not been performed, or has not been successful.
The system has used the lot-specific master curve to generate the result. Review
calibration in Menu>Calibration>Calibration Monitor.
Action:
Results can be erroneous and should not be reported.
1. Perform lot-specific user calibration.
2. Repeat analysis samples using a valid calibration.
bz (Calibration curve for Prozone data used)

The system has used the calibration curve for prozone data to generate the result. It is
similar to real result and should be used to estimate the dilution rate for repeat run.
Action:
Carefully review any results generated with this flag and repeat the analysis in diluted
mode.
F (Result is higher than the dynamic range)

The concentration of the sample is above the dynamic range high limit. Set in
Menu>Parameters>Specific Test Parameters>General.
Action:
Dilute the sample with the appropriate sample diluent and re-analyze.
Samples should be diluted so that they yield a value in the middle of the measuring
range.

G (Result is lower than the dynamic range)
The concentration of the sample is below the dynamic range low limit, set in
Menu>Parameters>Specific Test Parameters>General. Or the reagent was not pipetted
properly.
Action:
1. Review the result in the clinical context of the patient and repeat if necessary.
2. Check the reagent probe and reagent bottle for proper position.
3. Check the reagents for bubbles.
Tx (Result of T-Hb or/and HbA1c is higher than the dynamic

range)
The result of T-Hb and HbA1c is higher than the dynamic range set in
Menu>Parameters>Specific Test Parameters>HbA1c.
Action:
1. Repeat the analysis.
2. If the result is confirmed, report as mentioned in the reagent guide.
ph (Result is higher than the upper panic value)

The result higher than the upper panic value. This is set in Menu>Parameters>Specific
Test Parameters>Range.
Action:
This denotes that the result is outside user-defined panic ranges. Take immediate action
on behalf of the laboratory in accordance with local operating procedures.
pl (Result is lower than the low panic value)

The result lower than the low panic value. This is set in Menu>Parameters>Specific Test
Parameters>Range.
Action:
This denotes that the result is outside user-defined panic ranges. Take immediate action
on behalf of the laboratory in accordance with local operating procedures.

T (Abnormality found in inter-chemistry check.)
An abnormality has been detected by the checked tests i.e. result exceeds the check
range specified in Menu>Parameters>Misc>Checked Tests.
Action:
1. Repeat analysis.
2. Follow your laboratory protocol for abnormal test results.
P (Positive)
Qualitative result: Sample result exceeds the upper value. This is set in
Menu>Parameters>Specific Test Parameters>Range.
Action:
No action required.
N (Negative)
Qualitative result: Sample result is lower than the low value. This is set in
Action:
No action required.
H (Result is higher than reference range)

Result value is higher than value entered for level High in Specific Ranges in
For details on setting reference intervals, refer to “4.5.6 Set the range” on page 4-40.
Action:
Follow your laboratory protocol for abnormal test results.
L (Result is lower than reference range)

Result value is lower than value entered for level Low in Specific Ranges in
For details on setting reference intervals, refer to “4.5.6 Set the range” on page 4-40.
Action:
Follow your laboratory protocol for abnormal test results.

J (Result is higher than the repeat decision range)
The result exceeds the repeat decision range. This is set in Menu>Parameters>Repeat
Parameters>Repeat Specific.
Action:
Execute user defined action.
K (Result is lower than the repeat decision range)

The result is lower than the repeat decision range. This is set in
Menu>Parameters>Repeat Parameters>Repeat Specific.
Action:
fh (Result is higher than the repeat run reflex range)

The generated result is higher than a user specified reflex range, set in
Action:
fl (Result is lower than the repeat run reflex range)

The generated result is lower than a user specified reflex range, set in
Action:
Va (The result of multiple measurement alienation check is

NG)
The precision of replicates exceeds specification (assay specific).
Action:
Undertake the appropriate maintenance:
• Check syringes.
For details on inspecting syringes and tubes for air bubbles and leaks, refer to “8.3.1
Checking for any leak from sample dispenser, reagent dispenser, and wash water dispenser”
on page 8-7 and “8.3.2 Checking for any leak from detergent rolling pump unit” on page 8-10.
• Check sample probe.

For details on how to check sample probe, refer to “8.3.4 Checking and cleaning the
sample probe, reagent probe, and mixing bar” on page 8-14.
• Check for signs of system contamination.

xQ (Failure of one control used in a multirule QC)
If one of the two pairs of data, in multirule QC, is out of range, the other piece of data is
flagged. This is set in Menu>Parameter>QC Parameters>QC Specific.
For details on setting single or multi-check QC rules (all samples), refer to “4.8.2 Set the
Specific Quality Control Parameters” on page 4-61.
Action:
If QC results fall outside your acceptable range, investigate the cause before deciding
whether to report patient results. If any trends or sudden shifts in values are detected,
Follow standard laboratory procedure for out-of-range QC results such as:
• Repeat with fresh QC material.
• Perform calibration as required.
• Undertake maintenance as appropriate.
1Q (QC data exceeds the range entered in Single Check Level

field)
One point of QC data exceeds the limit defined in the Single Check Level on the check
tab in Menu>Parameters>QC Parameters>QC Specific.
Action:

2Q (QC data exceeds 13S control range)
One point of QC data exceeds the ±3SD limit defined in the Multi Check Level on the
Check tab in Menu>Parameters>QC Parameters>QC Specific.
Action:
3Q (QC data exceeds 22S control range)

Two contiguous QC data points exceed the control limit of ±2SD in the same direction.
This is set in Multi Check Level on the Check tab in Menu>Parameters>QC
Parameters>QC Specific.
Action:

4Q (QC Data exceeds R4S control range)
One of the two consecutive high and low consentration QC data points exceeds the
control limit of +2SD and the other exceeds the control limit of -2SD. This is set in Multi
Check Level on the Check tab in Menu>Parameters>QC Parameters>QC Specific.
Action:
5Q (QC Data exceeds 41S control range)

Four consecutive QC data points have exceeded the 1SD limit or -1SD limit. This is set
in Multi Check Level on the Check tab in Menu>Parameters>QC Parameters>QC Specific.
Action:

6Q (A preset number of consecutive QC results fall on one
side of the mean)
Results for a preset number (7-10) of consecutive data points falls either above or
below the mean. This is set in Multi Check Level on the Check tab in
Menu>Parameters>QC Parameters>QC Specific.
Action:
7Q (Consecutive QC results show steadily increasing or

decreasing values)
Results for a preset number (4-10) of consecutive data points tends to increase or
decrease. This is set in Multi Check Level on the Check tab in Menu>Parameters>QC
Parameters>QC Specific.
Action:

S (Sample repeated and original results replaced by repeat
result)
A sample test has been repeated and this repeat result has replaced the previous result
to become the final result.
Action:
No action required.
/ (Test pending or not analyzed)

The test was not performed, even though it was requested (usually because of a
shortage of reagent), or the result has not been resulted yet.
Action:
Review all results generated immediately prior to this flag for consistency and validity
(especially low or high results) and repeat if necessary.
1. Place new reagent onto the system and repeat analysis.
2. Inspect the reagent probe, clean or replace as necessary.
3. Ensure the reagent probe is correctly installed and connected.
r (Data transmitted to host)

Action:
No action required.
c (Data corrected by user)

Data has been corrected in the Data Correction window.
For details on correcting results, refer to “6.14 Editing Analysis Data” on page 6-58.
Action:
No action specifically required. However, review any changed data carefully prior to
reporting results.

10
Error Messages
This chapter describes the error messages that

you can encounter.
The following error messages are described:
• After checking cups on STAT table, please perform STAT check in

STAT status menu. See page 10-3.
• After checking printer, please resume printer in XXXX menu. XXXX:
screen name. See page 10-3.
• After closing the reagent refrigerator lid, please perform reagent
check. See page 10-3.
• Calibration requisition is renewed. Please set new calibrator on
STAT table. See page 10-3.
• Calibration stability is expired. Please open Calibration requisition
menu and requisition the item. See page 10-4.
• Calibration stability will be expired soon. See page 10-4.
• Cuvette Error found. Please check it at User Maintenance. See
page 10-4.
• Detergent short. See page 10-4.
• Diluted Detergent short. See page 10-4.
• Dispensed STAT sample exists. See page 10-5.
• Error sample(s) exists. Please check sample(s) in STAT Status
menu. See page 10-5.
• Full of Conc tank. See page 10-5.
• Full of rack at Rack Collection. See page 10-5.
• Full of Waste tank. See page 10-6.
• Incorrect Parameter is found. Please open [MM...MM] menu and
check the parameters. MM...MM: Menu name. See page 10-6.
• Liquid is remained in Vacuum tank. See page 10-6.
• No Cup to be processed on STAT table. See page 10-6.
• No deionized water. Please check water outlet valve. See page 10-6.
• No Master Curve is scanned. Please check it at Reagent
Management. See page 10-7.
• No Photocal Data. Please perform photocal at User Maintenance.
See page 10-7.
• No Reagent volume. Please check it at Reagent Management. See
page 10-7.
AU680 User Guide Version4.0 10. Error Messages 10-1

• Please check STAT Status and set calibrators as needed. See
page 10-7.
• Please check STAT Status and set controls to be needed. See
page 10-8.
• Please check STAT Status and set RB cup as needed. See
page 10-8.
• Please perform Reagent Check. See page 10-8.
• QC requisition is renewed. Please set new control on STAT table.
See page 10-8.
• QC requisition is renewed. Please set new control. See page 10-9.
• RB stability is expired. Please open Calibration requisition menu
and requisition the item. See page 10-9.
• RB stability will be expired soon. See page 10-9.
• Reagent error found. Please check it at Reagent Management. See
page 10-9.
• Reagent is expired. Please check Reagent Management and set
new reagent in the refrigerator. See page 10-10.
• Reagent with the new reagent lot is added. See page 10-10.
• S Probe diluent is not set. See page 10-10.
• S Probe detergent is not set. See page 10-10.
• R Probe detergent is not set. See page 10-10.
• Temperature of the Incubator is over (under) the normal range. See
page 10-10.
• Temperature of the refrigerator is over (under) the normal range.
See page 10-11.
• Test has no Calibration Data. Please open Calibration requisition
menu and requisition the item. See page 10-11.
• Test has no RB Data. Please open Calibration requisition menu and
requisition the item. See page 10-11.
• Test items are set as Disabled at Start Condition. See page 10-11.
• The cover of Dispensing Position is open. See page 10-11.
• The cover of Rack Supply Unit is open. See page 10-12.
• The cover of reagent refrigerator is open. See page 10-12.
• The cover of repeat position is open. See page 10-12.
• The large cover of STAT table is open. See page 10-12.
• The sample on STAT table is incorrect. Please check it on STAT
status menu. See page 10-12.
• The small cover of STAT table is open. See page 10-13.
• The volume is reached to Alarm volume. Please check it at Reagent
Management. See page 10-13.
• Under communicating with HOST. See page 10-13.
• Under printing to printer. See page 10-13.
10-2 10. Error Messages AU680 User Guide Version4.0

After checking cups on STAT table, please perform STAT check
in STAT status menu.
Cause:
The STAT table cover is opened or a parameter is changed.
Action:
1. Check that the sample cups have been set in place on the STAT table.
2. Perform STAT check operation on the “STAT Status” screen.
After checking printer, please resume printer in XXXX menu.

XXXX: screen name.
Cause:
The printer status is abnormal.
Action:
Resume the printer on the “Analyzer Status” screen.
After closing the reagent refrigerator lid, please perform

reagent check.
Cause:
After opening the reagent refrigerator lid, reagent check is not performed.
Action:
Perform reagent check on the “Reagent Management” screen.
Calibration requisition is renewed. Please set new calibrator

on STAT table.
Action:
1. Check the “STAT Status” screen to set the calibrators again.
2. If the “Stat Analysis Mode” has been set to “Sample Check Mode” on the
“Analysis Mode” screen, perform STAT check.

Calibration stability is expired. Please open Calibration
requisition menu and requisition the item.
Cause:
Calibration data has expired.
Action:
1. Implement a calibration requisition on the “Calibration Requisition” screen.
2. Perform calibration analysis.
Calibration stability will be expired soon.

Cause:
Calibration data is just close to expiry.
Action:
Cuvette Error found. Please check it at User Maintenance.

Cause:
An anomaly has been found in the cuvette.
Action:
Check the cuvette on the “User Maintenance” screen.
Detergent short.
Action:
There is insufficient detergent. Check and replenish if necessary.
Diluted Detergent short.

Action:
There is insufficient diluted detergent. Check and replenish if necessary.

Dispensed STAT sample exists.
Cause:
The sample has been dispensed at the sample position where the STAT table attribute
was set to “Initial Run” or “Repeat Run”.
Action:
1. Check this sample on the “STAT Status” screen, and remove the sample cup.
Error sample(s) exists. Please check sample(s) in STAT Status

menu.
Cause:
An anomaly has been found in a sample that has been set on the STAT table.
Action:
1. Check the error information on the “STAT Status” screen.
2. Take an appropriate action for the error.
Full of Conc tank.

Cause:
The tank is full of concentrated waste liquid.
Action:
Contact your local support organization.
Full of rack at Rack Collection.

Cause:
The rack storage unit is full of racks.
Action:
Remove the rack from the rack storage.

Full of Waste tank.
Cause:
The tank is full of waste liquid.
Action:
Contact your local technical support organization.
Incorrect Parameter is found. Please open [MM...MM] menu

and check the parameters. MM...MM: Menu name.
Cause:
An error occurs in parameter check on either of parameter-related screens.
Action:
Check the parameters according to the indication.
Liquid is remained in Vacuum tank.

Cause:
Waste liquid exists in the vacuum tank.
Action:
No Cup to be processed on STAT table.

Cause:
No sample has been set on the STAT table.
Action:
Set the samples to be analyzed.
No deionized water. Please check water outlet valve.

Cause:
Displayed when deionized water tank is empty.
Action:
1. Check the water outlet valve.
2. If no abnormality is found in the water outlet system, contact your local technical
organization.

No Master Curve is scanned. Please check it at Reagent
Management.
Cause:
Reagent bottles with new lots of reagents have been set.
Action:
1. Check them in detail on the “Reagent Management” screen.
2. Read the data of master curves for the required tests with a handheld scanner.
No Photocal Data. Please perform photocal at User

Maintenance.
Cause:
No Photocal data exists.
Action:
Perform Photocal measurement on the “User Maintenance” screen.
No Reagent volume. Please check it at Reagent Management.

Cause:
There exists a test that cannot be performed due to insufficient remaining quantity of
reagent required for analysis.
Action:
1. Check it in detail on the “Reagent Management” screen.
2. Replenish reagent as needed.
Please check STAT Status and set calibrators as needed.

Cause:
The calibrators required for the calibration analysis are not set on the STAT table.
Action:
1. Check the calibrators required on the “STAT Status” screen.
2. Set the calibrators on the STAT table.

Please check STAT Status and set controls to be needed.
Cause:
The controls required for the QC analysis are not set to the STAT table.
Action:
1. Check the controls required on the “STAT Status” screen
2. Set the controls in the STAT table.
Please check STAT Status and set RB cup as needed.

Cause:
The RB cup required for the reagent blank analysis is not set on the STAT table.
Action:
1. Check the RB cup required on the “STAT Status” screen.
2. Set the RB cup in the STAT table.
Please perform Reagent Check.

Cause:
The reagent refrigerator lid is opened or a parameter is changed.
Action:
Perform reagent check on the “Reagent Management” screen.
QC requisition is renewed. Please set new control on STAT

table.
Action:
1. Check the “STAT Status” screen to set the control sample again.

QC requisition is renewed. Please set new control.
Action:
1. Check the control setting positions on the “STAT Status” screen to set the control
again.
RB stability is expired. Please open Calibration requisition

menu and requisition the item.
Cause:
Reagent blank data has expired.
Action:
1. Implement a reagent blank requisition on the “Calibration Requisition” screen.
2. Perform reagent blank analysis.
RB stability will be expired soon.

Cause:
Reagent blank data is just close to expiry.
Action:
Reagent error found. Please check it at Reagent Management.

Cause:
An error has been found in setting reagent bottles.
Action:
Check reagent bottle location on the “Reagent Management” screen.

Reagent is expired. Please check Reagent Management and
set new reagent in the refrigerator.
Cause:
An expired reagent bottle has been found.
Action:
1. Check reagents in detail on the “Reagent Management” screen.
2. Replace the expired reagent bottles with a new reagent bottle.
3. After adding a new reagent bottle, check the reagent.
Reagent with the new reagent lot is added.

Cause:
Reagent bottles with new lots of reagents have been added.
S Probe diluent is not set.

Action:
Add the sample diluent.
S Probe detergent is not set.

Action:
Add the sample probe detergent.
R Probe detergent is not set.

Action:
Add the reagent probe detergent.
Temperature of the Incubator is over (under) the normal range.

Cause:
When analysis is started, no correct analysis data can be outputted due to abnormal
temperature in the cuvette.
Action:
Check whether the incubator cover is open.

Temperature of the refrigerator is over (under) the normal
range.
Cause:
The reagent refrigerator temperature is abnormal.
Action:
Check whether the refrigerator cover is open.
Test has no Calibration Data. Please open Calibration

requisition menu and requisition the item.
Cause:
No calibration data exists. Otherwise, a calibration analysis failed to be made.
Action:
Test has no RB Data. Please open Calibration requisition menu

and requisition the item.
Cause:
No reagent blank data exists. Otherwise, a reagent blank analysis failed to be made.
Action:
Test items are set as Disabled at Start Condition.

Cause:
There exist tests for which masking has been set on the “Start Condition” screen. The
disabled test items will not be analyzed.
The cover of Dispensing Position is open.

Cause:
The dispense unit cover is open.
Action:
Close the cover.

The cover of Rack Supply Unit is open.
Cause:
The rack supply unit cover is open.
Action:
Close the cover.
The cover of reagent refrigerator is open.

Cause:
The reagent 1 or reagent 2 refrigerator lid is open.
Action:
Close the cover.
The cover of repeat position is open.

Cause:
The repeat run unit cover is open.
Action:
Close the cover.
The large cover of STAT table is open.

Cause:
The STAT table cover (L) is open.
Action:
Close the STAT table cover (L).
The sample on STAT table is incorrect. Please check it on STAT

status menu.
Cause:
Error sample(s) exists on the STAT table.
Action:
1. Check the error information on the “STAT Status” screen.
2. Take an appropriate action for the error.

The small cover of STAT table is open.
Cause:
The STAT table cover (S) is open.
Action:
Close the STAT table cover (S).
The volume is reached to Alarm volume. Please check it at

Reagent Management.
Cause:
The remaining number of reagent shots has been reduced under the specified number.
Action:
1. Check reagents in detail on the “Reagent Management” screen.
2. Add a new reagent bottle.
3. After adding a new reagent bottle, check the reagent.
Under communicating with HOST.

Cause:
The analyzer is under communication with the host computer.
Action:
Check the analyzer for the status of communication with the host computer on the
“Analyzer Status” screen.
Under printing to printer.

Cause:
Batch print or real-time print is being performed in the standby mode.
Action:
Check the printer status on the “Analyzer Status” screen.

11
Troubleshooting
This chapter can help to locate and solve any

problems that can occur when using the
AU680:
11.1 Troubleshooting and Maintenance. See page 11-2.

11.2 Troubleshooting the System - Data Problems. See page 11-2.
11.3 Troubleshooting the System - Reagents and Samples. See
page 11-6.
11.4 Troubleshooting the System - Mechanical Problems. See page 11-
10.
11.5 Troubleshooting the System - System Problems. See page 11-16.
11.6 Troubleshooting the System - Data Processor Problems. See
page 11-22.
11.7 Recovering from an Emergency Stop or Power Loss. See page 11-
26.
AU680 User Guide Version4.0 11. Troubleshooting 11-1

11.1 Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Regular preventative maintenance is essential for optimum system performance. A
significant number of problems outlined in this chapter are caused by not performing
regular preventative maintenance with the required care.
For each aspect of troubleshooting, you can find useful help by referring to the
corresponding section of the maintenance chapter.
For details on maintenance, refer to “8 Maintenance” on page 8-1.
11.2 Troubleshooting the System - Data

Problems
The following can identify data problems:
11.2.1 Data Problem Checklist. See page 11-2.
11.2.2 Checking Abnormal Data. See page 11-3.
11.2.3 Troubleshooting Software. See page 11-4.
11.2.1 Data Problem Checklist

Before troubleshooting, answer the following questions:
• Have you interpreted the data printout correctly?
For details on performing analysis, refer to “6 Performing Analysis” on page 6-1.
• Is the data flagged?
• Is the calibration out of range?
For details on checking calibration, refer to “7.5 Calibration Verification” on page 7-19.
• Is QC out of range?
For details on checking QC, refer to “6.4 Checking Results” on page 6-12.
• Is data inconsistent? This might be caused by maintenance tasks that are overdue.
Abnormal Data Analysis Using Routine Menu

Compare the reaction processes of samples showing normal data and of samples
showing abnormal data with the “Reaction Monitor” of the “Routine” menu and identify
the difference between them.
After performing a simultaneous reproducibility check for data confirmation, use “Data
Statistics” of the “Routine” menu to obtain the results for mean value, SD, CV, range,
etc.
• For details on operating procedure for the “Reaction Monitor” menu, refer to “6.4.2
Displaying Reaction Monitor” on page 6-13.
• For details on operating procedure for the “Data Statistics” menu, refer to “7.4
Calculating Statistics” on page 7-12.
11-2 11. Troubleshooting AU680 User Guide Version4.0

Abnormal Data Analysis Using Calibration Monitor Menu
Compare the calibration data for which normal data is obtained with the calibration data
for which abnormal data is generated, using the “Calibration Monitor” menu, then
identify the difference between them.
For details on operating procedure for the “Calibration Monitor” menu, refer to “6.4.3
Checking Calibration and Reagent Blank” on page 6-17.
Abnormal Data Analysis Using QC Monitor Menu

Compare the test with data that seems to be abnormal with the control reference
designated in the parameters using the “QC Monitor” menu. Judge the data reliability for
that test. If the test may include abnormal data due to low data reliability, identify the
cause of abnormal data: a systematic error or a random error (accidental error).
Confirm the meaning of the error flags of the multi-rule check. After confirmation, check
the data again from the point of view of the meaning of the error flags.
• For details on operating procedure for the “Quality Control” menu, refer to “5.6
Performing Quality Control (QC)” on page 5-36.
• For details on meaning of error flags and countermeasures, refer to “9 Error Flag” on
page 9-1 and “6.4 Checking Results” on page 6-12.
Abnormal Data Analysis Using Photocal Monitor Menu

Check for an abnormal cuvette using the “Photocal Monitor” menu.
Check that the cuvette where abnormal data is generated is identical to that recognized
to be abnormal by the “Photocal Monitor” menu.
If no abnormal cuvette is recognized by the “Photocal Monitor” menu, or if the cuvette
where abnormal data is generated and that recognized to be abnormal by the “Photocal
Monitor” menu are not identical, perform the photocal measurement again. After the
measurement, check the measurement result in the same described above, using the
“Photocal Monitor” menu.
For details on how to use the “Photocal Monitor” menu, refer to “8.4.3 Execution of
11.2.2 Checking Abnormal Data

• QC Monitor: Compare the test with the normal QC data and identify the differences.
Check QC parameters by selecting Menu>Parameters>QC Parameters>QC Specific.
For details on entering quality control (QC) parameters, refer to “4.8 Configuring QC
• Error Flags: Check the error flag definition.

• Calibration Monitor: Use the calibration monitor to check the differences in
measured counts and factor readings between the normal and abnormal calibration
data.
For details on calibrating tests, refer to “5.5 Calibrating Tests” on page 5-33.

11.2.3 Troubleshooting Software
Troubleshoot abnormal data by checking the following:
• Checking Patient Data. See page 11-4.
• Verifying Parameters (Checking the relationship between the analysis condition and symptom).
See page 11-4.
• Rechecking the Measurement Data. See page 11-4.
• Checking the Calibration and the Reagent Blank. See page 11-5.
• Checking Reaction Progress. See page 11-5.
• Checking Photocal Measurement Data. See page 11-5.
Checking Patient Data

If abnormal data is recognized:
• In a single test: If abnormal data is found in a single test, check the QC and
calibrator material for expiry date. Check reagent stability also.
• In all tests: If abnormal data is found in all tests, check detergent quality and
deionized water purity.
If the cause of abnormal data cannot be determined after checking patient data, try to
determine if the problem occurs at certain intervals during testing.
• Does the problem occur after a specific sequence of reagent bottles is used?
This can indicate the deterioration of reagents.
• Do the patient samples have something in common? Was a certain anticoagulant
used?
Verifying Parameters (Checking the relationship between the

analysis condition and symptom)
Verify the parameters if abnormal data is found in a single test or some tests.
If abnormal data is found in some tests, compare the analysis conditions (parameters)
of the tests that have abnormal data with each other to identify a common parameter(s).
There is a high possibility that the common parameters may result in abnormal data.
If a data error affects all the samples for a specific analysis test, check if the analysis
parameters for the specific analysis test that includes the error have been correctly set.
Rechecking the Measurement Data

If the cause of abnormal data cannot be determined after checking the parameters,
recheck the measurement data to identify the periodicity of abnormal data, common
analysis sequence, common items of samples, etc.

Checking the Calibration and the Reagent Blank
Check whether the calibration and the reagent blank are causing the abnormal data to
occur:
• In a single test: Compare normal calibration data with abnormal calibration data to
identify the difference between them, using the “Calibration Monitor” window.
For details on the calibration monitor, refer to “6.4.3 Checking Calibration and Reagent
Blank” on page 6-17.
Check the reagent blank in the same way that it was checked for the calibration data.
TIP
• In some tests: Identify the commonalities between calibrators. If all abnormalities
are derived from the same calibrator, the calibrator may be the cause of the abnormal
data.
If there are no commonalities, perform abnormal data analysis in the same way that it
was performed in the above case using the “Calibration Monitor” menu.
TIP
• In all tests: There is a strong possibility that the calibration analysis itself is causing
the abnormal data. Check the R1 and R2 probes or syringes, deionized water,
calibration material and common hardware.
For details on how to check error flags, refer to “9 Error Flag” on page 9-1.
Checking Reaction Progress

Identify which reaction progress causes abnormal data using the “Reaction Monitor”
menu.
For details on how to check reaction progress, refer to “6.4.2 Displaying Reaction Monitor”
on page 6-13.
Checking Photocal Measurement Data

Check the photocal measurement data to identify an abnormality with cuvettes or a
photometer using the “Photocal Monitor” menu.
For details on how to check reaction progress, refer to “8.4.3 Execution of Photocal

11.3 Troubleshooting the System -
Reagents and Samples
The following section outlines specific system issues that can lead to erroneous results
being observed.
11.3.1 Sample Related Issues. See page 11-6.
11.3.2 Reagent Related Issues. See page 11-7.
11.3.3 QC and Calibrator Related Issues. See page 11-8.
11.3.4 Detergent Related Issues. See page 11-8.
11.3.5 Deionized Water Related Issues. See page 11-8.
11.3.6 Other Causes of Abnormal Data. See page 11-9.
11.3.1 Sample Related Issues

The following two items cause most data problems:
• Sample evaporation: This can cause unusually high results. Store samples properly,
and keep sample caps closed tightly if they need to be stored for a short period
before analysis.
• Incorrect sample handling: Refer to the relevant Instructions for use supplied with
reagents to find the correct procedures for sample collection, handling and storage.
Please take note of the following sample requirements:

• This system is designed to analyze serum, plasma, urine, and whole blood (HbA1c).
If problems are encountered when analyzing a specific test, or when using a specific
reagent, refer to the relevant reagent leaflet or contact your local technical support
organization.
• Use serum or plasma that is adequately separated from cells, and urine that is free of
suspended matter, to prevent the sample probe from becoming blocked and
adversely affecting analysis.
• Check that blood samples are sufficiently coagulated before serum separation.
Remove any suspended fibrin before placing serum on the system.
• If there is any suspended matter present in urine to be tested, perform centrifugal
separation to precipitate the suspended matter before testing the specimens.
• If a sample requires pretreatment depending on the analysis test, refer to the relevant
reagent leaflet.
• A minimum quantity of sample is required for analysis. Ensure that an appropriate
quantity of sample is available for analysis.
For details on entering specific test parameters, refer to “5.1.5 Sample Preparation” on
page 5-10.
• To prevent sample evaporation, do not leave samples uncovered for an extended

period of time. Evaporation can lead to biased results being observed.
• Bubbles on the surface of samples, QC and calibrator material, may result in level
sensing problems. Ensure all bubbles are removed from the surface of the sample
before placing onto the system.

• Check that the sample cups and racks are set properly.
For details on preparing samples for analysis, refer to “5.1.6 Placing the Sample Cups/
Tubes in the Rack” on page 5-11.
• Clean the outside of the sample probe with ethyl alcohol (ethanol) when carried water
being attached to the outside of a sample probe increases because coagulated whole
blood adheres to the outside of the sample probe.
For details on sample probe cleaning, refer to “8.3.4 Checking and cleaning the sample
probe, reagent probe, and mixing bar” on page 8-14.
• If the whole blood has coagulated, replace it by new whole blood.

• If the blood cells in the whole blood have precipitated, mix the whole blood sample by
turning it over by hand.
• Do not store whole blood samples for more than 2 hours after collection.
• Check the serum for the extent of hemolysis, chyle, bilirubin, etc.
• When the serum was concentrated or deteriorated, or the QC sample was incorrectly
dissolved, replace the serum or dissolve the new QC sample, then repeat analysis.
11.3.2 Reagent Related Issues

Check the following if reagents cause data problems:
• Correct reagent was not used: Use the correct reagent to analyze serum, urine, or
other samples using this system.
• Reagent not stored properly: The correct methods for storing reagents, calibrators,
and controls are provided in each reagent leaflet. Follow these instructions. If
reagents, calibrators and reagents are not stored properly, results will be incorrect
even if used within effective periods.
• Reagent on board stability expired: Consult the relevant reagent leaflet, or your
local technical support organization for the stability of the opened product. If the
reagent has expired, replace it.
For details on replacing reagents, refer to “5.3.1 Confirm the analyzer status and the
reagent” on page 5-27.
• Reagents not placed into the system correctly: Place reagents in the system.
Unless the reagents are placed in the system properly, accurate results may not be
obtained and the system can be damaged.
For details on preparing for analysis, refer to “5.3.1 Confirm the analyzer status and the
reagent” on page 5-27 and the relevant reagent leaflet.
• Reagent interference between analysis tests: If a reagent has become

contaminated by another reagent during analysis, results can be affected. The
degree of interference depends on the reagent. For detailed information, consult the
relevant reagent leaflet or contact your local technical support organization.
• Reagent has expired: Never use expired reagents.
• Liquid level sensor does not function properly during reagent aspiration:
Bubbles in the reagent bottle can cause problems with liquid level detection. Remove
bubbles in the reagent bottle. See the reagent leaflet for instructions.

11.3.3 QC and Calibrator Related Issues
Check the following items for general QC and calibrator:
• Ensure that the material was stored and prepared correctly.
• Check the open-bottle date and expiry date.
• Ensure that the material has not been exposed to the air for an extended period of
time, or shows any visible evidence of deterioration.
• Ensure that the correct material is in the correct position in the rack.
For details on performing daily startup checks, refer to “5.1 Preparing Samples for
11.3.4 Detergent Related Issues

The detergent was changed to a different kind after delivery: Contact an Olympus
Service Department.
• Correct detergent not used: You must use the AU detergent Alkali specific to this
system.
• Diluted detergent tank has been contaminated: To clean the diluted detergent
tank.
• Detergent was changed: Contact an Olympus Service Department.
11.3.5 Deionized Water Related Issues

Check the following if the deionized water causes data problems:
• Check water quality by checking a deionizer in use and water supply system of your
facility.
• If the deionized water tank is contaminated.
For details on replacing the deionized water filter, refer to “8.6.4 Cleaning the Deionized
Water Tank” on page 8-55.
• If the deionized water filter is dirty.

For details on cleaning the deionized water filter, refer to “8.5.5 Cleaning the Deionized

11.3.6 Other Causes of Abnormal Data
Abnormal data can arise if periodic maintenance is not performed or is overdue. Be sure
to follow your maintenance routines and perform regular preventative maintenance.
• Water purity, conductivity and environmental specifications are improper to this
system.
For details on precautions, installation and specifications, refer to “2.2.1 Installation
Environment” on page 2-12 or contact your local technical support organization.
• This system is designed to use specific sample probe, reagent probe and cuvettes
supplied by Olympus. Use only these Olympus genuine parts.
• A mosquito coil or insecticides were used in the vicinity of the system: It may
markedly affect the choline esterase (CHE). If an abnormality is experienced, replace
the sample cups, reagents, and reagent bottles with new ones. Also wash the sample
probes, reagent probes, mixing bars, and cuvettes.
• For details on how to wash the sample probes, reagent probes, and mixing bars, refer to
“8.3.4 Checking and cleaning the sample probe, reagent probe, and mixing bar” on
page 8-14 and “8.8.3 Manual Wash the reagent probe” on page 8-75.
• For details on how to wash the cuvettes, refer to “8.7.2 Washing Cuvettes and the Cuvette
Wheel” on page 8-65.

Mechanical Problems
Erroneous results can also be caused by hardware malfunctions.
For details on cleaning and replacing system parts, refer to “8 Maintenance” on page 8-1.
11.4.1 Syringe Problems. See page 11-10.
11.4.2 Probe Problems. See page 11-11.
11.4.3 Abnormal Data Caused by Cuvette Wheel or Wash Nozzles. See page 11-12.
11.4.4 Abnormal Data Caused by Photometer Lamp or Photometer Unit. See page 11-
13.
11.4.5 Mixing Problems. See page 11-13.
11.4.6 Deionized Water Tank Problems. See page 11-13.
11.4.7 Deionized Water or Filter Problems. See page 11-14.
11.4.8 Incubation Temperature Problems. See page 11-14.
11.4.9 Piping and Pump Problems. See page 11-14.
11.4.10 Reagent Refrigerator Problems. See page 11-15.
11.4.11 STAT table problems. See page 11-15.
11.4.12 Rack Problems. See page 11-15.
11.4.1 Syringe Problems

Check for:
• Water leaking from syringes: Tighten the syringe cases and case heads of the
sample and reagent syringes by hand.
For details on replacing syringes, refer to “8.8.7 Replacing syringes” on page 8-85.
• Bubbles in the tubing connected to the syringe: Select Menu>Maintenance>User
Maintenance>Analyzer Maintenance>Maintenance. Then touch Prime Washing-line
and press TABLE ROTATION/DIAG button to start removing air from the tubing.
For details on replacing syringes, refer to “8.8.7 Replacing syringes” on page 8-85.
• General Syringe Troubleshooting:
a. Ensure the top and bottom screws are tightened.
b. Ensure the probes are not blocked.
c. Ensure the bottom screw is tight up against the piston.
d. Ensure there is a smooth resistant pull.
e. Ensure the correct syringe is used.
f. Ensure one O-ring is being used, and that it is not damaged.
g. Ensure the syringe is fitted to the system properly.
h. Check the tubing connected to the syringe head for scratches, folds or leaks.
i. Check the teflon tip of the syringe for wear.

11.4.2 Probe Problems
Check for:
• Reagent probes leaking from loose probe connectors: Tighten the probe
connectors. Verify that the tubing is firmly connected.
• Reagent probes blocked: Drain deionized water from the blocked probe and ensure
that it drains properly.
• Reagent probe bent or damaged: Replace the probe.
For details on replacing reagent probes, refer to “8.8.4 Replacing Sample Probe and
• Sample aspiration position of the sample probe incorrect: The sample probe
moves down to aspirate sample. The maximum distance the probe can move
downward is defined in the system software, but can be changed by a service
engineer. If it is set incorrectly, the probe might hit the bottom. Contact your local
• Reagent probe not aligned over refrigerator: If the reagent probe is hitting the
reagent bottle or refrigerator cover, examine the reagent probe for abnormalities. If it
is bent, replace it. If it is not bent and the reagent aspiration position is still not right,
• Sample probe or reagent probe not aligned over the cuvette: If the sample probe
or reagent probe are coming into contact with the cuvettes, examine the sample
probe or reagent probe for abnormalities. If a probe is bent, replace it. If it is not bent
but still not aligned properly, contact your local technical support organization.
• Abnormal wash position of reagent probe and sample probe: If the reagent
probe is hitting the wash stations, examine it for bends. If a probe is bent, replace it. If
it is not bent but the probe wash position is still abnormal, contact your local technical
support organization.
• General trouble shooting on reagent probe and sample probe:
a. Ensure water is dispensed in a straight stream.
b. Ensure the metal cap screws for the probe connections are tight.
c. Verify that the probe tubing is free of air bubbles.
• General trouble shooting on reagent transfer unit and sample transfer unit:
Verify no drops remain on the path of the transfer.

11.4.3 Abnormal Data Caused by Cuvette Wheel or Wash
Nozzles
• Scratches, fingerprints, or foreign matter is noticed on the cuvettes, or the
cuvettes were stained: Wash the related cuvettes. If abnormal data is not corrected
after washing, replace the cuvettes.
• For details on washing cuvettes, refer to “8.7.2 Washing Cuvettes and the Cuvette Wheel”
on page 8-65.
• For details on replacing cuvettes, refer to “8.8.2 Replacing cuvettes” on page 8-73.
• Some cuvettes were damaged: Replace the related cuvettes.

For details on replacing cuvettes, refer to “8.8.2 Replacing cuvettes” on page 8-73.
• The outside cuvette and the cuvette wheel were damped: Check the tube joints
for looseness. Tighten the loosened tube joints.
The wash nozzles may be clogged. Clean the wash nozzles.
For details on how to clean the wash nozzles, refer to “8.5.4 Cleaning the wash nozzle
• The wash water and detergent dripped from the washing nozzles: Check the
tube joints on the wash nozzles for looseness. Tighten the loose tube joints.
• After washing the cuvettes, a large amount of water remained in the cuvettes:
Check the tube joints on the wash nozzles for looseness. Tighten the loosened tube
joints.
• The tube in the master detergent tank floated: Straighten the tube, then insert it
toward the tank bottom so that it does not come into contact with the tank opening.
• The system has trouble with the level sensor in master detergent tank or the
detergent tank: Connect the level sensor connector firmly, and bring the tube in the
tank out of contact with the level sensor. If the trouble is not corrected after
conforming the above state, the level sensor needs to be replaced. Contact the
nearest Olympus Service Network.
• Some cuvettes were contaminated with foreign matter: Clean the cuvettes. If
abnormal data is not corrected after washing the cuvettes or if any cuvettes are
broken, replace those cuvettes.
• For details on washing cuvettes, refer to “8.7.2 Washing Cuvettes and the Cuvette Wheel”
on page 8-65.
• For details on cuvettes replacement, refer to “8.8.2 Replacing cuvettes” on page 8-73.

11.4.4 Abnormal Data Caused by Photometer Lamp or
Photometer Unit
• The photometer lamp has deteriorated: Check the record of photocal
measurement results for abnormal data variation. If an abnormal data variation is
encountered, replace the photometer lamp.
• For details on the photocal measurement result record, refer to “8.4.3 Execution of
• For details on replacing the photometer lamp, refer to “8.7.1 Replacing the Photometer
Lamp” on page 8-61.
• The photometer lamp did not stay lit constantly: Perform the photocal
measurement 2 times to check the difference between 2 sets of measurement data. If
there is a great difference between them, the photometer lamp may be defective.
Replace the lamp.
For details on replacing the photometer lamp, refer to “8.7.1 Replacing the Photometer
Lamp” on page 8-61.
11.4.5 Mixing Problems

• The mixing bars were contaminated: Wash the mixing bars.
For details on washing the mixing bars, refer to “8.3.4 Checking and cleaning the sample
probe, reagent probe, and mixing bar” on page 8-14.
• The coatings on mixing bars were removed: Replace the mixing bars.
For details on how to replace mixing bars, refer to “8.8.5 Replacing Mixing Bars” on
page 8-79.
• The mixing unit malfunctions, there is abnormal noise from the system during
the mixing motion: If you hear an abnormal noise, contact your local technical
support organization.
• The wash water and detergent are not properly drained from the mixing bar
wash station: Contact an Olympus Service Department.
• Since the mixing bars were not properly mounted on the mixing device, the
mixing of the sample and reagents was not sufficient: Mount the mixing bars
properly again.
For details on mounting mixing bars, refer to “8.8.5 Replacing Mixing Bars” on page 8-79.
11.4.6 Deionized Water Tank Problems

Check for:
• Deionized water tank dirty or contaminated: If there are signs of particulate
contamination on the inside of the tank, clean the tank thoroughly.
For details on replacing the deionized water filter, refer to “8.6.4 Cleaning the Deionized
Water Tank” on page 8-55.
• Residual detergent remains after cleaning the deionized water tank: Clean the
tank again and rinse thoroughly with deionized water.

11.4.7 Deionized Water or Filter Problems
Check water quality by performing a water quality check.
Check for:
• Water conductivity too high: Check water quality by performing a water quality
check. Always ensure that the deionized water conductivity is within specifications.
• Tap water below 5 °C used: Always ensure that water supply to the deionizer is
above 5 °C. For detailed information, contact your local technical support
organization.
• Filters stained or blocked: Clean the deionized water filter and the reagent probe
filter. Replace filters if data continues to be abnormal after cleaning.
For details on replacing the deionized water filter, refer to “8.6.2 Replacing the Deionized
11.4.8 Incubation Temperature Problems

• Check that there is adequate space surrounding the system for air to circulate
effectively. Ensure this space is in accordance with Olympus recommendations
outlined.
For details on installation environment, refer to “2.2.4 System Connections” on page 2-27.
• Ensure the room temperature is between 18 °C and 32 ° C. Contact your local
• The cuvette wheel was left detached for an extended period of time after detaching
from the system. Analysis was started immediately after the cuvette wheel was
replaced on the system: If the cuvette wheel is left detached for an extended period,
allow one hour or more after replacing it before starting analysis.
11.4.9 Piping and Pump Problems

The filters in each part were stained or clogged, or water stain was stuck on them:
Clean the deionized water filter and the sample probe filter. If abnormal data is not
corrected after cleaning those filters, replace the filters.
• For details on how to clean the deionized water filter, refer to “8.5.5 Cleaning the
Deionized Water Filter” on page 8-43.
• For details on how to clean the sample probe filter, refer to “8.5.6 Cleaning the Sample
Probe Filter” on page 8-46.
• For details on how to replace the deionized water filter, refer to “8.6.2 Replacing the
• For details on how to replace the sample probe filter, refer to “8.6.3 Replacing the
Sample Probe Filter” on page 8-53.

11.4.10 Reagent Refrigerator Problems
If the reagent refrigerator temperature is out of range:
1. Touch Analyzer Status and check the reagent refrigerator temperature.
2. Open the reagent refrigerator and ensure the reagent bottles are cool.
11.4.11 STAT table problems

If the STAT table temperature is out of range:
1. Touch Analyzer Status and check the STAT table temperature.
2. Check that the two STAT table covers (large and small) are mounted properly. If
STAT analysis samples are set and removed frequently, the temperature in the
STAT table will be increased.
11.4.12 Rack Problems

Check for the following general problems:
• Ensure the rack is clean and no surface is sticky.
• Check barcode positioning.
• Ensure the correct number of magnets are in the bottom of the rack. Compare the
configuration of magnets on the underside of the rack with that of another rack of the
same color. The configuration should be identical. If a magnet is missing, do not use
that rack until it is replaced.
• Ensure the rack was loaded correctly.
• For details on attaching the barcode label to the sample rack, refer to “5.1.1 Attaching
barcode labels to Sample Racks” on page 5-3.
• For details on placing the sample cups/tubes in the rack, refer to “5.1.6 Placing the Sample
Cups/Tubes in the Rack” on page 5-11.
Rack advance direction

System Problems
11.5.1 TEMP REF HIGH Alarm for the Cooling Unit. See page 11-16.
11.5.2 Abnormal Sound from Inside the System. See page 11-17.
11.5.3 Empty alarm for the water supply tank. See page 11-17.
11.5.4 Leaks from the detergent rolling pump. See page 11-17.
11.5.5 Barcode Errors. See page 11-18.
11.5.6 Leaks from the Bottom of the System. See page 11-18.
11.5.7 No Detergent to Mixing Bars. See page 11-18.
11.5.8 Reagent Alarm when Sufficient Reagent Remains in Bottles. See page 11-18.
11.5.9 Sample Alarm when Sufficient Sample Remains. See page 11-19.
11.5.10 No Sample Cup Alarm when Sample Cup is Present. See page 11-19.
11.5.11 No Sample Cup Irrespective of Its Presence on the STAT Table. See page 11-
19.
11.5.12 Printer Not Printing or Printer Light Not On. See page 11-19.
11.5.13 Liquid Leaking from a Reagent Probe and Sample Probe. See page 11-19.
11.5.14 Reagent Probe and Sample Probe not Aligned over the Cuvette. See page 11-
20.
11.5.15 Error Flag # (Sample Level Detection Error) Displayed in the Second Half of the
Sample Dispense Operation. See page 11-20.
11.5.16 TEMP DIL Alarm for the Wash Heat Unit. See page 11-20.
11.5.17 Sample Rack Jammed. See page 11-20.
11.5.18 Printer Problems. See page 11-21.
11.5.1 TEMP REF HIGH Alarm for the Cooling Unit

If there is a problem in the reagent storage refrigerator unit:
• If there is a problem with the reagent storage refrigerator unit, check that there is
adequate space surrounding the system for air to circulate effectively. Ensure this
space is in accordance with Olympus recommendations outlined.
For details on installation environment precautions, refer to “2.2.4 System Connections”
on page 2-27.
• Ensure the room temperature is from 15°C to 32° C. If the problem persists, contact
your local technical support organization.

11.5.2 Abnormal Sound from Inside the System
Check for:
• Air bubbles trapped in tubing: Check the deionized water filter. If it is stuck, replace
it.
• Deionized Water Tank Empty alarm: The ion-exchange capability of the deionizer
can be insufficient. Replace your deionizer if it is not up to standard. Check the
deionized water filters. If they have become dirty or blocked, you should clean or
replace them.
• For details on cleaning the deionized water filter, refer to “8.5.5 Cleaning the Deionized
• For details on replacing the deionized water filter, refer to “8.6.2 Replacing the Deionized
• For all other sources of noise such as a faulty circulation pump, radiator fan, air
pump, 24V power supply fan or pump, contact your local technical support
organization.
11.5.3 Empty alarm for the water supply tank

• The ion exchange capability of the deionizer is insufficient: Check if the
deionizer meets the specification. If the deionizer does not meet the specification,
replace it. For detailed information, consult the deionizer maker.
• The deionized water filter is clogged: Touch the deionized water filters with your
finger to check for sliminess. If the filter surface is slimy, the filter may be clogged.
Clean the deionized water filter.
For details on how to clean the deionized water filter, refer to “8.5.5 Cleaning the
11.5.4 Leaks from the detergent rolling pump

Rolling tube
Detergent
rolling pump
Connector
Relay tubes
• Any rolling tube may be deteriorated: Check the rolling tubes for cracks due to
deterioration. If deteriorated, replace the rolling tubes.
For details on replacing the rolling tube, refer to “8.6.5 Replacing the Detergent Rolling
Tube” on page 8-58.
• Any connector connecting tubes may be loosened: Check the connectors that
connect tubes for looseness. If loosened, tighten the connector firmly.

11.5.5 Barcode Errors
Check for:
• Barcode reader dirty: Wipe the window of refrigerator for reagents and STAT using
absorbent, lint-free paper and 70% Isopropanol.
• Barcode labels on sample cups, racks or reagent bottles discolored: Wipe
barcode labels clean. Replace any sample or rack barcodes that are worn or
damaged.
• Barcode labels seriously damaged:
• On sample cups or racks: Replace any barcodes that are worn or damaged.
• On reagents: Discard the reagent or contact your local technical support organization.
• Barcode labels are falling off the sample cups or are not put on properly:
For details on how to put barcodes on properly, refer to “5.1.4 Applying Barcode Labels
to Sample Cups” on page 5-9, and “5.1.1 Attaching barcode labels to Sample Racks” on
page 5-3.
While the system is turned on, do not look directly into the laser beam emitted
from the barcode reader. Directly looking into the laser beam may damage your
WARNING eyes.
For details on replacing rack ID labels, refer to “8.8.10 Replacing rack ID labels” on page 8-
94.
11.5.6 Leaks from the Bottom of the System

Check for:
• Wash line obstructed: Check for obstructions in the wash stations for sample and
reagent probes.Clean them if you see any blockages.
• Waste line not installed properly: If your waste line is leaking or if the tube itself is
too long, contact your local technical support organization.
11.5.7 No Detergent to Mixing Bars

The deionized water filters may be clogged: Touch the deionized water filters with your
finger to check for sliminess. If the filter surface is slimy, the filter may be clogged. Clean
the deionized water filter.
For details on how to clean the deionized water filter, refer to “8.5.5 Cleaning the Deionized
11.5.8 Reagent Alarm when Sufficient Reagent Remains

in Bottles
The liquid level sensor could be faulty. See the alarm online help, and contact your local

11.5.9 Sample Alarm when Sufficient Sample Remains
The liquid level sensor could be faulty.
See the alarm online help, and contact your local technical support organization.
11.5.10 No Sample Cup Alarm when Sample Cup is

Present
Unspecified cup used: Check that the appropriately specified sample cups were used in
each rack.
11.5.11 No Sample Cup Irrespective of Its Presence on the

STAT Table
• The related test was not selected during the requisition operation, or the requisition
setup information did not meet the sample cup position on the STAT table: Repeat
the requisition operation.
• The sample cup set on the STAT table did not use the appropriate adaptor: Check if
the sample cup is set properly for the STAT table. If it is not, set the sample cup again
using an adaptor appropriate for the sample cup diameter.
• An unspecified sample cup was used: Check if the sample cups specified by the
STAT table are used. If they are not, use the specified sample cups.
11.5.12 Printer Not Printing or Printer Light Not On

See the printer manual for assistance with all printer troubleshooting.
• Printer is disconnected. Check the plug and socket and connecting lead.
• Printer toner empty and needs to be replaced.
• Ensure the online button is on.
• Ensure paper is loaded properly.
11.5.13 Liquid Leaking from a Reagent Probe and Sample

Probe
Check that the Reagent probe and Sample probe is properly installed:
1. Touch Menu>Maintenance>User Maintenance>Analyzer Maintenance>Maintenance.
2. Touch Prime Washing-line to check the Reagent probe and Sample probe.
3. Touch OK to eject water from the Reagent probe and Sample probe. If the
deionized water does not drain out normally, the Reagent probe and Sample
probe might not be properly attached. Check the Reagent probe and Sample
probe installation.

11.5.14 Reagent Probe and Sample Probe not Aligned over
the Cuvette
Check whether the Reagent probe and Sample probe is bent: Examine the probe
and replace it if it is bent.
11.5.15 Error Flag # (Sample Level Detection Error)

Displayed in the Second Half of the Sample
Dispense Operation
Check if the sample volume is too low: Ensure there is sufficient sample for the
requested tests. The dead volume for the different tests has to be considered.
For details on sample preparation, refer to “5.1.5 Sample Preparation” on page 5-10.
1. Touch Menu>Maintenance>User Maintenance>Analyzer Maintenance>Maintenance.
2. Touch System 2 tab and verify that the appropriate setting for the type of sample
tube being used is displayed for each rack type.
Check if the sample volume is sufficient for the following cups.
• HITACHI cup: Required volume + 50 µL or more
• HITACHI-micro cup (STAT only): Required volume + 30 µL or more
• Nested cup* (Rack only): Required volume + 180 µL or more
*Nested cup use only HITACHI cup.
The above necessary sample amount includes remainder (5 mL) for each test item in
addition to the sample amount necessary for analysis.
When analyzing 20 tests/sample or more, set the required sample amount + 200 µL
(provisional) to suppress dilution by sample probe wash water.
11.5.16 TEMP DIL Alarm for the Wash Heat Unit

• The water temperature may be out of the specified range: Check that the water
temperature is 5 °C or more.
• Others: Contact an Olympus Service Department.
11.5.17 Sample Rack Jammed

Check for:
• Contamination on the rack: Check nothing has fallen onto the rack and that the
rack ID label, or sample ID labels have not peeled off, causing the rack jam.
• Rack feed path sticky or dusty: Clean surfaces with deionized water using a lint-
free dampened cloth.

11.5.18 Printer Problems
Check for:
• Analysis started while printer was offline.
• Printer turned off while analysis was in progress.
• Printer is out of paper.
a. Turn on the printer and ensure it is online.
b. Load paper if needed.
c. From the AU680 “Home” screen select Analyzer Status.
d. Touch Printer Control (F5).
e. Touch Resume to begin printing data from analysis. When printing is finished, the
system moves to Standby mode.

11.6 Troubleshooting the System - Data
Processor Problems
The following lists potential data processor problems:
11.6.1 Menu Cannot be Selected. See page 11-22.
11.6.2 Number Key Pad on Keyboard Does Not Work. See page 11-22.
11.6.3 Keyboard Not Responding. See page 11-23.
11.6.4 Inaccessible Floppy Disc. See page 11-23.
11.6.5 Results Do Not Print Automatically. See page 11-24.
11.6.6 Online Auto-Output by Host Computer Not Executed. See page 11-24.
11.6.7 No Data Stored Despite Space on Disc. See page 11-24.
11.6.8 Unsuccessful Movement of Data between the System and the Host Computer.
See page 11-25.
11.6.1 Menu Cannot be Selected

• You have no access to this function: Menu items to which you do not have access
appear greyed out. Contact your system administrator to increase your level of
access to the system.
• System software crashes: To reset the system:
a. Ensure the hard drive LED light is off.
b. Press CTRL+Alt+Delete together.
c. Touch Shutdown.
d. At the Restart prompt, press the EM STOP button on the front of the system.
e. Press the Reset button on the system.
• Contact your local technical support organization if crashes become frequent.
11.6.2 Number Key Pad on Keyboard Does Not Work

Num Lock is released: Press the Num Lock key and then check that the LED light
over Num on the keyboard comes on.

11.6.3 Keyboard Not Responding
Possible causes:
• Keyboard cable: Check it is in the right socket in the back of the computer (color
coded).
• System crash: For details on system crash, refer to “11.6.1 Menu Cannot be Selected”
on page 11-22.
• System busy: The system might be saving data or performing a series of tasks
simultaneously. Wait for a few minutes until the system is ready. If this happens
frequently, contact your local technical support organization.
• Data processing, such as data saving, is being executed: Wait until data
processing has been completed.
• Electrical Noise: If you hear a buzz from the socket, take out the plug and replace it
firmly. Consult your Internal Systems Department.
11.6.4 Inaccessible Floppy Disc

Check for:
• The floppy disc is not formatted properly: Format the floppy disc by selecting
Menu>System>External Data Management>External Data management. Select the way
you want to initialize the diskette: For parameters or data, touch Media Initialize
(F2). For details on saving information to disc, refer to “7.7.1 External Data Management”
on page 7-25. Either of the following two types of disc should be used:
a. Formatted, 2HD 1.44 MB
b. Formatted, 2DD 720 KB
• Floppy disc is write-protected: Slide the tab on the disc cover. If the diskette is
punched, put in a new blank unpunched diskette. Consult your internal systems
department.
• Floppy disc is damaged: If writing is continuously unsuccessful, your floppy disc is
probably damaged. Use a new disc.
• Floppy disc drive damaged: If the floppy disc is new and properly formatted and
you still cannot successfully save data, then your floppy disc drive might be broken.

11.6.5 Results Do Not Print Automatically
Check for:
• Realtime output is not set: Set the realtime output of reports from
Parameter>Format>Printer.
For details on how to set the realtime output, refer to “4.11.1 Set the Basic Condition for
Print” on page 4-76.
• Out of Paper: Load more paper.

a. Touch Routine>Data Report>Individual Report.
b. Touch Print (F3).
c. Touch OK.
• Analysis was started when the printer was offline.
• Printer was turned off or taken offline during analysis: Turn on the printer and ensure
it is online (load paper if needed).
a. Touch System Status>Printer status.
b. Touch Printer Control (F5).
Touch Resume to begin printing data from analysis. When printing is finished, the
system moves to Standby mode.
11.6.6 Online Auto-Output by Host Computer Not

Executed
Check for:
• I/F cable to the host computer disconnected: Connect the cable.
• Host I/O parameters incorrectly modified: Set the appropriate I/O parameters by
selecting the Online window.
• For details on how to set host I/O parameters, refer to “4.3 Entering Online Settings” on
page 4-10 and “Specification of Host Online”.
11.6.7 No Data Stored Despite Space on Disc

Check for:
An error might have occurred on the hard disc: Repair and rebuild the database(s)
using the Retrieve database function as follows:
a. Touch Maintenance>Data Operation>Database Retrieval.
b. Select the databases you want to rebuild by checking the boxes.
c. Select the database index from the Index drop-down list.
d. Touch Perform (F5) and then Yes, when prompted, to start retrieving.
If the system does not start up automatically after executing Retrieve database, the
hard disc may be seriously damaged and may require replacement. Contact your local
CAUTION technical support organization.

11.6.8 Unsuccessful Movement of Data between the
System and the Host Computer
Check whether:
• I/F cable to the host computer disconnected: Connect the cable correctly.
• I/F cable defective: Take an appropriate action such as replacement or repair.

11.7 Recovering from an Emergency Stop
or Power Loss
In the event of power failure or an emergency stop, the main power is immediately cut
off. Power to the incubator and reagent refrigerator is also cut off.
11.7.1 Performing an Emergency Stop. See page 11-26.
11.7.2 Resetting the System after a Power Failure or an Emergency Stop. See
page 11-27.
In the event of an emergency stop or power failure during a measure mode, it is

not possible to use the data generated; therefore, analysis of the samples on the
CAUTION system must be performed again. If your system is without power for a lengthy
period of time after a power loss or emergency stop, check reagent integrity
before restoring analysis.
11.7.1 Performing an Emergency Stop

The best way to perform an emergency stop is as follows:
1. Press the EM STOP button on the front of the system to turn off all power to the
system.
2. Press CTRL+Alt+Delete to access the Task Manager.
3. Touch Shutdown to close all running software.

11.7.2 Resetting the System after a Power Failure or an
Emergency Stop
Follow these steps in the event of a power failure or emergency stop:
• Resetting the System. See page 11-27.
• Checking Samples. See page 11-27.
• Checking Reagents. See page 11-28.
Neither temperature control of the incubator nor regular wash of ISE (option) is
not performed when only pressing the Reset button after a power loss or an
CAUTION emergency stop. Make sure to reset the analyser with following steps.
Resetting the System

Print the repeat run work list, then check the samples required to perform repeat run.
1. Press the RESET button on the front of the system.
2. Wait 10 seconds and press the ON button to load the software.
“Program down load to analyzer” is displayed.
“End process was not completed at previous shut down. Database retreival is required.” is
then displayed as an alarm (Touch OK to remove it).
RESET button
Checking Samples
1. Touch Sample Status on the “Home” screen to display the “Sample Status”
screen.
2. Touch Status.
Displays a list of test conditions of samples on the Analyzer.
Confirm the Sample number which is finished data output.

Checking Reagents
2. Touch Reagent Check (F5).

This brings up the “Reagent Check” dialog.
3. Select “Check All Positions”.

4. Select “Read reagent ID”.
5. Touch Start.
Reagent check starts and “Checking” is displayed on the screen.
After check completion, “Reagent check completed” is displayed.

12
Menu Tree
This chapter provides a reference to the menu

options available in the AU680.
12.1 Home Menu. See page 12-2.

12.2 Permanently displayed Button Configuration and Function. See
page 12-3.
12.3 Menu Buttons Overview. See page 12-4.
12.4 Routine Menu. See page 12-5.
12.5 Calibration Menu. See page 12-6.
12.6 QC Menu. See page 12-7.
12.7 Parameters Menu. See page 12-8.
12.8 Maintenance Menu. See page 12-9.
12.9 System Menu. See page 12-10.
AU680 User Guide Version4.0 12. Menu Tree 12-1

12.1 Home Menu
When the system starts up, first the “Home” screen appears. The menus displayed on
the “Home” screen are referred to as “Home menus”. You can advance to various
menus from this screen. The list of menus included in the “Home menu” is indicated
below. Also, individual menu functions are summarized.
Menu Submenu Option

Home Menu Sample Status
A real-time display used to monitor
the status of samples during analysis
as well as their print status.
Analyzer Status
Used to display the analyzer status.
Simple STAT Mode
Allows an untrained operator to run a
sample using the STAT table.
12-2 12. Menu Tree AU680 User Guide Version4.0

12.2 Permanently displayed Button
Configuration and Function
The multiple function buttons located at the upper and lower borders of the Home
menus are always displayed despite the menu selected.
Group of Function Selection Buttons
Button Button name Function

Home Displays the Home screen.
Menu List Displays the menu list.
User Menu Displays the user menu list.
Group of System Control Buttons

Start Starts or restarts analysis.
Pause Temporarily stops sampling.
Feeder Stop Temporary stops the rack feeder

during analysis.
Stop/Standby Transfers the system to the Stop

mode and transfers from Stop back to
Standby.
Group of Alarm Related Buttons

Alarm List Displays the alarm list.
Alarm Clear Button for silencing an alarm and

clearing the alarm display field.

Group of Other Buttons

Help Displays the Help screen.
Logout Facilitates operator login and logout.
End Shuts down the system.
12.3 Menu Buttons Overview

To perform parameter setup necessary for analysis, requisition concerning analysis,
and check for analysis results after operation, select a menu from various menu buttons
at the left side of the “Menu List” screen.
The display contents of submenus displayed to the right vary depending on the selected
menu.

12.4 Routine Menu
The “Routine menu” is a group of basic operation menus for performing test. Unless the
basic setup is performed beforehand with the “Parameters menu”, some submenus
cannot be used.
Menu Submenu Option

Routine Start Condition
Used to set the index date and time,
start sample number, etc., before
starting analysis.
Reagent Reagent Management
Used to check the quantity of reagent
and the number of tests available in a
bottle.
Reagent Inventory
Sets up the reference value for each
day of the week to perform a daily
check.
Reagent Consumption
Displays the number of shots
consumed each day for each
reagent.
Rack Requisition Sample
Used to set the sample numbers and
analysis items required for rack
analysis.
Calibration
Used to set the requisitions for
calibration for rack analysis.
QC
Used to set the requisitions for QC
analysis for rack analysis.
STAT Requisition STAT Status
Use to view the status of the STAT
table and start STAT sample analysis.
Sample
Performs requisition of patient
samples to be analyzed on the STAT
table.
Calibration
Performs requisition of calibration
samples to be analyzed on the STAT
table.
QC
Performs requisition of QC samples
to be analyzed on the STAT table.
Repeat Run Repeat Order
Used to requisition repeat
samples.
Repeat Data Verification
Used to view repeat results and
perform overwriting of the data.

Menu Submenu Option
Routine Sample Manager Sample
Used to display analysis results,
perform data correction, print data list
and batch transfer data online.
RB/CAL/QC
Used to print and batch transfer RB/
CAL/QC results online.
Data Monitor Reaction Monitor
Displays information about
reaction processes of analysis
results.
Data Statistics
Displays key statistics of patient
sample results and the results of
a test within one index as bar
charts.
Correlation Chart
Displays a correlation chart.
12.5 Calibration Menu

The “Calibration menu” is a group of menus for displaying and managing calibration
results and histories.
Menu Submenu Option

Calibration Calibration Monitor
Displays calibration results as a
graph or a data list.
Calibration Verification Calibration Verification
Verifies the calibration performance.
Material Parameters
Set Parameters for calibration
verification.

12.6 QC Menu
The “QC menu” is a group of menus for displaying and editing quality control (QC)
results and histories.
Menu Submenu Option

QC QC Monitor Daily chart
Display the QC data variation within
the same or between index dates as
a daily chart.
Day to Day chart
Display the QC data variation within
the same or between index dates as
a day to day chart.
Twin Plot chart
Display the QC data variation of two
QC samples as a twin plot chart.
QC Data Review
Used to edit QC result.

12.7 Parameters Menu
The “Parameters menu” is a group of menus for setting various parameters such as the
analysis mode. Be sure to set those parameters before using this system for the first
time. To set the system own conditions, use the “System menu”
Menu Submenu Option

Parameters Common Test Parameters Test Name
Used for basic parameters such as
test name and reagent ID.
Profile
Used to select specified test items for
one profile. Multiple profile setting for
samples, RB/Calibration and QC is
possible.
Group of Tests
Used to set the group name and test
items for each group.
Specific Test Parameters General
Used to set detailed parameters for
general test items.
LIH
the Lipemia/Icterus/Hemolysis test.
ISE
the ISE test.
HbA1c
the HbA1c test.
Calculated Tests
calculated tests.
Range
Used to set parameters for the
reference range of each test.
Repeat Parameters Repeat Common
Used to set the common parameters
for a repeat run analysis.
Repeat Specific
Used to set the repeat and reflex
decision ranges and the repeat
dilution rate of repeat run analysis for
individual test items.
Calibration Parameters Calibrators
Used to set common calibrator
parameters such as name, ID and Lot
number.
Calibration Specific
Used to set specific calibration
parameters for individual test items.
STAT Table Calibration
Used to set parameters for calibration
analysis using the STAT Table.

Menu Submenu Option
Parameters QC Parameters Controls
Used to set the common parameters
for a QC analysis.
QC Specific
Used to set the average value and
standard deviation of the control
sample for quality control of individual
items.
STAT Table QC
Used to set parameters for QC
analysis using the STAT Table.
Misc. Checked Tests
Used to set parameters for logic
checked tests.
Contamination Parameters
Used to set parameters for
contamination of tests.
Data Check Parameters
Used to set parameters for data
check such as diagnosis of prozone.
For detailed information, contact an
Olympus sales or Service
Department.
12.8 Maintenance Menu

The “Maintenance menu” is a group of menus that are used for daily maintenance of the
system. It allows the user to plan a maintenance schedule and check for a generated
alarm.
Menu Submenu Option

Maintenance User Maintenance Analyzer Maintenance
Used to display the maintenance
schedule and provide instruction on
maintenance procedures.
ISE Maintenance
Used to display the maintenance
schedule of the ISE unit and provide
instruction on ISE maintenance
procedures.
OSV
Displays the connection status of the
OSV and transmits the AU680’s
various files.
Alarm Log
Chronologically lists the alarm that
have occured.

12.9 System Menu
The “System menu” is a group of menus for setting the print format, use/nonuse of
barcode, optional conditions, etc.
Menu Submenu Option

System Online
Used to set the parameters for online
communication between a host
computer and the system.
Format Requisition Format
Used to enter the sample requisition
parameters.
List Format
Used to set the common format
parameters for printing the pending
list, work list, repeat list and the data
list.
Comment Masters
Used to customize the comments
appended to the analysis results.
System Condition Analysis Mode
Used to set the analysis mode,
barcode definition, auto/standard
repeat and so on.
Set Date and Time
Used to set the system date and time.
Auto Power On
Used to set the auto power on time
for each day of the week.
Password
Used to set and change passwords.
Login Condition
Used to set login information.
User Menu
Used to set a menu as a user menu.
External Data Management External Data Management
Saves the analysis data on an
external storage device or media.
File Management
Used to save and up load parameter
files on an external storage device or
media.
Offline Format
Used to set the output format of
results and save data in a delimited
format for use in external applications
(spreadsheets, etc).

13
AU680 Terminology
ACAL
Abbreviation for auto-calibration. It represents the automatic creation of calibration
curves.
A calibration curve is automatically created using the yellow rack. It is mainly used for
the analysis tests in the end point assay method.
Advanced Calibration
Calibration of multiple bottles of the same reagent set in the reagent refrigerator can be
performed together in advance.
Alarm Shots
The Alarm Shots function enables you to set the number of remaining reagent shots
which when reached, prompts a system alarm.
Auto Power-on
Allows you to set a time when the analyzer will automatically power on.
Calibration Curve
The calibration curve is calculated from calibrator. A curve that is generated, before
measurement, to calculate the unknown analyte concentration in a sample.
Calibration Trace
The calibration trace is a graph that displays a record of calibration of each analyte.
Calibrator
Material with a known value which is used to establish the measurement relationship.
Consumable
Consumable are materials required by the system such as photometer lamps, etc.
AU680 User Guide Version4.0 13. AU680 Terminology 13-1

Cuvette
A transparent glass vessel with one side face frosted, which is used as a vessel of
reaction between a sample and a reagent.
Dead volume
Sample volume that cannot be aspirated by the system but remains in the tube/cup.
The dead volume depends on the type of cup/tube that is used.
Disabling (a Test)
It is possible to select tests to be left out of an analysis run at any time during the
analysis. This feature is used if calibration or QC fails but samples are already on the
rack feeder and the system is running.
END (End-Point Assay)

There are three types of end-point assay:
• One-point assay is a general end-point assay that determines the optical density of
the reaction mixture from the optical density measured at a specified photometric
measuring point.
• Two Point (Self-blank method) assay provides sample blank adjustment. The optical
density values before dispensing reagent are eliminated as the sample blank. This
optical density value is then subtracted from those calculated after dispensing the
second reagent. Any contribution to the final reaction OD from the sample (turbidity,
icterus etc.) is removed to improve measurement reliability.
• Blanked End Assay measures the blank channel and then subtracts this from the
measured optical density, to calculate the actual optical density of the reaction. This
requires an additional blank.
END1 does not use reagent blank absordance as the reference for measurement data
at each photometric point.
Error Flag
Symbols that appear beside analysis results, indicating that a problem or an error has
occurred during analysis. The generated result must be reviewed.
FIXED (Fixed-Point Assay)

Fixed-Point Assay is a method of caluculation that determines the difference between
the optical densities at two specific time points within a reaction.
FIXED1 does not use reagent blank absorbance as the reference for measurement data
13-2 13. AU680 Terminology AU680 User Guide Version4.0

Group
Group is a category in which a combination of arbitrary analysis tests has been set up.
Set a desired group using the “Common Test Parameters: Group of Tests” screen.
Touch Menu>Parameters>Common Test Parameters>Group of Tests to display the
“Common Test Parameters: Group of Tests” screen.
For example, designate the analysis tests frequently used for the routine analysis to
Group 1, and the analysis tests used for the specific analysis to Group 2. Perform
routine analysis under Group 1 and switch to Group 2 for specific analysis as required.
Then, the specific analysis tests can be accessed quickly.
LAG_TIME Check
If a reaction is terminated too quickly, effective data at two points or more may not be
acquired. In such case, the system can be set up to calculate the analysis result using
the data in the lag phase.
Used for the analysis tests in the rate assay method.
LIH Testing
Performs test of lipemic, icteric, and hemolysis in serum. LIH is the symbol used for
testing Lipemia (L), Icterus (I), and Hemolysis (H).
Linearity
Ability of a measuring method to generate test results that are proportional to the
analyte concentration in a sample.
MCAL
Abbreviation for manual calibration. It defines manual creation of calibration curves. A
calibration curve is created by manually entering the individual data. It is mainly used for
the analysis tests in the rate assay method.
Photocal Measurement
This measurement checks the stain, scratches, etc. on the cuvettes to obtain
appropriate analysis results. Confirm the photocal data obtained from a photocal
measurement on the “Analyzer Maintenance: Photocal Monitor tab” screen.
For details on performing photocal measurement, refer to “8.4.3 Execution of Photocal
QC Monitor
The QC Monitor gives an instant visual summary of QC analysis results.

QC Sample
Material used to verify the performance characteristics of an in vitro diagnostic medical
device.
Quality Control (QC) Analysis

The process of analyzing samples with known concentrations of analytes in order to test
the quality of reagents, calibrators, equipment and procedures.
RATE (Rate Assay)

• Normal rate assay measures the variation in the rate of absorbance per minute by
calculating the average change in absorbance between each two photometric points,
using the least squares method.
• Double rate assay determines the rate of absorbance variation per minute by
calculating the average of the absorbance variations between each two measuring
points, using the least squares method. The rate of absorbance before dispensing
reagent 2 is subtracted from those calculated after dispensing the second reagent.
RATE1 does not use reagent blank absorbance as the reference for measurment data
RB
Abbreviation for reagent blank.
In routine analysis the reagent blank serves as the reference value for the reagents at
each photometric point of individual analysis tests.
It also becomes the Y-segment data of calibration curves created by ACAL.
Reagent
A reagent is a combination of chemicals that react with the target analyte in the AU680,
which uses either one reagent (R1) or two reagents (R1 and R2).
Reagent ID
The system identifies reagents placed on board the system using the barcode.
Reflex Testing
Reflex testing enables a test to be automatically run by linking it to a repeat flag
generated by another test. Up to 10 sets of tests can be programmed as Reflex tests.
Therefore, if a test generates a value outside of a given range, another complementary
test is automatically performed.
Repeat Run
A repeat run is a process whereby samples are tested again, either manually or
automatically by the system.
Sample Diluent
Solution used for manual or automatic diluent of samples.

Standard Deviation
Most commonly used measure of statistical dispersion. Simply put, in multiple
measurements of the same sample, it measures how spread out the values are.
Test Requisitions
An instruction to perform tests on a sample. When a sample is placed into the system,
the test requisition information is used to link the sample to the required tests.
Twin Plot
Twin Plot is used to determine whether a problematic variation in QC is caused by the
system or just a random error. QC analysis is usually performed using two controls:
normal, and pathological. The twin plot function displays the first control on the x-axis of
a 2-dimensional plot and the second control on the y-axis.
W1
Abbreviation for automatic wash of cuvettes.
Usually, W1 is used for cuvette washing before and after daily analysis.
If analysis operation was forcibly stopped, W1 is used to remove the sample remaining
in the cuvette and to wash the cuvettes.
W2
Abbreviation of automatic wash of cuvettes, sample probes, and reagent probes.
Perform W2 operation weekly. After performing W2, be sure to perform Photocal
measurement.
This alternates between the usage of either 10% sodium hypochlorite or 1N HCI.
For details on W2, refer to “8.4.2 Execution of W2 (Automatic washing of each probe, mixing
bar, and cuvette, etc.)” on page 8-22.

Index
Numerics
1-point Assay 3-3
2-point Assay 3-4
Auto Power ON 13-1
Auto STAT Operation 4-6
Auto/Standard Repeat 4-3
14
automatic screen lock function 7-8
Automatic Startup Function 7-2
A
ACAL 13-1 B
Adapters 5-12
Backup of analysis file 7-27
adaptor for STAT table 6-31
Backup of data 7-24
Adobe Acrobat Reader 1-5
Barcode (Sample ID) analysis mode 3-12
alarm description 1-4
Barcode analysis 4-3
Alarm Shots 4-16, 13-1
Bath status 6-5
alarm sound 4-4
between Items 4-72
analysis
between Sample Types 4-74
1-point Assay 3-3
2-point Assay 3-4 Breakers 3-32
Double Rate Assay 3-5 by Analysis Items 4-75
end assay 3-4
End Point Assay 3-3
Fixed Point Assay 3-6 C
Quality Control (QC) Analysis 13-4
Rate Assay 3-5 Calculated Test 4-18, 4-38
sample blank correction 3-4 calibration
self-blank method 3-4 Advance Calibration 13-1
analysis mode Calibration Analysis 4-47
analysis mode 3-12, 4-2 Calibration Curve 13-1
Barcode (Sample ID) analysis mode 3-12 Calibration editing for advanced calibration
Rack No. analysis mode 3-12 6-20
Sequential mode 3-12 Calibration Trace 13-1
Analyzer Front Unit 6-8 Calibration Verification 7-19
Checking Calibration 6-17
Applying Barcode Labels 5-9 Material Parameters 7-19
AU680 reference to calibration 6-17
Assumptions 1-2 reference to calibration data 6-21
Auto Power ON 7-2, 13-1 Reference to Factor 6-22
shutdown the system 6-53 Verification Chart 7-20
System Installation 1-3
System Specifications 2-17
AU680 User Guide Version4.0 14. Index 14-1

calibrator Data Transmission Method 4-10
Calibrator 13-1 Date and Time 4-9
Calibrator registration 4-48
Day-to-Day Variation Chart 6-27
calibrators 4-56
Change of the calibrator concentration 4-50 Dead volume 13-2
Handling Calibrators 2-7 Default type 4-3
Cancellation of pause status 6-51 Deionized Water Tank 3-31
check range 4-40 detergent
checked tests 4-69 Handling Detergents 2-7
Checking detergent rolling pump 8-10 Detergent rolling pump unit 3-31
Checking dispenser 8-7 Detergent-1 and Detergent-2 6-5
checking mixing bar 8-14 diluent bottle 6-5
checking probe 8-14 Diluted Detergent Tank 3-32
Checking the Analyzer Status 6-4 Disabling (a Test) 13-2
Checking the Printer 5-31 display operation help 3-34
Checking the Sample Status 6-3 Displaying Reaction Monitor 6-13
Checking the Test Results 6-12 Displays 2-29
Cleaning Air Filters 8-50, 8-98 Double Rate Assay 3-5
cleaning mixing bar 8-16 Drainage and Exhaust 2-16
cleaning probe 8-16 Dynamic Range 4-31
cleaning reagent refrigeration unit 8-91
cleaning STAT table 8-91
Cleaning the Deionized Water Filter 8-43
E
Cleaning the Deionized Water Tank 8-55 Electrical and Noise Conditions 2-12
Cleaning the HbA1c probe wash station 8-32 Electromagnetic Wave and Noise Precautions 2-
10
Cleaning the Mixing Bar Wash Station 8-35
EM STOP (emergency stop) button 3-18
cleaning the sample pre-diluent bottle 8-28
emergency stop
Cleaning the Sample Probe Filter 8-46 emergency stop 6-54
Cleaning the Wash Nozzle 8-37 Reset operation after emergency stop 6-54
cleaning wash station 8-30 end assay 3-4
Comment Master 7-22 End Point Assay 3-3
commercial reagent bottles 5-31 Ensuring Optimal Analytical Performance 2-6
Common Reagent 4-20, 4-30 Error Flag 9-1, 13-2
Concentrated Detergent Tank 3-32 Error Messages 10-1
Consumable 13-1 executing Photocal 8-25
consumption of master detergent 8-12 executing W2 8-22
contamination prevention 4-71 External storage device 7-24
Correlation 4-31, 7-16
create a new index 5-21
Cuvette 13-2 F
Factor for Maker 4-31
Fixed Point Assay 3-6
D for the STAT table 4-56
Daily Maintenance 8-7 format parameters as a template 4-79
Daily Variation Chart 6-25
Data Lists 4-76
Data Statistics 7-12
14-2 14. Index AU680 User Guide Version4.0

G LIH
LIH Influence Check 4-31
General Tests 4-29 LIH Judgment level 4-34
Graphical User Interface (GUI) 3-33 LIH Reagent Volume 4-34
LIH Sample Volume 4-34
Group 5-41, 13-3
LIH Test 4-33, 13-3
Group Editing 4-26
Linearity 13-3
Guarantee 1-2
Linearity limit 4-31
log in 5-19
H
Handling the Keyboard, Monitor and Mouse 2-6 M
HbA1c 4-36 maintenance
Help Adding a Maintenance Task 8-3
Alarm Help 1-4 Daily Maintenance 5-32, 8-7
Operation Help 1-4 Maintenance Every Three Months 8-49
TIP Help 1-4 Maintenance Log 8-3
Maintenance performed as necessary 8-70
Monthly Maintenance 8-29
I Routine Maintenance 2-10
update maintenance record 8-4
Important Checks at Analysis 2-6 Viewing Maintenance History 8-6
Incubation bath part 3-25 Weekly Maintenance 8-18
Index 5-21 Yearly Maintenance 8-70
Installation Managing Liquid Waste 2-9
Environment 2-12 Managing Solid Waste 2-9
Space 2-25 Manual STAT Operation 4-6
ISE MCAL 13-3
Checking calibration result 6-65
Measure Modes 3-35
Checking slope chart 6-66
Correlation Factor 4-35 Measuring Point-1 4-31
CRS calibration 6-67 Measuring Point-2 4-31
Dynamic Range 4-35 Menu Access Level 7-7
ISE Calibration 5-24
mesure mode
ISE CRS Calibration 5-26
Measure 1 3-35
ISE Test 4-35
Measure 2 3-35
Performing or checking selectivity check 6-
Pause 3-35
67
Standby 3-35
ISE (optional) 3-32, 6-6 Stop 3-35
Warm up 3-35
Method 4-31
K Multi Reagent Switch 4-16
keyboard 3-36
N
L No Reagent Operation 4-3
Labels 2-29 Normal repeat 4-42
Lag Time Check 4-31, 13-3
Layout editing 4-80
leak from detergent rolling pump 8-10
leak from dispenser 8-8

O QC Sample 13-4
QC sample
OD Limit 4-31 Handling QC Samples 2-7
Off line conditions 7-29 quality control (QC)
Olympus Guarantee 1-2 Editing Quality Control Data 6-55
ON (sub-power) button 3-18 Quality Control Profile 4-24
Quality Control Using the STAT Table 4-65
Onboard Stability 4-31
Requesting QC Analysis 5-36
Online Help Function 1-4 requisition for QC analysis for advance cali-
online item No. 4-14 bration items 5-37
Online transfer 6-43
Overwriting the data 6-48
R
Rack Feeder Top Unit 6-7
P Rack Feeder Unit 3-19
parameters rack ID labels 5-3
Calibration Parameters 4-51 Rack No. 4-3
calibration parameters for ISE 4-54 Rack No. analysis mode 3-12
Quality Control Parameters 4-61
Test Parameters 4-28 rack setting order 5-15
Password Expiration Date 7-9 Racks 3-22
pause analysis 3-34 Rate Assay 3-5
Pausing Analysis 6-51 RB 13-4
Pausing Analysis Operation 6-51 RB/Calibration Profile 4-23
Performing STAT Table Analysis 6-32 Reaction Slope 4-31
Photocal Measurement 13-3 Reagent
Handling Reagents 2-7
Photometry Unit 3-25 Reagent 13-4
pictograms 2-29 reagent bottles 5-29
power switches 5-18 Reagent confirmation 5-28
Precautions for Operating the System 2-6 Reagent ID 13-4
Reagent OD Limit 4-31
Pre-Dilution Rate 4-30 Reagent refrigeration unit 3-27
Preventing Damage to Other Equipment 2-4 Reagent refrigerator status 6-5
Preventing Electric Shocks 2-4 reagent setting 5-29
Preventing Fire and Damage 2-4 Reagent transfer unit 3-24
Reagent Type 4-30
Preventing Infection 2-5 Reagent Volume 4-30
Preventing Personal and Serious Injury 2-5 reagent blank
Preventing Water Leaks 2-9 Reagent Blank 3-2
Principle of the ISE 3-10 Reference to Factor 6-22
print format 4-76 reference to reagent blank 6-17
reference to reagent blank data 6-21
Printing Data other than Normal Sample 6-42
real-time printing 4-78
Processing time 3-34
Reference value (cumulative value) 4-64
Profile 4-21
Reference value (preset) 4-62
protocol for online 4-12
Reflex Range 4-46
Reflex Testing 13-4
Q Registration of controls to be used with the STAT
table 4-66
QC Analysis 4-59
QC Monitor 13-3

repeat run sample blank correction 3-4
Repeat Run 13-4 Sample cup 5-7
Repeat run Group Setting 4-44
Sample Cups and Tubes 3-21
Repeat run with condense 4-42
Repeat run with diluent 4-42 sample data
Repeat Run Work List 6-46 Correction of Patient Sample Data 6-61
Repeat Tests 4-42 Recalculation of Analysis Data 6-63
Repeat-run Parameters 4-45 Rewriting of Patient Sample Data 6-59
transferring edited data 6-64
Replacing cuvettes 8-73
Sample diluent 3-14, 13-4
Replacing Mixing Bars 8-79
Sample Order 5-13
Replacing O-rings in the wash nozzle 8-71
Sample Transfer unit 3-23
Replacing packing in the wash nozzle tube
mounting joint 8-105 Sample Volume 4-30
Replacing Parts 2-10 sample volume 5-10
replacing probe 8-76 see if an alarm occurred 6-24
Replacing rack ID labels 8-94 self-blank method 3-4
Replacing syringes 8-85, 8-99 Sequential analysis 4-3
Replacing the antistatic brush 8-93 Sequential mode 3-12
Replacing the Deionised Water Filter 8-51 Set the analysis parameters 4-3
Replacing the Detergent Rolling Tube 8-58 Setting Password 7-4
Replacing the Photometer Lamp 8-61 Setting User Name 7-4
Replacing the Sample Probe Filter 8-53 shut down the operation system 3-34
Replacing the Tubing Tube 8-95 shutdown the system 6-53
Replacing the wash nozzle joint 8-81 Simple STAT Mode 6-38
requisition Standard Deviation 13-5
requisition for advance calibration 5-34 Start Condition 5-20
requisition for calibration 5-33 STAT Operation 4-3
Requisition for Calibration Analysis with
STAT table
STAT table 5-35
automatic analysis mode 6-32
Requisition for QC analysis with STAT table
ID editing 6-36
5-39
sample confirmation mode 6-33
Requisition for Repeat Run 6-45
STAT analysis pause 6-35
Requisitions (batch) 5-45
STAT table 6-6
Requisitions (downloading) 5-46
STAT table sample placement positions 4-6
Requisitions (emergency sample) 5-47
STAT table unit 3-28
Requisitions (manual) 5-43
Test Requisitions 13-5 stop the analysis 3-34
Requisition Information Receiving Method 4-10 stop the rack feeder 3-34, 6-52
RESET button 3-19 Syringe unit 3-30
restart after feeder stop 6-52 System Switches and Buttons 3-18
S T
S. ID Barcode 4-3 TABLE ROTATION/DIAG button 3-19
sample Tank storage 3-31
Precautions in handling and storing samples Temperature and Humidity Conditions 2-14
2-8 Test Name 4-15
Pretreating samples 2-8
Transfer of Overwritten Data 6-49
Samples available for analysis 2-8
Sample Barcode 5-4
sample blank 3-4

troubleshooting user level 7-4
Abnormal Sound 11-17 User menu 7-10
Barcode Errors 11-18
using the analyzer independently 2-11
Bubbles in the syringe 11-10
Check for an abnormal cuvette 11-3
Check the calibrator 11-8
Check the deionized water 11-8 W
Check the photocal measurement 11-5 W1 13-5
Check the QC 11-8
Check the reagents 11-7 W2 13-5
Checking Abnormal Data 11-3 Warning Labels 2-3
Checking Patient Data 11-4 Wash nozzle unit 3-26
Checking the Calibration 11-5 Washing Cuvettes and the Cuvette Wheel 8-65
Compare the calibration data 11-3
Compare the reaction processes 11-2 Washing sample probe 8-19
Data Problem Checklist 11-2 Water Supply 2-14
emergency stop 11-26 Wave Length 4-31
hardware malfunctions 11-10 ways to repeat 6-44
identify data problems 11-2
Incubation Temperature 11-14 Work List Printing 6-43
Keyboard Not Responding 11-23
Leaking from a Probe 11-19
leaking from syringes 11-10
Leaks from the detergent rolling pump 11-17
Leaks from the System 11-18
Menu Cannot be Selected 11-22
mixing bars 11-13
mixing unit malfunctions 11-13
No Data Stored on Disc 11-24
No Detergent to Mixing Bars 11-18
No Sample Cup on the STAT Table 11-19
Online Auto-Output Not Executed 11-24
Photometer Lamp 11-13
position of the probe 11-11
power failure 11-26
probes leaking 11-11
Processor Problems 11-22
reagent refrigerator temperature 11-15
Results Do Not Print 11-24
room temperature 11-14
Sample Rack Jammed 11-20
sample requirements 11-6
STAT table temperature 11-15
Syringe Problems 11-10
Verifying Parameters 11-4
water tank dirty 11-13
Tubing Diagram of the Wash Nozzles 8-42
Twin Plot 6-28, 13-5
Typographical Conventions 1-7
U
Unit Status Descriptions 6-9
User Guide
print this guide 1-6

AU680 User Guide Revision History Table
Version flag A: Analyzer, B: Parts, S: Program, V: Document version number
Year/month/ content Revised page Version Confir

Revision method
day Replacing number mations
Aug. 21, 2007 New Manual All page 1st Edition
Oct. 26, 2007 Clerical errors All page Add on V2
corrected and change
descriptions
added.
Jan. 11, 2008 Clerical errors All page Add on V3
descriptions
added.
Apr. 25, 2008 Clerical errors All page Add on V4
descriptions
added.
R-1

AU680 Manual

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

AU680 Manual

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

AU680

Olympus Life Science Research Europa GmbH

Mishima Olympus Co. Ltd.

Lumi-Phos ® 530 is a registered trademark of Lumigen, Inc., Southfield, Michigan, USA.

Manufacturer EC REP Authorized Representative in the European Community

1.3 Using the Online Help....................................................................1-4

2 Precautions, Installation and Specifications ......2-1

AU680 User Guide Version4.0 Contents i

2.2 Installation Environment Precautions ..........................................2-12

2.3 System Labels and Displays........................................................2-29

3 System Outline ..................................................3-1

3.2 Key Sub-Processes .....................................................................3-11

3.3 Understanding and Handling Reagents,

3.4 Understanding the System Hardware ..........................................3-16

ii Contents AU680 User Guide Version4.0

3.5 Understanding the Computer Software .......................................3-33

4 Configuring Tests .............................................4-1

4.2 Setting the System Time................................................................4-9

4.4 Entry of Test Items.......................................................................4-15

4.5 Setting Specific Test Parameters ................................................4-28

AU680 User Guide Version4.0 Contents iii

4.6 Programming Repeat Tests .........................................................4-42

4.7 Set Calibration Analysis...............................................................4-47

4.8 Configuring QC Analysis..............................................................4-59

4.9 Setting the Tests to be Checked..................................................4-69

4.11 Setting up Data Lists....................................................................4-76

4.12 Setting the test requisition format ................................................4-81

5 Preparing for Analysis .......................................5-1

5.2 Starting the System .....................................................................5-18

iv Contents AU680 User Guide Version4.0

5.4 Performing Daily Maintenance.....................................................5-32

6.5 Processing Emergency Samples.................................................6-30

6.6 Printing Results............................................................................6-41

6.8 Forwarding the Data to Other PC ................................................6-50

AU680 User Guide Version4.0 Contents v

6.15 Confirming the ISE (option) status ...............................................6-65

7 Additional Tasks ................................................7-1

7.3 Creating a User Menu..................................................................7-10

7.5 Calibration Verification .................................................................7-19

7.6 Using Comment Master ...............................................................7-22

7.8 Print the Set Contents..................................................................7-31

vi Contents AU680 User Guide Version4.0

8.3 Daily Maintenance .........................................................................8-7

8.4 Weekly Maintenance ...................................................................8-18

8.5 Monthly Maintenance...................................................................8-29

8.6 Maintenance Every Three Months ...............................................8-49

8.7 Maintenance Performed Every Six Months .................................8-61

8.8 Maintenance Performed Yearly or As Necessary........................8-70

AU680 User Guide Version4.0 Contents vii

8.9 Resetting the system when switched to the stop mode

8.11 AU680 Maintenance Schedule ..................................................8-110

10 Error Messages ...............................................10-1

11.3 Troubleshooting the System - Reagents and Samples ...............11-6

viii Contents AU680 User Guide Version4.0

11.5 Troubleshooting the System - System Problems.......................11-16

11.6 Troubleshooting the System - Data Processor Problems ..........11-22

AU680 User Guide Version4.0 Contents ix

12 Menu Tree .......................................................12-1

13 AU680 Terminology .........................................13-1

x Contents AU680 User Guide Version4.0

Thank you for choosing the Olympus AU680

1.1 Olympus Guarantee. See page 1-2.

AU680 User Guide Version4.0 1. Introduction 1-1

1.2 Using this Guide